summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2009-05-23 00:14:50 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2009-05-23 00:14:50 +0000
commitac7c62d7555a6cebca926dc51ebc39cb235982db (patch)
tree8411809d969764b8f25e7ad5082c08f3577aee00 /Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst
parentaf6a89d1cc9fae03dc3a8dc7b19e324266bf0596 (diff)
use doc subdirs
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@13408 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/README116
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/encspecs.tex1334
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/omxdraft.etx985
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/ot1draft.etx1027
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/t1draft.etx1484
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex.tex431
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex2.tex50
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.dvibin207780 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.pdfbin381721 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.tex4160
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.dvibin62532 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.pdfbin172067 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.tex1330
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/roadmap.eps265
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tables.pdfbin201767 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tutorial.pdfbin242186 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparemetrics.sty941
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparepls.tex73
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/scaledtest.tex8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/speedtest1.tex62
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testfont.tex208
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testsc.tex41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.mtx22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.tex214
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1902test.tex11
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1905test.tex22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.mtx64
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.tex12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1913test.tex21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914test.tex50
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testmap.tex17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testshow.tex22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915test.tex25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915testmap.tex9
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.mtx23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.tex14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test2.tex27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1923test.tex47
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1927test.tex18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test.tex13
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test2.tex32
41 files changed, 0 insertions, 13178 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/README
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e5f39cde19..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/README
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
-README for fontinst
-
-* What is it?
-
-Fontinst is a program that helps with installing fonts
-for (La)TeX. Since it is written entirely in TeX macros,
-it is completely portable.
-
-More precisely, fontinst helps mainly with the number
-crunching and shoveling parts of font installation. This
-means in practice that it creates a number of files which
-give the TeX metrics (and related information) for a font
-family that (La)TeX needs to do any typesetting in these
-fonts. Fontinst furthermore makes it easy to create fonts
-containing glyphs from more than one base font, taking
-advantage of e.g. "expert" font sets.
-
-Fontinst cannot examine files to see if they contain any
-useful information or work with binary file formats; those
-tasks must normally be done manually or with the help of
-some other tool, such as the pltotf and vptovf programs.
-Nor can fontinst automatically search for files, but if
-they are named according to the fontname scheme (Berry)
-then fontinst sometimes succeeds very well in guessing
-what the interesting files are called.
-
-
-* Documentation
-
-The doc directory contains pure documentation; in
-particular the doc/manual directory should be of
-interest, as it contains the fontinst manual. For all
-questions about how one uses fontinst, see this manual.
-
-Sadly, the manual has been neglected for some time, and
-although it was recently revised, much remains to do.
-In particular, several commands still lack description and
-explanations (although at least the manual now lists
-all the syntaxes). Some alternative sources of information
-that you may find useful are:
-
- * Philipp Lehman's "The Font Installation Guide"
- Available on CTAN, at info/Type1fonts/fontinstallationguide/
-
- * intro98.tex - parts of the 1998 fontinst v1.8 manual
- that were split off during the recent revision.
-
- * The fontinst mailing list and its archives
- (See below for relevant addresses.)
-
- * The fontinst Literate Programming sources (see
- source/fisource.dvi). If a command isn't documented
- anywhere else, there is probably a discussion of it
- in the sources. They're thoroughly indexed.
-
-The examples directory contains some examples (with
-comments) of using fontinst to install a font family.
-
-
-* Installation
-
-To use fontinst, you only need to make sure the inputs
-directory and its subdirectories are on TeX's input path.
-Usually you do this by moving it to a suitable location.
-In a TDS texmf tree, the inputs directory is usually
-made the ${TEXMF}/tex/fontinst directory.
-
-You will probably also want to move the file fontdoc.sty
-in the latex directory to some location where TeX will
-find it. Many of the .mtx and .etx files in the inputs
-hierarchy are simultaneously fontinst input files and
-LaTeX documents; the fontdoc package is needed to typeset
-them as the latter. In a TDS texmf tree, the normal place
-for fontdoc.sty is in the tex/latex/misc directory.
-
-Also recall that some TeX implementations maintain a
-database over files that have been installed. If you've
-placed fontinst in a suitable place but TeX complains it
-cannot find the file fontinst.sty then the problem may
-be that you need to update this database of files. That
-is however nothing that is particular for fontinst.
-
-
-* Latin and other scripts
-
-The fontinst distribution includes the necessary encoding
-definition (.etx) files for the latin script as used in
-European languages, but there is nothing in fontinst as
-a program that restricts it to these languages. In the T2
-bundle (CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/t2) there are
-corresponding fontinst files for the cyrillic scripts
-(and in the future it might become part of the main
-fontinst distribution).
-
-
-* The test directory
-
-This is mainly of interest for advanced fontinst users.
-It collects some files that were written to test the new
-features in various versions of fontinst.
-
-
-* Mailing list
-
-Questions and bug reports should be sent to the fontinst
-mailing list
-
- fontinst@tug.org
-
-General information about the mailing list is at:
-
- http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/fontinst
-
-
-16 December 2004,
-Lars Hellstr\"om
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/encspecs.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/encspecs.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 88911506970..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/encspecs.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1334 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
-
-\usepackage{array}
-
-\makeatletter
-\@ifundefined{l@nohyphenation}{\newlanguage\l@nohyphenation}{}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
- \ensuremath{\langle}%
- \sbox{\z@}{%
- \setlanguage\l@nohyphenation
- \normalfont\itshape #1\/%
- \setlanguage\language
- }%
- \unhbox\z@
- \ensuremath{\rangle}%
-}
-\makeatother
-\DeclareRobustCommand\marg[1]{%
- \texttt{\char`\{}\meta{#1}\texttt{\char`\}}%
-}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
-
-\makeatletter
-\DeclareTextFontCommand\textsmaller{%
- \fontsize{\scaledsize{\f@size}}{\f@baselineskip}\selectfont
-}
-\newcommand\scaledsize[1]{%
- \ifdim #1\p@>6\p@
- \ifdim #1\p@>7\p@
- \ifdim #1\p@>8\p@
- \ifdim #1\p@>9\p@
- \ifdim #1\p@>10\p@
- \ifdim #1\p@>11\p@
- \ifdim #1\p@>12\p@
- \ifdim #1\p@>14\p@ 14%
- \else 12\fi
- \else 11\fi
- \else 10\fi
- \else 9\fi
- \else 8\fi
- \else 7\fi
- \else 6\fi
- \else 5\fi
-}
-\makeatother
-\DeclareRobustCommand\ETX{\textsmaller{ETX}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\PDF{\textsmaller{PDF}}
-
-% From tugboat.cls
-\def\thinskip{\hskip 0.16667em\relax}
-\def\endash{--}
-\def\emdash{\endash-}
-\makeatletter
-\def\d@sh#1#2{\unskip#1\thinskip#2\thinskip\ignorespaces}
-\def\dash{\d@sh\nobreak\endash}
-\def\Dash{\d@sh\nobreak\emdash}
-\def\ldash{\d@sh\empty{\hbox{\endash}\nobreak}}
-\def\rdash{\d@sh\nobreak\endash}
-\def\Ldash{\d@sh\empty{\hbox{\emdash}\nobreak}}
-\def\Rdash{\d@sh\nobreak\emdash}
-\makeatother
-
-\usepackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
-
-\newcommand{\TeXOmega}{Omega}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\eTeX{\ensuremath{\varepsilon}-\kern-.125em\TeX}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\package[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-
-\providecommand*{\href}[2]{#2}
-\newcommand*{\ctanref}[2]{\href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/#1}{#2}}
-
-\title{Writing \ETX\ format font encoding specifications}
-\author{Lars Hellstr\"om}
-\date{2003/07/09}
-
-\begin{document}
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
- This paper explains how one writes formal specifications of font
- encodings for \LaTeX\ and suggests a ratification procedure for such
- specifications.
-\end{abstract}
-
-
-\tableofcontents
-
-\vspace{0mm plus 35mm}
-\pagebreak[2]
-
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-This is a kind of FAQ on some initial questions, and my personal
-answers to those.
-
-\paragraph*{Why should one specify font encodings?}
-Because without a specification, font
-designers\footnote{Maybe not a good term, since it is really about
-making fonts available to \TeX. Some of these people actually
-design glyphs, but most of them merely working with the metrics.}
-cannot tell whether their fonts will work in general, they can
-only test that they work in the cases they know about. Font design
-is subject to a surprising amount of obscure technicalities and it
-is very hard to consider (or even find documentation that
-mentions) them all.
-
-\paragraph*{Why should one make formal specifications?}
-Because the informal specifications that we have today
-are incomplete and hard to use. E.g.\ the \LaTeX\
-\meta{enc}\texttt{enc.def} files only say something about the
-characters that are accessed via commands, and even for those you
-really have to do reverse engineering to figure out what the
-encoding contains. To figure out what the remaining characters
-should do you have to compile what the various user manuals claim
-to work and then work backwards from that, but I don't think the
-general problem of which character tokens are allowed in input is
-thoroughly treated anywhere. On top of that, \LaTeX\ itself
-contributes some character tokens when the document is being
-typeset.\footnote{This is basically the ``a \texttt{T}$*$ encoding
-must contain the characters \ldots'' problem that was the reason
-that the \texttt{T2} encoding had to be split up.}
-
-On the other side of things there are the files which tell e.g.
-\textsf{fontinst} or \textsf{AFMtoTFM} what the target font
-encoding is. These are basically recipes which are known (?\@) to
-produce valid results, and they do usually provide more
-information about the encoding than the sources listed above, but
-they don't give much information about where the recipe can be
-modified.
-
-\paragraph*{Why use the \ETX\ format?}
-To begin with it is an established format; many of those
-who are making fonts already use it, even if for a slightly
-different purpose. Another major reason is that an \ETX\ file is both
-a \LaTeX\ document and a processable data file; this is the same kind
-of bilinguality that has made the \texttt{.dtx} format so useful.
-Finally the \ETX\ format makes it easy to create experimental font
-installations when a new encoding is being designed; \textsf{fontinst}
-can directly read the file, but the file can also be automatically
-converted to a PostScript encoding vector if that approach seems more
-convenient.
-
-On the other hand, there are some features (such as the prominent
-role of the glyph names) of the \ETX\ format that would
-probably had been done differently in a file format that was built
-from scratch, but then you would also lose several of the advantages
-listed above.
-
-
-\section{Points to keep in mind}
-
-\subsection{Characters, glyphs, and slots}
-
-One fundamental difference one must understand is that between
-characters and glyphs. A \emph{character} is a semantic entity---it
-carries some meaning, even if you usually have to combine several
-characters to make up even one word---whereas a \emph{glyph} simply
-is a piece of graphics. In printed text, glyphs are used to represent
-characters and the first step of reading is to determine which
-character(s) a given glyph is representing.\footnote{Some \PDF\ viewers
-also try to accomplish this, but in general they need extra
-information to do it right. The generic solution provided is to embed
-a \emph{ToUnicode CMap}\Ldash which is precisely a map from slots to
-characters\Rdash in the \PDF\ font object.}
-
-In the output, \TeX\ neither deals with characters nor glyphs, really
-(although many of its messages speak of characters), but with
-\emph{slots}, which essentially are numbered positions in a font. To
-\TeX, a slot is simply something which can have certain metric
-properties (width, height, depth, etc.\@) but to the driver which
-actually does the printing the slot also specifies a glyph. The same
-slot in two different fonts can correspond to two quite different
-characters.
-
-For completeness it should also be mentioned that the \emph{input} of
-\TeX\ is a stream of semantic entities and thus \TeX\ is dealing with
-characters on that side, but the input is not the subject of this
-paper.
-
-
-\subsection{Ligatures}
-
-In typography, a \emph{ligature} is a glyph which has been formed by
-joining glyphs that represent two or more characters; this joining can
-involve quite a lot of deformation of the original shapes. Examples
-of ligatures are the `fi' ligature (from `f' and `i'), the `\AE'
-ligature (from `A' and `E'), and the `\textit{\&}' character (from `E'
-and `t'), the latter two of which has evolved to become characters of
-their own. For those ligatures (such as `fi') that have not evolved to
-characters, \TeX\ has a mechanism for forming the ligature out of the
-characters it is composed from, under the guidance of ligature\slash
-kerning programs found in the font.
-
-More technically, what happens is really that if the |\char| (or
-equivalent) for one slot is immediately followed by the |\char| (or
-equivalent) for another (or the same) slot and there is a ligaturing
-instruction in the \texttt{\small LIGKERN} table of the current font
-which applies to this slot pair then this ligaturing instruction is
-executed. This usually replaces the two slots in the pair with a
-single new slot specified by the ligaturing instruction (it could
-also keep one or both of the original slots, but that is less common).
-\TeX\ has no idea about whether these replacements change the meaning
-of anything, but \TeX\ assumes that it doesn't, and it is up to the
-font designer to ensure that this is the case.
-
-Apart from forming ligatures in text, the ligaturing mechanism of
-\TeX\ is traditionally also employed for another task which is much
-more problematic. Ligatures are also used to produce certain
-characters which are not part of visible ASCII---the most common are
-the endash (typed as |--|) and the emdash (typed as |---|). This is a
-problem because it violates \TeX's assumption that the meaning is
-unchanged; the classical problem with this appears in the \texttt{OT2}
-encoding, where the Unicode character \texttt{U+0446}
-(\textsc{cyrillic small letter tse}) could be typed as |ts|, whilst
-the |t| and |s| by themselves produced Unicode characters
-\texttt{U+0442} (\textsc{cyrillic small letter te}) and \texttt{U+0441}
-(\textsc{cyrillic small letter es}) respectively. \TeX's hyphenation
-mechanism can however decompose ligatures, so it sometimes happened
-that the \textsc{tse} was hyphenated as \textsc{te}-\textsc{es},
-which is quite different from what was intended. Since this is such
-an obvious disadvantage, the use of ligatures for forming non-English
-letters quickly disappeared after 8-bit input encodings became
-available. The practice still remains in use for punctuation, however,
-and the font designer must be aware of this. For many font encodings
-there is a set of ligatures which must be present and replace two or
-more characters by a single, different character. These ligatures are
-called \emph{mandatory ligatures} in this paper.
-
-The use of mandatory ligatures in new font encodings is strongly
-discouraged, for a number of reasons. The main problem is that they
-create unhealthy dependencies between input and output encoding,
-whereas these should ideally be totally independent. Using ligatures
-in this way complicates the internal representation of text, and it
-also makes it much harder to typeset text where those ligatures are not
-wanted (such as verbatim text). Furthermore it creates problems with
-kerning, since the ``ligature'' has not yet been formed when a kern
-to the left of it is inserted. Finally, a much better solution (when
-it is available) is to use an \TeXOmega\ translation process
-(see~\cite[Sec.~8--11]{Omega-doc}), since that \emph{is} independent
-of the font, different translations can be combined, and they can
-easily handle even ``abbreviations'' much more complicated than those
-ligatures can deal with.
-
-
-\subsection{Output stages}
-
-On its way out of \LaTeX\ towards the printed text, a character passes
-through a number of stages. The following five seem to cover what is
-relevant for the present discussion:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item \emph{\LaTeX\ Internal Character Representation} (LICR);
- see~\cite{LaTeXCompanion}, Section~7.11 for a full description.
- At this point the character is a character token (e.g.~|a|),
- a text command (e.g.~|\ss|), or a combination (e.g.~|\H{o}|).
- \item \emph{Horizontal material;} this is what the character is
- en route from \TeX's mouth to its stomach. For most characters
- this is equivalent to a single |\char| command (e.g.\ |a| is
- equivalent to |\char|\,|97|), but some require more than one, some
- are combined using the |\accent| and |\char| commands, some
- involve rules and\slash or kerns, and some are built using boxes
- that arbitrarily combine the above elements.
- \item \emph{DVI commands;} this is the DVI file commands that
- produce the printed representation of the character.
- \item \emph{Printed text;} this is the graphical representation of
- the character, e.g. as ink on paper or as a pattern on a computer
- screen. Here the text consists of glyphs.
- \item \emph{Interpreted text;} this is essentially printed text
- modulo equivalence of interpretation, hence the text doesn't really
- reach this stage until someone reads it. Here the text consists of
- characters.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-In theory there is a universal mapping from LICR to interpreted text,
-but various technical restrictions make it impossible to simultaneously
-support the entire mapping. A \LaTeX\ encoding selects a restriction
-of this mapping to a limited set which will be ``well supported''
-(meaning kerning and such between characters in the set works), whereas
-elements outside this set at best can be supported through temporary
-encoding changes. The encoding also specifies a decomposition of the
-mapping into one part which maps LICR to horizontal material and one
-part which maps horizontal material to interpreted text. The first
-part is realized by the text command definitions usually found in the
-\meta{enc}\texttt{enc.def} file for the encoding. The second part is
-the font encoding, the specification of which is the topic of this
-paper. It is also worth noticing that an actual font is a mapping of
-horizontal material to printed text.
-
-An alternative decomposition of the mapping from LICR to interpreted
-text would be at the DVI command level, but even though this
-decomposition is realized in most \TeX\ implementations, it has very
-little relevance for the discussion of encodings. The main reason for
-this is that it depends not only on the encoding of a font, but
-also on its metrics. Furthermore it is worth noticing that in e.g.\
-pdf\TeX\ there need not be a DVI command level.
-
-
-\subsection{Hyphenation}
-
-There are strong connections between font encoding and hyphenation because
-\TeX's hyphenation mechanism operates on horizontal material; more
-precisely the hyphenation mechanism only works on pieces of horizontal
-material that are equivalent to sequences of |\char| commands. This
-implies that hyphenation patterns, as selected via the |\language|
-parameter, are not only for a specific language, they are also for a
-specific font encoding.
-
-The hyphenation mechanism uses the |\lccode| values to distinguish
-between three types of slots: lower case letters (|\lccode|\(\,n =
-n\)), upper case letters (|\lccode|\(\,n \notin \{0,n\}\)), and
-non-letters (|\lccode|\(\,n = 0\)); only the first two types can be
-part of a hyphenatable word and only lower case letters are needed
-in the hyphenation patters. This does however place severe
-restrictions on how letters can be placed in a text font because
-\TeX\ uses the same |\lccode| values for all text in a paragraph and
-therefore these values cannot be changed whenever the encoding changes.
-In \LaTeX\ the |\lccode| table is not allowed to change at all and
-consequently all text font encodings must work using the standard set
-of |\lccode| values.
-
-In \eTeX\ each set of hyphenation patterns has its own set of
-|\lccode| values for hyphenation, so the problem isn't as severe
-there. The hyphenation mechanism of \TeXOmega\ should become
-completely independent of the font encoding, although the last time I
-checked it was still operating on material encoded according to
-a font encoding.
-
-
-\subsection{Production and specification \ETX\ files}
-
-Finally, it is worth pointing out the difference between an \ETX\ file
-created for the specification of a font encoding and one created for
-being used in actually producing fonts with this encoding. They are
-usually not the same. Specification \ETX s certainly may be of direct
-use in the production of fonts---especially experimental fonts
-produced as part of the work on a new encoding---but they are usually
-not ideal for the purpose. In particular there is often a need to
-switch between alternative names for a glyph to accommodate what is
-actually in the fonts, but such trickeries are undesirable
-complications in a specification. On the other hand a production
-\ETX\ file has little need for verbose comments, whereas they are rather
-an advantage in a specification \ETX\ file.
-
-Therefore one shouldn't be surprised if there are two \ETX\ files for a
-specific encoding: one which is a specification version and one which
-is a production version. If both might need to be in the same
-directory then one should, as a rule of thumb, include a
-`\texttt{spec}' in the name of the specification version.
-
-
-\section{Font encoding specifications}
-
-\subsection{Basic principles}
-
-Most features of the font encoding are categorized as either
-\emph{mandatory} or \emph{ordinary}. The mandatory features are what
-macros may rely on, whereas the ordinary simply are something which
-fonts with this encoding normally provide. Font designers may choose
-to provide other features than the ordinary, but are recommended to
-provide the ordinary features to the extent that the available
-resources permit.
-
-Many internal references in the specification are in the form of
-\emph{glyph names} and the choice of these is a slightly tricky
-matter. From the point of formal specification, the choices can be
-completely arbitrary, but from the point of practical usefulness they
-most likely are not. One of the main advantages of the \ETX\ format
-for specifications is that such specifications can also be used to
-make experimental implementations, but this requires that the glyph
-names in the specification are the same as those used in the fonts
-from which the experimental implementation should be built. Yet
-another aspect is that the glyph names are best chosen to be the ones
-one can expect to find in actual fonts, as that will make things
-easier for other people that want to make non-experimental
-implementations later. For this last purpose, a good reference is
-Adobe's technical note on Unicode and glyph names~\cite{unicodesign}.
-For most common glyphs, \cite{unicodesign} ends up recommending that
-one should follow the Adobe glyph list~\cite{AGL}, which however has
-the peculiar trait of recommending names on the form
-\texttt{afii}\textit{ddddd} (rather than the Unicode-based alternative
-\texttt{uni}\textit{xxxx}) for most non-latin glyphs. This is somewhat
-put in perspective by~\cite{ATN5013}.
-
-
-\subsection{Slot assignments}
-
-The purpose of the slot assignments is to specify for each slot which
-character or characters it is mapped to. That one slot is mapped to
-many characters is an unfortunate, but not very uncommon, reality in
-many encodings, as limitations in font size have often encouraged
-identifications of two characters which are almost the same. It should
-be avoided in new encodings.
-
-Slot assignmets are done using the |\nextslot| command and a
-|\setslot| \dots\ |\endsetslot| construction as follows:
-\begin{quote}
- |\nextslot|\marg{slot number}\\*
- |\setslot|\marg{glyph name}\\*
- \mbox{\quad}\meta{slot commands}\\*
- |\endsetslot|
-\end{quote}
-A typical example of this is
-\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
-\nextslot{65}
-\setslot{A}
- \Unicode{0041}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A}
-\endsetslot
-\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
-which gets typeset as
-\begin{quote}
- \textbf{Slot 65 `\texttt{A}'}\\*
- Unicode character \texttt{U+0041}, \textsc{latin capital letter a}.
-\end{quote}
-
-The |\nextslot| command does not typeset anything; it simply stores
-the slot number in a counter, for later use by |\setslot|. The
-|\endsetslot| command increments this counter by one. Hence the
-|\nextslot| command is unnecessary between |\setslot|s for consecutive
-slots. Besides |\nextslot|, there is also a command |\skipslots| which
-increments the slot number counter by a specified amount. The
-argument of both |\nextslot| and |\skipslots| can be arbitrary
-\package{fontinst} integer expressions (see~\cite{fontinst-man}). All
-\TeX\ \meta{number}s that survive full expansion are valid
-\package{fontinst} integer expressions, but for example |`\~| isn't,
-as |\~| is a macro which will break before the expression is typeset.
-These cases can however be fixed by preceding the \TeX\ \meta{number}
-by |\number|, as |\number`\~| survives full expansion by expanding to
-|126|.
-
-The main duty of the \meta{slot commands} is to specify the target
-character (or characters) for this slot. The simplest way of doing
-this is to use the |\Unicode| command, which has the syntax
-\begin{quote}
- |\Unicode|\marg{code point}\marg{name}
-\end{quote}
-The \meta{code point} is the number of the character (in hexadecimal
-notation, usually a four-digit number) and the \meta{name} is the name.
-Case is insignificant in these arguments. If a slot corresponds to a
-string of characters rather than to a single character, then one uses
-the |\charseq| command, which has the syntax
-\begin{quote}
- |\charseq|\marg{\cs{Unicode} commands}
-\end{quote}
-e.g.
-\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
-\nextslot{30}
-\setslot{ffi}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I}
- }
-\endsetslot
-\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
-Several |\Unicode| commands not in the argument of a |\charseq|
-instead mean that each of the listed characters is a valid
-interpretation of the slot.
-
-If a character cannot be specified in terms of Unicode code points then
-the specification should simply be a description in text which
-identifies the character. Such descriptions are written using the
-|\comment| command
-\begin{quote}
- |\comment|\marg{text}
-\end{quote}
-It is worth noticing that the \meta{text} is technically only an
-argument of |\comment| when the program processing the \ETX\ file is
-ignoring |\comment| commands. This means |\verb| and similar
-catcode-changing commands \emph{can} be used in the \meta{text}. The
-|\par| command is on the other hand not allowed in the \meta{text}.
-
-The |\comment| command should also be used for any further piece of
-explanation of or commentary to the character used for the slot, if the
-exposition seems to need it. There can be any number of |\comment|
-commands in the \meta{slot commands}.
-
-
-\subsection{Ligatures}
-
-There are three classes of ligatures in the font encoding
-specifications: mandatory, ordinary, and odd. Mandatory ligatures must
-be present in any font which complies with the encoding, whereas
-ordinary and odd ligatures need not be. No clear distinction can be
-made between ordinary and odd ligatures, but a non-mandatory ligature
-should be categorized as ordinary if it makes sense for the majority
-of users, and as odd otherwise. Hence the `fi' ligature is
-categorized as ordinary in the \texttt{T1} encoding (although it
-makes no sense in Turkish), whereas the `ij' ligature is odd.
-
-In the \ETX\ format, a ligature is specified using one of the slot
-commands
-\begin{quote}
- |\Ligature|\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\
- |\ligature|\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\
- |\oddligature|\marg{note}\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}
-\end{quote}
-|\Ligature| is used for mandatory ligatures, |\ligature| is used for
-ordinary ligatures, and |\oddligature| is used for odd ligatures. The
-\meta{right} and \meta{new} arguments are names of the glyphs being
-assigned to the slots involved in this ligature. The \meta{right}
-specifies the right part in the slot pair being affected by the
-ligature, whereas the left part is the one of the |\setslot| \dots\
-|\endsetslot| construction in which the ligaturing command is placed.
-The \meta{new} specifies a new slot which will be inserted by the
-ligaturing instruction. The \meta{ligtype} is the actual ligaturing
-instruction that will be used; it must be |LIG|, |/LIG|, |/LIG>|,
-|LIG/|, |LIG/>|, |/LIG/|, |/LIG/>|, or |/LIG/>>|. The slashes specify
-retention of the left or right original character; the |>| signs
-specify passing over that many slots in the result without further
-ligature processing. \meta{note}, finally, is a piece of text which
-explains when the odd ligature may be appropriate. It is typeset as a
-footnote.
-
-As an example of ligatures we find the following in the specification
-of the \texttt{T1} encoding:
-\begin{quote}
- |\nextslot{33}|\\
- |\setslot{exclam}|\\
- | \Unicode{0021}{EXCLAMATION MARK}|\\
- | \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{exclamdown}|\\
- |\endsetslot|
-\end{quote}
-It is typeset as
-\begin{quote}
- \textbf{Slot 33 `\texttt{exclam}'}\\*
- Unicode character \texttt{U+0021}, \textsc{exclamation mark}.\\*
- \textbf{Mandatory ligature}
- \texttt{exclam}${}*{}$\texttt{quoteleft}${}\rightarrow
- {}$\texttt{exclamdown}
-\end{quote}
-With other \meta{ligtype}s there may be more names listed on the
-right hand side and possibly a `$\lfloor$' symbol showing the
-position at which ligature processing will start afterwards.
-
-
-\subsection{Math font specialities}
-
-There are numerous technicalities which are special to math fonts, but
-only a few of them are exhibited in \ETX\ files.\footnote{For an
-overview of the subject, see for example Vieth~\cite{Vieth2001}.} Most
-of these have to do with the \TeX\ mechanisms that find sufficiently
-large characters for commands like |\left|, |\sqrt|, and |\widetilde|.
-
-The first mechanism for this is that a character in a font can sort of
-say ``If I'm too small, then then try character \dots\ instead''. This
-is expressed in an \ETX\ file using the |\nextlarger| command, which
-has the syntax
-\begin{quote}
- |\nextlarger|\marg{glyph name}
-\end{quote}
-The second mechanism constructs a sufficiently large character from
-smaller pieces; this is known as a `varchar' or `extensible character'.
-This is expressed in an \ETX\ file using an ``extensible recipe'', the
-syntax for which is
-\begin{quote}
- |\varchar| \meta{varchar commands} |\endvarchar|
-\end{quote}
-where each \meta{varchar command} is one of
-\begin{quote}
- |\varrep|\marg{glyph name}\\
- |\vartop|\marg{glyph name}\\
- |\varmid|\marg{glyph name}\\
- |\varbot|\marg{glyph name}
-\end{quote}
-There can be at most one of each and their order is irrelevant. The
-most important is the |\varrep| command, as that is the part which is
-repeated until the character is sufficiently large. The |\vartop|,
-|\varmid|, and |\varbot| commands are used to specify some other part
-which should be put at the top, middle, and bottom of the extensible
-character respectively. Not all extensible recipes use all of these,
-however.
-
-As an example, here is how a very large left brace is constructed:
-\begin{center}
- \begin{tabular}{>{%
- \fontencoding{OMX}\fontfamily{cmex}\selectfont
- $\vcenter\bgroup\hbox\bgroup
- }l<{\egroup\egroup$} l}
- \char"38& For |\vartop{bracelefttp}|\\
- \char"3E& For |\varrep{braceex}|\\
- \char"3C& For |\varmid{braceleftmid}|\\
- \char"3E& Again for |\varrep{braceex}|\\
- \char"3A& For |\varbot{braceleftbt}|
- \end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-
-Both |\nextlarger| and |\varchar| commands are like |\ligature| in
-that they describe ordinary features for the encoding; they appear in
-a specification \ETX\ file mainly to explain the purpose of some
-ordinary character. There is no such thing as a mandatory |\nextlarger|
-or |\varchar|, but varchars are occationally used to a similar effect.
-In these cases, the character generated by the extensible recipe is
-something quite different from what a |\char| for that slot would
-produce. Thus for the slot to produce the expected result it must be
-referenced using a |\delimiter| or |\radical| primitive, since those
-are the only ones which make use of the extensible recipe. The effect
-is that the slot has a \emph{semimandatory} assignment; the result of
-|\char| is unspecified (as for a slot with an ordinary assignment), but
-the result for a large delimiter or radical is not (as for a slot with
-a mandatory assignment).
-
-Thus some math fonts have an extra section ``Semimandatory characters''
-between the mandatory and ordinary character sections. In that section
-for the \texttt{OMX} encoding we find for example
-\begin{quote}\begin{verbatim}
-\nextslot{60}
-\setslot{braceleftmid}
- \Unicode{2016}{DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE}
- \comment{This is the large size of the |\Arrowvert|
- delimiter, a glyphic variation on |\Vert|.
- The \texttt{braceleftmid} glyph ordinarily
- placed in this slot must not be too tall,
- or else the extensible recipe actually producing
- the character might sometimes not be used.}
- \varchar
- \varrep{arrowvertex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-\end{verbatim}\end{quote}
-which is typeset as
-\begin{quote}
- \textbf{Slot 60 `\texttt{braceleftmid}'}\\*
- Unicode character \texttt{U+2016}, \textsc{double vertical line}.\\
- This is the large size of the |\Arrowvert|
- delimiter, a glyphic variation on |\Vert|.
- The \texttt{braceleftmid} glyph ordinarily
- placed in this slot must not be too tall,
- or else the extensible recipe actually producing
- the character might sometimes not be used.\\
- \textbf{Extensible glyph:}\\*
- \textbf{Repeated} \texttt{arrowvertex}
-\end{quote}
-
-
-
-
-\subsection{Fontdimens}
-
-Each \TeX\ font contains a list of fontdimens, numbered from $1$ and
-up, which are accessible via the |\fontdimen| \TeX\ primitive. Quite a
-few are also used implicitly by \TeX\ and therefore cannot be left out
-even if they are totally irrelevant, but as one can always include
-some extra fontdimens in a font---the only bounds on how many
-fontdimens there may be are the general bound on the size of a TFM
-file and the amount of font memory \TeX\ has available---this is
-usually not a problem.
-
-The reason fontdimens are part of font encoding specifications is
-that the meaning of e.g.\ |\fontdimen|\,|8| varies between different
-fonts depending on their encoding; thus the encoding specification
-must define the quantity stored in each |\fontdimen| parameter. This
-is done using the |\setfontdimen| command, which has the syntax
-\begin{quote}
- |\setfontdimen|\marg{number}\marg{name}
-\end{quote}
-The \meta{number} is the fontdimen number (as a sequence of decimal
-digits where the first digit isn't zero) and the \meta{name} is a
-symbolic name for the quantity.
-
-The standard list of symbolic names for fontdimen quantities appears
-below; the listed quantities should always be described using the names
-in this list. Encoding specifications that employ other quantities as
-fontdimens should include definitions of these quantities. Those
-quantities that are defined as ``Formula parameter \dots'' have to
-do with how mathematical formulae are rendered and are usually much
-too complicated to explain here. For exact definitions of these
-parameters, the reader is referred to Appendix~G of \textit{The
-\TeX book}~\cite{TeXbook}.
-\begin{list}{}{%
- \setlength\labelwidth{0pt}%
- \setlength\itemindent{-\leftmargin}%
- \def\makelabel#1{\hspace{\labelsep}\normalfont\itshape #1}%
- \setlength\itemsep{0.5\itemsep}%
- \setlength\parsep{0.5\parsep}%
-}
-\item[acccapheight]
- The height of accented full capitals.
-\item[ascender]
- The height of lower case letters with ascenders.
-\item[axisheight] Formula parameter $\sigma_{22}$.
-\item[baselineskip]
- The font designer's recommendation for natural length of the
- \TeX\ parameter |\baselineskip|.
-\item[bigopspacing1] Formula parameter $\xi_{9}$.
-\item[bigopspacing2] Formula parameter $\xi_{10}$.
-\item[bigopspacing3] Formula parameter $\xi_{11}$.
-\item[bigopspacing4] Formula parameter $\xi_{12}$.
-\item[bigopspacing5] Formula parameter $\xi_{13}$.
-\item[capheight]
- The height of full capitals.
-\item[defaultrulethickness] Formula parameter $\xi_{8}$.
-\item[delim1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{20}$.
-\item[delim2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{21}$.
-\item[denom1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{11}$.
-\item[denom2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{12}$.
-\item[descender]
- The depth of lower case letters with descenders.
-\item[digitwidth]
- The median width of the digits in the font.
-\item[extraspace]
- The natural width of extra interword glue at the end of a sentence.
- \TeX\ implicitly uses this parameter if |\spacefactor| is $2000$ or
- more and |\xspaceskip| is zero.
-\item[interword]
- The natural width of interword glue (spaces). \TeX\ implicitly uses
- this parameter unless |\spaceskip| is nonzero.
-\item[italicslant]
- The slant per point of the font. Unlike all other fontdimens, it is
- not proportional to the font size.
-\item[maxdepth]
- The maximal depth over all slots in the font.
-\item[maxheight]
- The maximal height over all slots in the font.
-\item[num1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{8}$.
-\item[num2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{9}$.
-\item[num3] Formula parameter $\sigma_{10}$.
-\item[quad]
- The quad width of the font, normally approximately equal to the
- font size and\slash or the width of an `M'. Also implicitly available
- as the length unit |em| and used for determining the size of the
- length unit |mu|.
-\item[shrinkword]
- The (finite) shrink component of interword glue (spaces). \TeX\
- implicitly uses this parameter unless |\spaceskip| is nonzero.
-\item[stretchword]
- The (finite) stretch component of interword glue (spaces). \TeX\
- implicitly uses this parameter unless |\spaceskip| is nonzero.
-\item[sub1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{16}$.
-\item[sub2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{17}$.
-\item[subdrop] Formula parameter $\sigma_{19}$.
-\item[sup1] Formula parameter $\sigma_{13}$.
-\item[sup2] Formula parameter $\sigma_{14}$.
-\item[sup3] Formula parameter $\sigma_{15}$.
-\item[supdrop] Formula parameter $\sigma_{18}$.
-\item[verticalstem]
- The dominant width of vertical stems. This quantity is meant to be used
- as a measure of how ``dark'' the font is.
-\item[xheight]
- The x-height (height of lower case letters without ascenders). Also
- implicitly available as the length unit |ex|.
-\end{list}
-
-
-\subsection{The codingscheme}
-
-The final encoding-dependent piece of information in a \TeX\ font is
-the codingscheme, which is essentially a string declaring what
-encoding the font has. This information is currently only used by
-programs that convert the information in a \TeX\ font to some other
-format and these use it to identify the glyphs in the font. Therefore
-this string should be chosen so that the contents of the slots in the
-font can be positively identified. Observe that the encoding
-specification by itself does not provide enough information for this,
-since there are usually a couple of slots that do not contain
-mandatory characters. On the other hand, it is not a problem in this
-context if the font leaves some of the slots (even mandatory ones)
-empty as that is anyway easily detected. The only problem is with
-fonts where the slots are assigned to other characters than the ones
-specified in the encoding.
-
-For that reason, it is appropriate to assign two codingscheme strings
-to each encoding. The main codingscheme is for fonts were all slots
-(mandatory and ordinary alike) have been assigned according to the
-specification or have been left empty. The variant codingscheme is for
-fonts where some ordinary slots have been assigned other characters
-than the ones listed in the specification, but where the mandatory
-slots are still assigned according to the specification or are left
-empty. The font encoding specification should give the main
-codingscheme name, whereas the variant codingscheme name could be
-formed by adding \verb*| VARIANT| to the main codingscheme name.
-
-Technically the codingscheme is specified by setting the
-\texttt{codingscheme} string variable. This has the syntax
-\begin{quote}
- |\setstr{codingscheme}|\marg{codingscheme name}
-\end{quote}
-e.g.
-\begin{quote}
- |\setstr{codingscheme}{EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN}|
-\end{quote}
-which is typeset as
-\begin{quote}
- \textbf{Default} s(\texttt{codingscheme}) =
- \verb*|EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN|
-\end{quote}
-A codingscheme name may be at most 40 characters long and may not
-contain parentheses. If the entire \verb*| VARIANT| cannot be suffixed
-to a main name because the result becomes to long (as in the above
-example) then use the first 40 characters of the result.
-
-
-\subsection{Overall document structure}
-\label{Ssec:Structure}
-
-The overall structure of a font encoding specification should be
-roughly the following
-\begin{quote}
- |\relax|\\
- |\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}|\\
- |\usepackage[specification]{fontdoc}|\\
- \meta{preamble}\\
- |\begin{document}|\\
- \meta{title}\\
- \meta{manifest}\\
- |\encoding|\\
- \meta{body}\\
- |\endencoding|\\
- \meta{discussion}\\
- \meta{change history}\\
- \meta{bibliography}\\
- |\end{document}|
-\end{quote}
-The commands described in the preceding subsections must all go in
-the \meta{body} part of the document, as that is the only part of the
-file which actually gets processed as a data file. The part before
-|\encoding| is skipped and the part after |\endencoding| is never
-even input, so whatever appears there is only part of the \LaTeX\
-document. For the purposes of processing as a data file, the
-important markers in the file are the |\relax|, the |\endcoding|, and
-the |\endencoding| commands.
-
-The \meta{title} is the usual |\maketitle| (and the like) stuff. The
-person or persons who appear as author(s) are elsewhere in this paper
-described as the \emph{encoding proposers}. The \meta{title} should
-also give the date when the specification was last changed.
-
-The \meta{manifest} is an important, although usually pretty short,
-part of the specification. It is a piece of text which explains the
-purpose of the encoding (in particular what it can be used for) and
-the basic ideas (if any) which have been used in its construction. It
-is often best marked up as an abstract.
-
-The \meta{discussion} is the place for any longer comments on the
-encoding, such as analyses of different implementations, comparisons
-with other encodings, etc. This is also the place to explain any more
-general structures in the encoding, such as the arrow kit in the
-proposed \texttt{MS2} encoding~\cite{ClasenVieth}. In cases where the
-specification is mainly a formulation of what is already an
-established standard the \meta{discussion} is often rather short as
-the relevant discussion has already been published elsewhere, but
-it is anyway a service to the reader to include this information.
-References to the original documents should always be given.
-
-It might be convenient to include an FAQ section at the end of the
-discussion. This is particularly suited for explaining things where
-one has to look for a while and consult the references to find the
-relevant information.
-
-The \meta{change history} documents how the specification has changed
-over time. It is preferably detailed, as each detail in an encoding
-is important, but one should not be surprised if it is anyway rather
-short due to that there haven't been that many changes.
-
-The \meta{bibliography} is an important part of the specification. It
-should at the very least include all the sources which have been used
-in compiling the encoding specification, regardless of whether they
-are printed, available on the net, merely ``personal communication'',
-or something else. It is also a service to the reader to include in
-the bibliography some more general references for related matters.
-
-The \meta{preamble} is just a normal \LaTeX\ preamble and there are no
-restrictions on defining new commands in it, although use of such
-commands in the \meta{body} part is subject to the same restrictions
-as use of any general \LaTeX\ command. The preamble should however
-\emph{not} load any packages not part of the required suite of
-\LaTeX\ packages, as that may prevent users who do not have these
-packages from typesetting the specification. Likewise, the
-specification should \emph{not} require that some special font is
-available. Glyph examples for characters are usually better
-referenced via Unicode character charts than via special fonts.
-
-An exception to this rule about packages is that the specification
-must load the \package{fontdoc} package, as shown in the outline
-above, since that defines the |\setslot| etc.\ commands that should
-appear in the \meta{body}. This should not be a problem, as the
-\package{fontdoc} package can preferably be kept in the same directory
-as the collection of encoding specifications (see below). The
-\texttt{specification} option should be passed to the package to let it know
-that the file being processed is an encoding specification---otherwise
-|\Ligature| and |\ligature| will get the same formatting, for one. It
-is not necessary to use the \package{article} document class, and
-neither must it be passed the \texttt{twocolumn} option, but it is
-customary to do so. In principle any other document class within
-required \LaTeX\ will do just as well.
-
-If you absolutely think that using some non-required package
-significantly improves the specification, then try writing the code so
-that is loads the package only if it is available and provide some
-kind of fallback definition for sites where it is not. E.g.\ the
-\package{url} package could be loaded as
-\begin{verbatim}
-\IfFileExists{url.sty}{\usepackage{url}}{}
-\providecommand\url{\verb}
-\end{verbatim}
-The |\url| command defined by this is not equivalent to the command
-defined by the \package{url} package, but it can serve fairly well
-(with a couple of extra overfull lines as only ill effect) if its
-use is somewhat restricted.
-
-Finally, a technical restriction on the \meta{preamble}, \meta{title},
-and \meta{manifest} is that they must not contain any mismatched
-|\if|s (of any type) or |\fi|s, as \TeX\ conditionals will be used for
-skipping those parts of the file when it is processed as a data file.
-If the definition of some macro includes mismatched |\if|s or |\fi|s
-(this will probably occur only rarely) then include some extra code
-so that they do match.
-
-
-% All technical parts of the encoding specification (slot assignments,
-% fontdimens, etc.\@) have to be in the \meta{encoding commands} part.
-% The other parts are suitably used for longer commentry, such as the
-% mainfest (see below), revision history, and bibliography.
-%
-% When the file is being typeset as a \LaTeX\ document there is nothing
-% special going on. The |\encoding| and |\endencoding| commands may set
-% some internal variables, but otherwise they do very little. When the
-% file is being read by \package{fontinst}, things are quite different.
-% Everything between the initial |\relax| and |\encoding| is skipped,
-% and the file is not read further than to the |\endencoding|. Hence
-% the \meta{preamble}, \meta{\LaTeX\ text 1}, and \meta{\LaTeX\ text 2}
-% can contain pretty much anything (with a few exceptions) which is
-% legal in a \LaTeX\ document.
-
-
-\subsection{Encoding specification body syntax}
-
-The \meta{body} part of an encoding specification must comply to a
-much stricter syntax than the rest of the file. The \meta{body} is
-a sequence of \meta{encoding command}s, each of which should be one
-of the following:
-\begin{quote}
- |\setslot|\marg{glyph name} \meta{slots commands} |\endsetslot|\\
- |\nextslot|\marg{number}\\
- |\skipslots|\marg{number}\\
- |\setfontdimen|\marg{number}\marg{name}\\
- |\setstr{codingscheme}|\marg{codingscheme name}\\
- |\needsfontinstversion|\marg{version number}
-\end{quote}
-The |\needsfontinstversion| command is usually placed immediately
-after the |\encoding| command. The \meta{version number} must be at
-least |1.918| for many of the features described in this file to be
-available, and at least |1.928| if the |\charseq| command is used.
-
-The \meta{slot commands} are likewise a sequence of \meta{slot
-command}s, each of which should be one of the following:
-\begin{quote}
- |\Unicode|\marg{code point}\marg{name}\\
- |\charseq|\marg{\cs{Unicode} commands}\\
- |\comment|\marg{text}\\
- |\Ligature|\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\
- |\ligature|\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\
- |\oddligature|\marg{note}\marg{ligtype}\marg{right}\marg{new}\\
- |\nextlarger|\marg{glyph name}\\
- |\varchar| \meta{varchar commands} |\endvarchar|
-\end{quote}
-where \meta{varchar commands} similarly is a sequence of \meta{varchar
-command}s, each of which should be one of the following:
-\begin{quote}
- |\varrep|\marg{glyph name}\\
- |\vartop|\marg{glyph name}\\
- |\varmid|\marg{glyph name}\\
- |\varbot|\marg{glyph name}
-\end{quote}
-Finally, one can include any number of \meta{comment command}s between
-any two encoding, slot, or varchar commands. The comment commands are
-\begin{quote}
- |\begincomment| \meta{\LaTeX\ text} |\endcomment|\\
- |\label|\marg{reference label}
-\end{quote}
-The \meta{\LaTeX\ text} can be pretty much any \LaTeX\ code that can
-appear in conditional text. (|\begincomment| is either |\iffalse| or
-|\iftrue| depending on whether the encoding specification is
-processed as a data file or typeset as a \LaTeX\ document respectively.
-|\endcomment| is always |\fi|.) The |\label| command is just
-the normal \LaTeX\ |\label| command; when it is used in a \meta{slot
-commands} it references that particular slot (by number and glyph
-name).
-
-The full syntax of the \ETX\ format can be found in the
-\package{fontinst} manual~\cite{fontinst-man}, but font encoding
-specifications only need a subset of that.
-
-
-\subsection{Additional \package{fontdoc} features}
-
-There is an ``in comment paragraph'' form |\textunicode| of the
-|\Unicode| command. Both commands have the same syntax, but
-|\textunicode| is only allowed in ``comment'' contexts. A typical use
-of |\textunicode| is
-\begin{quote}
- |\comment{An |\dots\\
- \quad\dots| this is \textunicode{2012}{FIGURE DASH}; in |\dots\\
- |}|
-\end{quote}
-which is typeset as
-\begin{quote}
- An \dots\ this is \texttt{U+2012} (\textsc{figure dash}); in \dots
-\end{quote}
-
-The \package{fontdoc} package inputs a configuration file
-\texttt{fontdoc.cfg} if that exists. This can be used to pass
-additional options to the package. The only currently available
-options that this could be of interest for are the \texttt{hypertex}
-and \texttt{pdftex} options, which hyperlinks each \texttt{U+}\dots\
-generated by |\Unicode| or |\textunicode| (using Hyper\TeX\ or
-pdf\TeX\ conventions\footnote{One could just as well do the same
-thing using some other convention if a suitable definition of
-\cs{FD@codepoint} is included in \texttt{fontdoc.cfg}. See the
-\package{fontinst} sources~\cite{fontinst-pre} for more details.}
-respectively) to a corresponding glyph image on the Unicode consortium
-website. To use this feature one should put the line
-\begin{quote}
- |\ExecuteOptions{hypertex}|
-\end{quote}
-or
-\begin{quote}
- |\ExecuteOptions{pdftex}|
-\end{quote}
-in the \texttt{fontdoc.cfg} file. \emph{Please} do not include this
-option in the |\usepackage|\nolinebreak[1]|{fontdoc}| of an encoding
-specification file as that can be a severe annoyance for people whose
-\TeX\ program or DVI viewers do not support the necessary extensions.
-% Hyper\TeX\ |\special|s.
-
-
-\section{Font encoding ratification}
-
-This section describes a suggested ratification process for font
-encoding specifications. As there are fewer technical matters that
-impose restrictions on what it may look like, it is probably more
-subjective than the other parts of this paper.
-
-\medskip
-
-A specification in the process of being ratified can be in one of
-three different stages: \emph{draft}, \emph{beta}, or \emph{final}.
-Initially the specification is in the draft stage, during which it
-will be scrutinized and can be subject to major changes. A
-specification which is in the beta stage has got a formal approval
-but the encoding in question may still be subject to some minor
-changes if weighty arguments present themselves. Once the
-specification has reached the final stage, the encoding may not
-change at all.
-
-
-\subsection{Getting to the draft stage}
-
-The process of taking an encoding to the draft stage can be
-summarized in the following steps. Being in the draft stage doesn't
-really say anything about whether the encoding is in any way correct
-or useful, except in that some people (the encoding proposers)
-believe it is and are willing to spend some time on ratifying it.
-
-\paragraph{Write an encoding specification} The first step is to
-write a specification for the font encoding in question. This
-document must not only technically describe the encoding but also
-explain what the encoding is for and why it was created. See
-Subsection~\ref{Ssec:Structure} for details on how the document is
-preferably organised.
-
-\paragraph{Request an encoding name} The second step is to write to
-the \LaTeX3 project and request a \LaTeX\ encoding name for the
-encoding. This mail should be in the form of a \LaTeX\ bug report, it
-must be sent to
-\begin{quote}
- \href{mailto:latex-bugs@latex-project.org}%
- {\texttt{latex-bugs@latex-project.org}},
-\end{quote}
-and it must include the encoding specification file. Suggestions for
-an encoding name are appreciated, but not necessarily accepted.
-The purpose of this mail is \emph{not} to get an approval of the
-encoding, but only to have a reasonable name assigned to it.
-
-\paragraph{Upload the specification to CTAN} The third step is make
-the encoding specification publicly available by uploading it to
-CTAN. Encoding specifications are collected in the
-\begin{quote}
- \ctanref{info/encodings}{\texttt{info/encodings}}
-\end{quote}
-directory (which should also contain the most recent version of this
-paper). The name of the uploaded file should be
-\meta{encoding name}\texttt{draft.etx}. The reason for this naming is
-that it must be clear that the specification has not yet been ratified.
-
-\paragraph{Announce the encoding} When the upload has been confirmed,
-it is time to announce the encoding by posting a message about it to
-the relevant forums. Most important is the \texttt{tex-fonts} mailing
-list, since that is where new encodings should be debated. Messages
-should also be posted to the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup and any
-forums related to the intended use of the encoding: an encoding for
-Sanskrit should be announced on Indian \TeX\ users forums, an
-encoding for printing chess positions should be announced on some
-chess-with-\TeX\ user forum, etc.; in the extent that such forums exist.
-
-The full address of the \texttt{tex-fonts} mailing list is
-\begin{quote}
- \texttt{tex-fonts@math.utah.edu}
-\end{quote}
-This list rejects postings from non-members, so you need to subscribe
-to it before you can post your announcement. This is done by sending
-a `subscribe me' mail to
-\begin{quote}
- \href{mailto:tex-fonts-request@math.utah.edu}
- {\texttt{tex-fonts-request@math.utah.edu}}
-\end{quote}
-The list archives can be found at
-\begin{quote}
- \href{http://www.math.utah.edu/mailman/listinfo/tex-fonts}
- {\textsc{http:}/\slash \texttt{www.math.utah.edu}\slash
- \texttt{mailman}\slash \texttt{listinfo}\slash
- \texttt{tex-fonts}}
-\end{quote}
-A tip is to read through the messages from a couple of months
-before you write up your announcement, as that should help you get
-acquainted with the normal style on the list. Please do not send
-messages encoded in markup languages (notably, \textsmaller{HTML},
-\textsmaller{XML}, and word processor formats) to the list.
-
-\paragraph{Experimental encodings} There is a point in going through
-the above procedure even for experimental encodings, i.e., encodings
-whose names start with an \texttt{E}. Of course there is no idea in
-ratifying a specification of an experimental encoding, as it is very
-likely to frequently change, but having a proper name assigned to the
-encoding and uploading its specification to CTAN makes it much simpler
-for other people to learn about and make references to the encoding.
-
-
-\subsection{From draft to beta stage}
-
-The main difference between a draft and beta stage specification
-respectively is that beta stage specifications have been scrutinized
-by other people and found to be free of errors. The practical
-implementation of this is that a debate is held (in the normal
-anarchical manner of mailing list debates) on the \texttt{tex-fonts}
-mailing list. In particular the following aspects of the
-specification should be checked:
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item \emph{Is the encoding technically correct?}
- There are many factors which affect what \TeX\ does and it is
- easy to overlook some. (The \cs{lccode}s seem to be particularly
- troublesome, in this respect.) Sometimes fonts simply cannot work
- as an encoding specifies they should and it is important that
- such defects in the encoding are discovered on an early stage.
- \item \emph{Are there any errors in the specification?}
- A font encoding specification is largely a table and typos are
- easy to make. Proof-reading may be boring, but it is very, very
- important.
- \item \emph{Is the specification sufficiently precise?}
- Are there any omissions, ambiguities, inaccuracies, or completely
- irrelevant material in the specification? There shouldn't be.
-\end{enumerate}
-During the debate, the encoding proposers should hear what other
-people have to say about the encoding draft, revise it accordingly
-when some flaw is pointed out, and upload the revised version. This
-cycle may well have to be repeated several times before everyone's
-content. It is worth pointing out that in practice the debate should
-turn out to be more of a collective authoring of the specification
-than a defense of its validity. There is no point in going into it
-expecting the worst.
-
-Unfortunately, it might happen that there never is a complete agreement
-on an encoding specification---depending on what side on takes, either
-the encoding proposers refuse to correct obvious flaws in it, or someone
-on the list insists that there is a flaw although there is obviously
-not---but hopefully that will never happen. If it anyway does happen
-then the person objecting should send a mail whose subject contains the
-phrase "formal protest against XXX encoding" (with XXX replaced by
-whatever the encoding is called) to the list. Then it will be up to
-the powers that be to decide on the fate of the encoding (see below).
-
-\paragraph{Summarize the debate} When the debate on the encoding is
-over---e.g.\ a month after anyone last posted anything new on the
-subject---then the encoding proposers should summarize the debate on
-the encoding specification draft and post this summary as a follow-up
-on the original mail to \texttt{latex-bugs}. This summary should list
-the changes that have been made to the encoding, what suggestions there
-were for changes which have not been included, and whether there were
-any formal protests against the encoding. The summary should also explain
-what the proposers want to have be done with the encoding. In the
-usual case this is having it advanced to beta stage, but the proposers
-might alternatively at this point have reached the conclusion that the
-encoding wasn't such a good idea to start with and therefore withdraw
-it, possibly to come again later with a different proposal.
-
-In response to this summary, the \LaTeX-project people may do one of
-three things:
-\begin{itemize}
- \item
- If the proposers wants the encoding specification advanced and
- there are no formal protests against this, then the encoding
- should be advanced to the beta stage. The \LaTeX-project
- people do this by adding the encoding to the list of approved
- (beta or final stage) encodings that they [presumably] maintain.
- \item
- If the proposers want to withdraw the encoding specification
- then the name assigned to it should once again be made available
- for use for other encodings.
- \item
- If the proposers want the encoding specification advanced but
- there is some formal protest against this, then the entire matter
- should be handed over to some suitable authority, as a suggestion
- some technical TUG committee, for resolution.
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\paragraph{Update the specification on CTAN} When the specification
-has reached the beta stage, its file on CTAN should be updated to say
-so. In particular the file name should be changed from \meta{encoding
-name}\texttt{draft.etx} to \meta{encoding name}\texttt{spec.etx}.
-
-
-\paragraph{Modifying beta stage encodings} If a beta stage encoding is
-modified then the revised specification should go through the above
-procedure of ratification again before it can replace the previous
-\meta{encoding name}\texttt{spec.etx} file on CTAN. The revised
-version should thus initially be uploaded as \meta{encoding
-name}\texttt{draft.etx}, reannounced, and redebated. It can however
-be expected that such debates will not be as extensive as the
-original debates.
-
-
-\subsection{From beta stage to final stage}
-
-The requirements for going from beta stage to final stage are more
-about showing that the encoding has reached a certain maturity than
-about demonstrating any technical merits of it. The main difference in
-usefulness between a beta stage encoding and a final stage encoding is
-that the latter can be considered safe for archival purposes, whereas
-one should have certain reservations against such use of beta stage
-encodings.
-
-It seems reasonable that the following conditions should have to be
-fulfilled before a beta stage encoding can be made a final stage
-encoding:
-\begin{itemize}
- \item At least one year must have passed since the last change was
- made to the specification.
- \item At least two people other than the proposer must have
- succeeded in implemented the encoding in a font.
-\end{itemize}
-It is quite possible that some condition should be added or some of
-the above conditions reformulated.
-
-
-% References updated 2004/08/07.
-\begin{thebibliography}{???}
-\bibitem{ATN5013}
- Adobe Systems Incorporated:
- \textit{Adobe Standard Cyrillic Font Specification},
- Adobe Technical Note \#5013, 1998;
- \href{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/pdfs/tn/%
- 5013.Cyrillic_Font_Spec.pdf}{\textsc{http}:/\slash
- \texttt{partners.adobe.com}\slash \texttt{asn}\slash
- \texttt{developer}\slash \texttt{pdfs}\slash \texttt{tn}\slash
- \texttt{5013.Cyrillic\_Font\_Spec.pdf}}.
-\bibitem{AGL}
- Adobe Systems Incorporated: \textit{Adobe Glyph List},
- text file, 1998,
- \href{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/type/glyphlist.txt}
- {\textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{partners.adobe.com}\slash
- \texttt{asn}\slash \texttt{developer}\slash \texttt{type}\slash
- \texttt{glyphlist.txt}}.
-\bibitem{unicodesign}
- Adobe Systems Incorporated:
- \textit{Adobe Solutions Network: Unicode and Glyph Names},
- web page, 1998,
- \href{http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/type/unicodegn.html}
- {\textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{partners.adobe.com}\slash
- \texttt{asn}\slash \texttt{developer}\slash \texttt{type}\slash
- \texttt{unicodegn.html}}.
-\bibitem{ClasenVieth}
- Matthias Clasen and Ulrik Vieth:
- \textit{Towards a new Math Font Encoding for (La)TeX},
- March 1998, presented at EuroTeX'98;
- \href{http://tug.org/twg/mfg/papers/current/mfg-euro-all.ps.gz}
- {\textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{tug.org}\slash \texttt{twg}\slash
- \texttt{mfg}\slash \texttt{papers}\slash \texttt{current}\slash
- \texttt{mfg-euro-all.ps.gz}}.
-\bibitem{fontinst-man}
- Alan Jeffrey, Rowland McDonnell, Ulrik Vieth, and Lars Hellstr\"om:
- \textit{\package{fontinst}---font installation software for \TeX}
- (manual), 2004,
- \ctanref{fonts/utilities/fontinst/doc/fontinst.tex}{%
- \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}%
- \texttt{fonts}\slash \texttt{utilities}\slash
- \texttt{fontinst}\slash \texttt{doc}\slash \texttt{fontinst.tex}}.
-% \bibitem{fontinst}
-% Alan Jeffrey, Sebastian Rahtz, and Ulrik Vieth:
-% \textit{The \package{fontinst} utility}, documented source code,
-% v\,1.801,
-% \ctanref{fonts/utilities/fontinst/source}{%
-% \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}%
-% \texttt{fonts}\slash \texttt{utilities}\slash
-% \texttt{fontinst}\slash \texttt{source}/}.
-\bibitem{fontinst-pre}
- Alan Jeffrey, Sebastian Rahtz, Ulrik Vieth, and Lars Hellstr\"om:
- \textit{The \package{fontinst} utility}, documented source code,
- v\,1.9xx,
- \ctanref{fonts/utilities/fontinst/source}{%
- \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}%
- \texttt{fonts}\slash \texttt{utilities}\slash
- \texttt{fontinst}\slash \texttt{source}/}.
-\bibitem{TeXbook}
- Donald E.\ Knuth, Duane Bibby (illustrations): \textit{The \TeX book},
- Ad\-di\-son--Wes\-ley, 1991;
- volume A of \textit{Computers and typesetting}.
-\bibitem{LaTeXCompanion}
- Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens, with Johannes Braams,
- David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley:
- \textit{The \LaTeX\ Companion} (second edition),
- Ad\-di\-son--Wes\-ley, 2004; ISBN~0-201-36299-6.
-\bibitem{Omega-doc}
- John Plaice and Yannis Haralambous:
- \textit{Draft documentation for the Omega system},
- version~1.12, 1999;
- \href{http://omega.cse.unsw.edu.au:8080/doc-1.12.ps}{%
- \textsc{http:}/\slash \texttt{omega.cse.unsw.edu.au:8080}\slash
- \texttt{doc-1.12.ps}}.
-% \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}%
-% \texttt{systems}\slash \texttt{omega}\slash
-% \texttt{omega-doc-1.8.tar.gz}.
-\bibitem{Vieth2001}
- Ulrik Vieth:
- \textit{Math typesetting in \TeX: The~good, the~bad, the~ugly},
- to appear in the proceedings of Euro\TeX\ 2001;
- \href{http://www.ntg.nl/eurotex/vieth.pdf}{%
- \textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{www.ntg.nl}\slash
- \texttt{eurotex}\slash \texttt{vieth.pdf}}.
-\end{thebibliography}
-
-
-\end{document} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/omxdraft.etx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/omxdraft.etx
deleted file mode 100644
index efccabde857..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/omxdraft.etx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,985 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
-\usepackage[specification]{fontdoc}[2001/06/01]
-
-% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textvisiblespace}{%
- \mbox{\kern.06em\vrule height.3ex}%
- \vbox{\hrule width.3em}%
- \hbox{\vrule height.3ex\kern.06em}}
-
-\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
-
-\showbranches
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\title{\texttt{OMX} encoding draft specification}
-\author{Lars Hellstr\"om}
-\date{2001/10/20}
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
- The \TeX\ math extensions (\texttt{OMX}) encoding is a container for
- most of the ``growing'' characters in the standard math set-up, but
- that is pretty much the extent of it. Some of the characters occur
- in ``normal size'' in other encodings; in these cases it is usually
- a single math command that usually make use of characters in both
- encodings.
-\end{abstract}
-
-
-\encoding
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Mandatory characters}
-
-\subsection{Delimiters}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{0}
-\setslot{parenleftbig}
- \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}
- \nextlarger{parenleftBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenrightbig}
- \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}
- \nextlarger{parenrightBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketleftbig}
- \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracketleftBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketrightbig}
- \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracketrightBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{floorleftbig}
- \Unicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR}
- \nextlarger{floorleftBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{floorrightbig}
- \Unicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR}
- \nextlarger{floorrightBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ceilingleftbig}
- \Unicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING}
- \nextlarger{ceilingleftBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ceilingrightbig}
- \Unicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING}
- \nextlarger{ceilingrightBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{braceleftbig}
- \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{braceleftBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracerightbig}
- \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracerightBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{angleleftbig}
- \Unicode{2329}{LEFT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{angleleftBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{anglerightbig}
- \Unicode{232A}{RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{anglerightBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{barex}
- \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE}
- \comment{This is used by the \cs{vert} command. When not accessed
- as a delimiter, this character may be much shorter than one
- would expect.}
- \varchar
- \varrep{barex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bardblex}
- \Unicode{2016}{DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE}
- \comment{This is used by the \cs{Vert} command. When not accessed
- as a delimiter, this character may be much shorter than one
- would expect.}
- \varchar
- \varrep{bardblex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{slashbig}
- \Unicode{2215}{DIVISION SLASH}
- \comment{Although this character is normally accessed via \TeX's
- growing delimiter mechanism, it is not used as such in formulae,
- but as a large division slash. Since the use is unambigously for
- division and the like, it would be inaccurate to identify this
- character with \textunicode{002F}{SOLIDUS}.}
- \nextlarger{slashBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{backslashbig}
- \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS}
- \comment{This is \TeX's \cs{backslash} (use for ``double coset''),
- not \cs{setminus}, and hence it is not
- \textunicode{2216}{SET MINUS}.}
- \nextlarger{backslashBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{62}
-\setslot{braceex}
- \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE}
- \comment{This is used by the \cs{bracevert} command.}
- \label{braceex}
- \varchar
- \varrep{braceex}
- \endvarchar
- \comment{This slot contains the repeatable part of a extensible
- brace delimiter. In the standard set-up, the extensible recipes of
- slots~\ref{bracelefttp}, \ref{bracerighttp}, \ref{braceleftbt},
- \ref{bracerightbt}, \ref{parenleftbt}, and \ref{parenrightbt} all
- make use of this slot.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{"42}
-\setslot{parenleftex}
- \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE}
- \comment{As astonishing as it may seem, there is no command which
- accesses this slot. The glyph is similar to that in
- slot~\ref{braceex}, but shifted to the left.}
- \varchar
- \varrep{parenleftex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenrightex}
- \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE}
- \comment{As astonishing as it may seem, there is no command which
- accesses this slot. The glyph is similar to that in
- slot~\ref{braceex}, but shifted to the right.}
- \varchar
- \varrep{parenrightex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{"7A}
-\setslot{bracehtipdownleft}
- \comment{This is \cs{braceld}, a tip (pointing left, bending down)
- used to build over- and underbraces.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracehtipdownright}
- \comment{This is \cs{bracerd}, a tip (pointing right, bending down)
- used to build over- and underbraces.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracehtipupleft}
- \comment{This is \cs{bracelu}, a tip (pointing left, bending up)
- used to build over- and underbraces.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracehtipupright}
- \comment{This is \cs{braceru}, a tip (pointing right, bending up)
- used to build over- and underbraces.}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Text style operators}
-
-With the exception of the integrals, all the following characters
-should be \textsc{n-ary \dots}, but some cases there are no such
-variants defined in Unicode.
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{"46}
-\setslot{unionsqtext}
- \Unicode{2294}{SQUARE CUP}
- \nextlarger{unionsqdisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{contintegraltext}
- \Unicode{222E}{CONTOUR INTEGRAL}
- \nextlarger{contintegraldisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{circledottext}
- \Unicode{2299}{CIRCLED DOT OPERATOR}
- \nextlarger{circledotdisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{circleplustext}
- \Unicode{2295}{CIRCLED PLUS}
- \nextlarger{circleplusdisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{circlemultiplytext}
- \Unicode{2297}{CIRCLED TIMES}
- \nextlarger{circlemultiplydisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{summationtext}
- \Unicode{2211}{N-ARY SUMMATION}
- \nextlarger{summationdisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{producttext}
- \Unicode{220F}{N-ARY PRODUCT}
- \nextlarger{productdisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{integraltext}
- \Unicode{222B}{INTEGRAL}
- \nextlarger{integraldisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{uniontext}
- \Unicode{22C3}{N-ARY UNION}
- \nextlarger{uniondisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{intersectiontext}
- \Unicode{22C2}{N-ARY INTERSECTION}
- \nextlarger{intersectiondisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{unionmultitext}
- \Unicode{228E}{MULTISET UNION}
- \nextlarger{unionmultidisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{logicalandtext}
- \Unicode{22C0}{N-ARY LOGICAL AND}
- \nextlarger{logicalanddisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{logicalortext}
- \Unicode{22C1}{N-ARY LOGICAL OR}
- \nextlarger{logicalordisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{8}
-\setslot{coproducttext}
- \Unicode{2210}{N-ARY COPRODUCT}
- \nextlarger{coproductdisplay}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Accents, arrows, and the radical}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{"62}
-\setslot{hatwide}
- \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT}
- \nextlarger{hatwider}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{2}
-
-\setslot{tildewide}
- \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE}
- \nextlarger{tildewider}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{"70}
-\setslot{radicalbig}
- \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT}
- \nextlarger{radicalBig}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{"78}
-\setslot{arrowtp}
- \Unicode{2191}{UPWARDS ARROW}
- \varchar
- \vartop{arrowtp}
- \varrep{arrowvertex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{arrowbt}
- \Unicode{2193}{DOWNWARDS ARROW}
- \varchar
- \varrep{arrowvertex}
- \varbot{arrowbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{"7E}
-\setslot{arrowdbltp}
- \Unicode{21D1}{UPWARDS DOUBLE ARROW}
- \varchar
- \vartop{arrowdbltp}
- \varrep{arrowdblvertex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{arrowdblbt}
- \Unicode{21D3}{DOWNWARDS DOUBLE ARROW}
- \varchar
- \varrep{arrowdblvertex}
- \varbot{arrowdblbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Semimandatory characters}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{"3A}
-\setslot{braceleftbt}
- \comment{This is the \cs{lgroup} delimiter, which looks like a
- \textunicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET} with flat middle section.
- There does not seem to be such a character in Unicode, but a
- close approximation would be a narrowed
- \textunicode{3014}{LEFT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET}.}
- \label{braceleftbt}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracelefttp}
- \varrep{braceex}
- \varbot{braceleftbt}
- \endvarchar
- \comment{The slot contains the curved bottom of a
- \textunicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracerightbt}
- \comment{This is the \cs{rgroup} delimiter, which looks like a
- \textunicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET} with flat middle section.
- There does not seem to be such a character in Unicode, but a
- close approximation would be a narrowed
- \textunicode{3015}{RIGHT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET}.}
- \label{bracerightbt}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracerighttp}
- \varrep{braceex}
- \varbot{bracerightbt}
- \endvarchar
- \comment{The slot contains the curved bottom of a
- \textunicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{braceleftmid}
- \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE}
- \comment{This is used by the \cs{arrowvert} command.}
- \varchar
- \varrep{arrowvertex}
- \endvarchar
- \comment{The slot contains the middle part of a
- \textunicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracerightmid}
- \Unicode{2016}{DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE}
- \comment{This is used by the \cs{Arrowvert} command.}
- \varchar
- \varrep{arrowdblvertex}
- \endvarchar
- \comment{The slot contains the middle part of a
- \textunicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-
-\setslot{arrowvertex}
- \Unicode{2195}{UP DOWN ARROW}
- \varchar
- \vartop{arrowtp}
- \varrep{arrowvertex}
- \varbot{arrowbt}
- \endvarchar
- \comment{This slot contains the repeatable middle part of a vertical
- arrow.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenleftbt}
- \label{parenleftbt}
- \comment{This is the \cs{lmoustache} delimiter, whose top half is
- like \cs{lgroup} and whose bottom half is like \cs{rgroup}.}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracelefttp}
- \varrep{braceex}
- \varbot{bracerightbt}
- \endvarchar
- \comment{This slot contains the curved bottom of a
- \textunicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenrightbt}
- \label{parenrightbt}
- \comment{This is the \cs{rmoustache} delimiter, whose top half is
- like \cs{rgroup} and whose bottom half is like \cs{lgroup}.}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracerighttp}
- \varrep{braceex}
- \varbot{braceleftbt}
- \endvarchar
- \comment{This slot contains the curved bottom of a
- \textunicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{"77}
-\setslot{arrowdblvertex}
- \Unicode{21D5}{UP DOWN DOUBLE ARROW}
- \varchar
- \vartop{arrowdbltp}
- \varbot{arrowdblbt}
- \varrep{arrowdblvertex}
- \endvarchar
- \comment{This slot contains the repeatable middle part of a vertical
- double arrow.}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Ordinary characters}
-\endcomment
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{\texttt{Big} size delimiters}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{16}
-\setslot{parenleftBig}
- \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}
- \nextlarger{parenleftbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenrightBig}
- \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}
- \nextlarger{parenrightbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{46}
-\setslot{slashBig}
- \Unicode{2215}{DIVISION SLASH}
- \nextlarger{slashbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{backslashBig}
- \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS}
- \nextlarger{backslashbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{"44}
-\setslot{angleleftBig}
- \Unicode{2329}{LEFT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{angleleftbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{anglerightBig}
- \Unicode{232A}{RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{anglerightbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{"68}
-\setslot{bracketleftBig}
- \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracketleftbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketrightBig}
- \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracketrightbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{floorleftBig}
- \Unicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR}
- \nextlarger{floorleftbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{floorrightBig}
- \Unicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR}
- \nextlarger{floorrightbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ceilingleftBig}
- \Unicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING}
- \nextlarger{ceilingleftbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ceilingrightBig}
- \Unicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING}
- \nextlarger{ceilingrightbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{braceleftBig}
- \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{braceleftbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracerightBig}
- \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracerightbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{\texttt{bigg} size delimiters}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{18}
-\setslot{parenleftbigg}
- \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}
- \nextlarger{parenleftBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenrightbigg}
- \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}
- \nextlarger{parenrightBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketleftbigg}
- \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracketleftBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketrightbigg}
- \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracketrightBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{floorleftbigg}
- \Unicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR}
- \nextlarger{floorleftBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{floorrightbigg}
- \Unicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR}
- \nextlarger{floorrightBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ceilingleftbigg}
- \Unicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING}
- \nextlarger{ceilingleftBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ceilingrightbigg}
- \Unicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING}
- \nextlarger{ceilingrightBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{braceleftbigg}
- \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{braceleftBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracerightbigg}
- \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracerightBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{angleleftbigg}
- \Unicode{2329}{LEFT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{angleleftBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{anglerightbigg}
- \Unicode{232A}{RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{anglerightBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{slashbigg}
- \Unicode{2215}{DIVISION SLASH}
- \nextlarger{slashBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{backslashbigg}
- \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS}
- \nextlarger{backslashBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{\texttt{Bigg} size delimiters}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{32}
-\setslot{parenleftBigg}
- \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}
- \nextlarger{parenlefttp}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenrightBigg}
- \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}
- \nextlarger{parenrighttp}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketleftBigg}
- \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracketlefttp}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketrightBigg}
- \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracketrighttp}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{floorleftBigg}
- \Unicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR}
- \nextlarger{bracketleftbt}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{floorrightBigg}
- \Unicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR}
- \nextlarger{bracketrightbt}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ceilingleftBigg}
- \Unicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING}
- \nextlarger{bracketleftex}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ceilingrightBigg}
- \Unicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING}
- \nextlarger{bracketrightex}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{braceleftBigg}
- \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracelefttp}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracerightBigg}
- \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}
- \nextlarger{bracerighttp}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{angleleftBigg}
- \Unicode{2329}{LEFT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{anglerightBigg}
- \Unicode{232A}{RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{slashBigg}
- \Unicode{2215}{DIVISION SLASH}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{backslashBigg}
- \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Extensible delimiters}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{48}
-\setslot{parenlefttp}
- \comment{This slot contains the curved top of a
- \textunicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}.}
- \varchar
- \vartop{parenlefttp}
- \varrep{parenleftex}
- \varbot{parenleftbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenrighttp}
- \comment{This slot contains the curved top of a
- \textunicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}.}
- \varchar
- \vartop{parenrighttp}
- \varrep{parenrightex}
- \varbot{parenrightbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketlefttp}
- \comment{This slot contains the corner top of a
- \textunicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}.}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracketlefttp}
- \varrep{bracketleftex}
- \varbot{bracketleftbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketrighttp}
- \comment{This slot contains the corner top of a
- \textunicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}.}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracketrighttp}
- \varrep{bracketrightex}
- \varbot{bracketrightbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketleftbt}
- \comment{This slot contains the corner bottom of a
- \textunicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}, but it serves as the
- final slot in the chain of larger sizes of
- \textunicode{230A}{LEFT FLOOR}.}
- \varchar
- \varrep{bracketleftex}
- \varbot{bracketleftbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketrightbt}
- \comment{This slot contains the corner bottom of a
- \textunicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}, but it serves as the
- final slot in the chain of larger sizes of
- \textunicode{230B}{RIGHT FLOOR}.}
- \varchar
- \varrep{bracketrightex}
- \varbot{bracketrightbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketleftex}
- \comment{This slot contains the repeatable middle part of a
- \textunicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}, but it serves as the
- final slot in the chain of larger sizes of
- \textunicode{2308}{LEFT CEILING}.}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracketlefttp}
- \varrep{bracketleftex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketrightex}
- \comment{This slot contains the repeatable middle part of a
- \textunicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}, but it serves as the
- final slot in the chain of larger sizes of
- \textunicode{2309}{RIGHT CEILING}.}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracketrighttp}
- \varrep{bracketrightex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracelefttp}
- \comment{This slot contains the curved top of a
- \textunicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}.}
- \label{bracelefttp}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracelefttp}
- \varrep{braceex}
- \varmid{braceleftmid}
- \varbot{braceleftbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracerighttp}
- \comment{This slot contains the curved top of a
- \textunicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}.}
- \label{bracerighttp}
- \varchar
- \vartop{bracerighttp}
- \varrep{braceex}
- \varmid{bracerightmid}
- \varbot{bracerightbt}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Display style operators}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{"47}
-\setslot{unionsqdisplay}
- \Unicode{2294}{SQUARE CUP}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{contintegraldisplay}
- \Unicode{222E}{CONTOUR INTEGRAL}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{circledotdisplay}
- \Unicode{2299}{CIRCLED DOT OPERATOR}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{circleplusdisplay}
- \Unicode{2295}{CIRCLED PLUS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{circlemultiplydisplay}
- \Unicode{2297}{CIRCLED TIMES}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{8}
-\setslot{summationdisplay}
- \Unicode{2211}{N-ARY SUMMATION}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{productdisplay}
- \Unicode{220F}{N-ARY PRODUCT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{integraldisplay}
- \Unicode{222B}{INTEGRAL}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{uniondisplay}
- \Unicode{22C3}{N-ARY UNION}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{intersectiondisplay}
- \Unicode{22C2}{N-ARY INTERSECTION}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{unionmultidisplay}
- \Unicode{228E}{MULTISET UNION}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{logicalanddisplay}
- \Unicode{22C0}{N-ARY LOGICAL AND}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{logicalordisplay}
- \Unicode{22C1}{N-ARY LOGICAL OR}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{coproductdisplay}
- \Unicode{2210}{N-ARY COPRODUCT}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Accents}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{"63}
-\setslot{hatwider}
- \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT}
- \nextlarger{hatwiderr}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{hatwiderr}
- \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-
-\setslot{tildewider}
- \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE}
- \nextlarger{tildewiderr}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{tildewiderr}
- \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Radicals}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{"71}
-\setslot{radicalBig}
- \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT}
- \nextlarger{radicalbigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{radicalbigg}
- \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT}
- \nextlarger{radicalBigg}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{radicalBigg}
- \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT}
- \nextlarger{radicalbt}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{radicalbt}
- \Unicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT}
- \varchar
- \varbot{radicalbt}
- \vartop{radicaltp}
- \varrep{radicalvertex}
- \endvarchar
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{radicalvertex}
- \comment{This is the repeatable, vertically middle part of an
- extensible \textunicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{radicaltp}
- \comment{This is the top corner part of an extensible
- \textunicode{221A}{SQUARE ROOT}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Fontdimens and codingscheme}
-
-\texttt{OMX} fonts have the necessary fontdimens to serve as a math
-group 3 font.
-\endcomment
-
-\setfontdimen{1}{italicslant} % italic slant
-\setfontdimen{2}{interword} % interword space
-\setfontdimen{3}{stretchword} % interword stretch
-\setfontdimen{4}{shrinkword} % interword shrink
-\setfontdimen{5}{xheight} % x-height
-\setfontdimen{6}{quad} % quad
-\setfontdimen{7}{extraspace} % extra space after .
-
-\setfontdimen{8}{defaultrulethickness} % default rule thickness
-\setfontdimen{9}{bigopspacing1} % bigopspacing 1
-\setfontdimen{10}{bigopspacing2} % bigopspacing 2
-\setfontdimen{11}{bigopspacing3} % bigopspacing 3
-\setfontdimen{12}{bigopspacing4} % bigopspacing 4
-\setfontdimen{13}{bigopspacing5} % bigopspacing 5
-
-\setstr{codingscheme}{TEX MATH EXTENSION}
-
-
-
-
-
-\endencoding
-
-
-\section{Discussion}
-
-
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/ot1draft.etx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/ot1draft.etx
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f07bbd6f4a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/ot1draft.etx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1027 +0,0 @@
-\relax
-\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
-\usepackage[specification]{fontdoc}[2004/11/28]
-
-\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
-
-\showbranches
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\title{\texttt{OT1} encoding draft specification}
-\author{Lars Hellstr\"om}
-\date{2004/12/16}
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
- The \texttt{OT1} encoding is an attempt to describe the encoding of
- the text fonts in Donald~E.~Knuth's \emph{Computer Modern} family
- of fonts~\cite{ComputerModern}. This is an impossibile goal, since
- these fonts present no less than five different encodings, but they
- are nontheless largely treated by \LaTeX\ as having identical
- encodings. Due to the ambiguities this creates, and in view of that
- the \texttt{T1} encoding supersedes \texttt{OT1} as text font
- encoding, there is little point in using the text commands for
- distiguishing mandatory features of \texttt{OT1} from the ordinary.
-
- \texttt{OT1} is however also used as a math font encoding (to go
- with \texttt{OML}, \texttt{OMS}, and \texttt{OMX}), and that use is
- today the by far most important since there is no obvious alternative
- to the standard math font set-up. Therefore this specification
- considers a feature of the encoding to be mandatory if it is
- (i)~necessary for the standard math set-up or (ii)~is a text feature
- which works for all encoding variants.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\encoding
-\needsfontinstversion{1.928}
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Encoding variants}
-
-This document aims to record all the encoding variations that are
-present within the set of fonts classified by \LaTeX\ as having the
-\texttt{OT1} encoding. It turns out that they can all be described
-using only two parameters. One of these might be called
-`\textit{ligaturing}' as one factor it affects is how many ligatures
-there will be in the font. The other parameter is best called
-`\textit{italicizing}' as it is different between italic and
-non-italic fonts. Most of the Computer Modern fonts have
-\(\mathit{ligaturing} = 2\) and \(\mathit{italicizing} = 0\).
-
-\endcomment
-\setint{ligaturing}{2}
-\setint{italicizing}{0}
-
-
-\begincomment
-
-
-\section{Mandatory characters}
-
-\subsection{Latin letters}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{16}
-\setslot{dotlessi}
- \Unicode{0131}{LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS I}
- \comment{A dotless i `\i', used to produce accented letters such as
- `\=\i'. It is not used for math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{dotlessj}
- \Unicode{F6BE}{LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS J}
- \comment{A dotless j `\j', used to produce accented letters such as
- `\=\j'. It is not used for math. The Unicode standard does not
- define this character, but Adobe has assigned code point
- \texttt{U+F6BE} (which is in the private use subarea assigned by
- Adobe) to it.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{25}
-\setslot{germandbls}
- \Unicode{00DF}{LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S}
- \comment{This slot is not used in math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ae}
- \Unicode{00E6}{LATIN SMALL LETTER AE}
- \comment{This slot is not used in math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{oe}
- \Unicode{0153}{LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE}
- \comment{This is a single letter, and should not be faked with `oe'.
- It is not used in math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{oslash}
- \Unicode{00F8}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH STROKE}
- \comment{This slot is not used in math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{AE}
- \Unicode{00C6}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER AE}
- \comment{This slot is not used in math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{OE}
- \Unicode{0152}{LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE}
- \comment{This is a single letter, and should not be faked with
- `OE'. It is not used in math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Oslash}
- \Unicode{00D8}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH STROKE}
- \comment{This slot is not used in math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\nextslot{65}
-\setslot{A}
- \Unicode{0041}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A}
- \label{A}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{B}
- \Unicode{0042}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{C}
- \Unicode{0043}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{D}
- \Unicode{0044}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{E}
- \Unicode{0045}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{F}
- \Unicode{0046}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{G}
- \Unicode{0047}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{H}
- \Unicode{0048}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{I}
- \Unicode{0049}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{J}
- \Unicode{004A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{K}
- \Unicode{004B}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{L}
- \Unicode{004C}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{M}
- \Unicode{004D}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{N}
- \Unicode{004E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{O}
- \Unicode{004F}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{P}
- \Unicode{0050}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Q}
- \Unicode{0051}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{R}
- \Unicode{0052}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{S}
- \Unicode{0053}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{T}
- \Unicode{0054}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{U}
- \Unicode{0055}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{V}
- \Unicode{0056}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{W}
- \Unicode{0057}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{X}
- \Unicode{0058}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Y}
- \Unicode{0059}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y}
- \label{Y}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Z}
- \Unicode{005A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\nextslot{97}
-\setslot{a}
- \Unicode{0061}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{b}
- \Unicode{0062}{LATIN SMALL LETTER B}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{c}
- \Unicode{0063}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{d}
- \Unicode{0064}{LATIN SMALL LETTER D}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{e}
- \Unicode{0065}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{f}
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={2}\then
- \ligature{LIG}{f}{ff}
- \ligature{LIG}{i}{fi}
- \ligature{LIG}{l}{fl}
- \Fi
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{g}
- \Unicode{0067}{LATIN SMALL LETTER G}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{h}
- \Unicode{0068}{LATIN SMALL LETTER H}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{i}
- \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{j}
- \Unicode{006A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER J}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{k}
- \Unicode{006B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER K}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{l}
- \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{m}
- \Unicode{006D}{LATIN SMALL LETTER M}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{n}
- \Unicode{006E}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{o}
- \Unicode{006F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{p}
- \Unicode{0070}{LATIN SMALL LETTER P}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{q}
- \Unicode{0071}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Q}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{r}
- \Unicode{0072}{LATIN SMALL LETTER R}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{s}
- \Unicode{0073}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{t}
- \Unicode{0074}{LATIN SMALL LETTER T}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{u}
- \Unicode{0075}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{v}
- \Unicode{0076}{LATIN SMALL LETTER V}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{w}
- \Unicode{0077}{LATIN SMALL LETTER W}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{x}
- \Unicode{0078}{LATIN SMALL LETTER X}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{y}
- \Unicode{0079}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Y}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{z}
- \Unicode{007A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Greek letters}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{0}
-\setslot{Gamma}
- \Unicode{0393}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER GAMMA}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Delta}
- \Unicode{0394}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER DELTA}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Theta}
- \Unicode{0398}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER THETA}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Lambda}
- \Unicode{039B}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER LAMBDA}
- % Unicode's preferred name for this character seems to be
- % GREEK CAPITAL LETTER LAMDA, i.e., without the `B'. Why?
- % GREEK CAPITAL LETTER LAMBDA is listed as an alternative name.
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Xi}
- \Unicode{039E}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER XI}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Pi}
- \Unicode{03A0}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PI}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Sigma}
- \Unicode{03A3}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER SIGMA}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Upsilon1}
- \Unicode{03D2}{GREEK UPSILON WITH HOOK SYMBOL}
- \comment{This is primarily a math character and it is should
- be visually distinct from the character in slot~\ref{Y}. This is
- not generally the case for the normal Upsilon
- \textunicode{03A5}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER UPSILON}, which is by
- the way what usually has the glyph name \texttt{Upsilon}.
- An argument for the latter is however that all the purely
- mathematical Upsilons that exist in the Unicode standard are
- described as variants of the non-hook character.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Phi}
- \Unicode{03A6}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PHI}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Psi}
- \Unicode{03A8}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PSI}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Omega}
- \Unicode{03A9}{GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMEGA}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Digits}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{48}
-\setslot{zero}
- \Unicode{0030}{DIGIT ZERO}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{one}
- \Unicode{0031}{DIGIT ONE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{two}
- \Unicode{0032}{DIGIT TWO}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{three}
- \Unicode{0033}{DIGIT THREE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{four}
- \Unicode{0034}{DIGIT FOUR}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{five}
- \Unicode{0035}{DIGIT FIVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{six}
- \Unicode{0036}{DIGIT SIX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{seven}
- \Unicode{0037}{DIGIT SEVEN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{eight}
- \Unicode{0038}{DIGIT EIGHT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{nine}
- \Unicode{0039}{DIGIT NINE}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Accents}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{18}
-\setslot{grave}
- \Unicode{0300}{COMBINING GRAVE ACCENT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{acute}
- \Unicode{0301}{COMBINING ACUTE ACCENT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{caron}
- \Unicode{030C}{COMBINING CARON}
- \comment{The caron or h\'a\v cek accent `\v{}'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{breve}
- \Unicode{0306}{COMBINING BREVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{macron}
- \Unicode{0304}{COMBINING MACRON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ring}
- \Unicode{030A}{COMBINING RING ABOVE}
- \comment{The text definition of `\verb|\r{A}|' assumes that this
- glyph has the same width as that in slot~\ref{A}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{cedilla}
- \Unicode{0327}{COMBINING CEDILLA}
- \comment{This slot is not required for math, but is used by
- the \cs{c} \LaTeX\ command.}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\nextslot{94}
-\setslot{circumflex}
- \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT}
- \Unicode{005E}{CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then
-
-\setslot{dotaccent}
- \Unicode{0307}{COMBINING DOT ABOVE}
- \label{dotaccent}
-\endsetslot
-
-\begincomment
-\par\medskip
-Note that the \(\mathit{ligaturing} = 0\) assignment to
-slot~\ref{underscore} is ordinary, not mandatory.
-\endcomment
-
-\Fi
-
-
-\nextslot{126}
-\setslot{tilde}
- \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE}
- \Unicode{007E}{TILDE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{dieresis}
- \Unicode{0308}{COMBINING DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Symbols}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{33}
-\setslot{exclam}
- \Unicode{0021}{EXCLAMATION MARK}
- \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{exclamdown}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-
-\setslot{numbersign}
- \Unicode{0023}{NUMBER SIGN}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\ifnumber{\int{italicizing}}={0}\then
-
-\setslot{dollar}
- \Unicode{0024}{DOLLAR SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Else
-
-\setslot{sterling}
- \Unicode{00A3}{POUND SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Fi
-
-\setslot{percent}
- \Unicode{0025}{PERCENT SIGN}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ampersand}
- \Unicode{0026}{AMPERSAND}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{quoteright}
- \Unicode{2019}{RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
- \ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then
- \Ligature{LIG}{quoteright}{quotedblright}
- \Fi
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenleft}
- \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenright}
- \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{asterisk}
- \Unicode{002A}{ASTERISK}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{plus}
- \Unicode{002B}{PLUS SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{comma}
- \Unicode{002C}{COMMA}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{hyphen}
- \Unicode{002D}{HYPHEN-MINUS}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
- \ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then
- \Ligature{LIG}{hyphen}{endash}
- \Fi
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{period}
- \Unicode{002E}{FULL STOP}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{slash}
- \Unicode{002F}{SOLIDUS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{58}
-\setslot{colon}
- \Unicode{003A}{COLON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{semicolon}
- \Unicode{003B}{SEMICOLON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-
-\setslot{equal}
- \Unicode{003D}{EQUALS SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-
-\setslot{question}
- \Unicode{003F}{QUESTION MARK}
- \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{questiondown}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{at}
- \Unicode{0040}{COMMERCIAL AT}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{91}
-\setslot{bracketleft}
- \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-
-\setslot{bracketright}
- \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{96}
-\setslot{quoteleft}
- \Unicode{2018}{LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK}
- \comment{This slot is not used for math.}
- \ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then
- \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{quotedblleft}
- \Fi
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Ordinary characters}
-
-\subsection{Letters}
-\endcomment
-
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={2}\then
-
-\nextslot{11}
-\setslot{ff}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
- \ligature{LIG}{i}{ffi}
- \ligature{LIG}{l}{ffl}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{fi}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{fl}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ffi}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be three characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ffl}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be three characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Fi
-
-\nextslot{"8A}
-\setslot{Lslash}
- \Unicode{0141}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE}
- \comment{The letter `\L'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{"AA}
-\setslot{lslash}
- \Unicode{0142}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE}
- \comment{The letter `\l'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Accents}
-\endcomment
-
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then
-
-\nextslot{125}
-\setslot{hungarumlaut}
- \Unicode{030B}{COMBINING DOUBLE ACUTE ACCENT}
- \comment{The long Hungarian umlaut `\H{}'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Fi
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Symbols}
-\endcomment
-
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}<{2}\then
-
-\nextslot{11}
-\setslot{arrowup}
- \Unicode{2191}{UPWARDS ARROW}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{arrowdown}
- \Unicode{2193}{DOWNWARDS ARROW}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{quotesingle}
- \Unicode{0027}{APOSTROPHE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{exclamdown}
- \Unicode{00A1}{INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{questiondown}
- \Unicode{00BF}{INVERTED QUESTION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Fi
-
-\nextslot{32}
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then
-
-\setslot{lslashslash}
- \comment{When this character is followed by
- \textunicode{004C}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L} then the combined
- result is \textunicode{0141}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE};
- this is used by the \cs{L} command. When this character is
- followed by \textunicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L} then the
- combined result is \textunicode{0142}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH
- STROKE}; this is used by the \cs{l} command. There are no further
- semantics for this character.}
- \ligature{LIG}{L}{Lslash}
- \ligature{LIG}{l}{lslash}
- \comment{These ligatures, and the characters they point to, were
- added by Alan Jeffrey early in \textsf{fontinst} development in
- order to allow the character in this slot to exhibit the correct
- behaviour even in fonts where there is no corresponding glyph.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Else
-
-\setslot{visiblespace}
- \Unicode{2423}{OPEN BOX}
- \comment{A visible space glyph `\textvisiblespace'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Fi
-
-
-\nextslot{34}
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then
-
-\setslot{quotedblright}
- \Unicode{201D}{RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Else
-
-\setslot{quotedbl}
- \Unicode{0022}{QUOTATION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Fi
-
-\nextslot{60}
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={2}\then
-
-\setslot{exclamdown}
- \Unicode{00A1}{INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-
-\setslot{questiondown}
- \Unicode{00BF}{INVERTED QUESTION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Else
-
-\setslot{less}
- \Unicode{003C}{LESS-THAN SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-
-\setslot{greater}
- \Unicode{003E}{GREATER-THAN SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Fi
-
-\nextslot{92}
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then
-
-\setslot{quotedblleft}
- \Unicode{201C}{LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Else
-
-\setslot{backslash}
- \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{95}
-\setslot{underscore}
- \Unicode{005F}{LOW LINE}
- \label{underscore}
-\endsetslot
-
-\begincomment
-\par\medskip
-Note that the \(\mathit{ligaturing} > 0\) assignment to
-slot~\ref{dotaccent} is mandatory, not ordinary.
-\endcomment
-
-\Fi
-
-
-\nextslot{123}
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}>{0}\then
-
-\setslot{endash}
- \Unicode{2013}{EN DASH}
- \Ligature{LIG}{hyphen}{emdash}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{emdash}
- \Unicode{2014}{EM DASH}
- \comment{In a monowidth font this character is preferably given the
- width of two normal characters.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Else
-
-\setslot{braceleft}
- \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bar}
- \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{braceright}
- \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\Fi
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Fontdimens}
-\endcomment
-
-\setfontdimen{1}{italicslant} % italic slant
-\setfontdimen{2}{interword} % interword space
-\setfontdimen{3}{stretchword} % interword stretch
-\setfontdimen{4}{shrinkword} % interword shrink
-\setfontdimen{5}{xheight} % x-height
-\setfontdimen{6}{quad} % quad
-\setfontdimen{7}{extraspace} % extra space after .
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Coding scheme}
-\endcomment
-
-\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={2}\then
-
-\setstr{codingscheme}{TEX TEXT}
-
-\Else\ifnumber{\int{ligaturing}}={1}\then
-
-\setstr{codingscheme}{TEX TEXT WITHOUT F-LIGATURES}
-
-\Else
-
-\setstr{codingscheme}{TEX TYPEWRITER TEXT}
-
-\Fi\Fi
-
-
-\endencoding
-
-
-\section{Discussion}
-
-
-\subsection{\texttt{OT1} as math font encoding}
-
-As source for the math requirements on the \texttt{OT1} encoding
-was used the standard \LaTeX\ math set-up~\cite{fontdef}. Those
-definitions that make use of \texttt{OT1} fonts either use the
-\texttt{operators} symbol font\slash font family~0 or have math
-class~7 (\cs{mathalpha}).
-
-There are two slots used for math that have different assignments
-in different encoding variants. Slot 36 (\texttt{dollar}\slash
-\texttt{sterling}) depends on the $\mathit{italicizing}$, and is used
-by the commands \cs{mathdollar} (called by \verb|\$|) and
-\cs{mathsterling} (called by \cs{pounds}). This works because these
-commands explicitly take the character from a font with the correct
-$\mathit{italicizing}$.
-
-Slot~95 (\texttt{dotaccent}\slash \texttt{underline}) depends on the
-$\mathit{ligaturing}$ and is used by the \cs{dot} command. This
-command does \emph{not} work for fonts with \(\mathit{ligaturing}=0\),
-and hence e.g.\ the formula \verb|$\mathtt{\dot{x}}$| does not produce
-a typewriter dotted `x', but rather an `x' and underscore printed on
-top of each other. This is thus an error, but due to that it is
-unlikely that the error will be missed by the author who encounters
-it, the error is probably harmless.
-
-
-\subsection{\texttt{OT1} as text font encoding}
-
-The sources used to determine the text requirements on the
-\texttt{OT1} encoding were~\cite{ltoutenc}.
-
-It turns out that there are LICR commands which rely on non-mandatory
-features of the font. It is mostly for the \(\mathit{ligaturing} = 0\)
-fonts that commands produce incorrect results. The following commands
-work with all \texttt{OT1} fonts which have \(\mathit{ligaturing} > 0\)
-but fail with the others: \cs{L}, \cs{l}, \cs{.}, \cs{H},
-\cs{textemdash}, \cs{textendash}, and \cs{textquotedblleft}.
-In addition, the command \cs{textquotedblright} produces a
-reasonable, but not exactly correct, result.
-
-Traditionally the \cs{textexclamdown} and \cs{textquestiondown} have
-only worked for fonts which have \(\mathit{ligaturing} = 2\), but
-that can be fixed; see~\cite{latex/3368}.
-
-
-\section{Changes}
-
-The changes made to this specification since the original 2001/09/09
-version are as follows.
-
-2004/12/16: Changed the f-ligatures to character sequences, which
-makes more sense for \texttt{CMap}s. Incremented needed versions
-accordingly. /LH
-
-
-\begin{thebibliography}{9}
-\bibitem{ltoutenc}
- Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, Alan Jeffrey, Frank Mittelbach,
- Chris Rowley, and Rainer Sch\"opf:
- \textit{ltoutenc.dtx}, v\,1.91 (2000);
- the file \texttt{ltoutenc.dtx} in the \LaTeX\ base distribution.
-\bibitem{latex/3368}
- Lars Hellstr\"om:
- \textit{\texttt{OT1} def.\ of \cs{textexclamdown} and
- \cs{textquestiondown}}, \LaTeX\ bugs database entry
- \textbf{latex/3368}, 2001.
-% ; \textsc{http:}/\slash \texttt{www.latex-project.org}\slash
-% \texttt{cgi-bin}\slash \texttt{ltxbugs2html\discretionary{?}{}{?}%
-% pr=latex/3368}.
-\bibitem{ComputerModern}
- Donald E. Knuth:
- \textit{Computer Modern Typefaces},
- volume E of \textit{Computers \& Typesetting},
- Ad\-di\-son--Wes\-ley, 1986, xvi+588\,pp.;
- ISBN~0-201-13446-2.
-\bibitem{fontdef}
- Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf:
- \textit{The \texttt{fontdef.dtx} file}, v\,2.2x (1999);
- the file \texttt{fontdef.dtx} in the \LaTeX\ base distribution.
-\end{thebibliography}
-
-
-\end{document}
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/t1draft.etx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/t1draft.etx
deleted file mode 100644
index d82c9e53ed0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/encspecs/t1draft.etx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1484 +0,0 @@
-\relax
-\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
-\usepackage[specification]{fontdoc}[2004/11/28]
-\usepackage{shortvrb}
-
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-\begin{document}
-\title{\texttt{T1} encoding draft specification}
-\author{Lars Hellstr\"om}
-\date{2002/07/05}
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
- The \texttt{T1} encoding covers most\footnote{But not quite all.}
- letters in the latin script that are used in European languages.
- Code points 32--126 coincide with ASCII\footnote{As defined in
- Appendix C of \emph{The \TeX book}~\cite{TeXbook}, not as defined
- by the ANSI.} and code points 192--255 are mainly the same as in
- the latin-1 encoding~\cite{ISO8859-1,latin-page}, but there are
- exceptions.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\encoding
-
-\needsfontinstversion{1.928}
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Mandatory characters}
-\endcomment
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Letters}
-More than two thirds of the characters in the encoding are letters.
-This is a deliberate choice: \TeX's hyphenation algorithm requires
-that all characters in a word are taken from the same font, hence it
-is advantageous\footnote{Probably less so than what was thought when
-the encoding was designed, but still advantageous.} to keep as many
-letters as possible in the same font. Taking symbols from other fonts
-is less of a disadvantage.
-
-\subsubsection{``Unaccented'' letters in slots 0--127}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{25}
-\setslot{dotlessi}
- \Unicode{0131}{LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS I}
- \comment{A dotless i `\i', used to produce accented letters such as
- `\=\i'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{dotlessj}
- \Unicode{F6BE}{LATIN SMALL LETTER DOTLESS J}
- \comment{A dotless j `\j', used to produce accented letters such as
- `\=\j'. The Unicode standard does not define this character, but
- Adobe has assigned code point \texttt{U+F6BE} (which lies
- in the private use subarea assigned by Adobe) to it.}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\nextslot{65}
-\setslot{A}
- \Unicode{0041}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{B}
- \Unicode{0042}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{C}
- \Unicode{0043}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{D}
- \Unicode{0044}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{E}
- \Unicode{0045}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{F}
- \Unicode{0046}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{G}
- \Unicode{0047}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{H}
- \Unicode{0048}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{I}
- \Unicode{0049}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I}
- \oddligature{This ligature only occurs in Dutch typography.}
- {LIG}{J}{IJ}
- \oddligature{This ligature only occurs in Dutch typography.}
- {LIG}{j}{IJ}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{J}
- \Unicode{004A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{K}
- \Unicode{004B}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{L}
- \Unicode{004C}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{M}
- \Unicode{004D}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{N}
- \Unicode{004E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{O}
- \Unicode{004F}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{P}
- \Unicode{0050}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Q}
- \Unicode{0051}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{R}
- \Unicode{0052}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{S}
- \Unicode{0053}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{T}
- \Unicode{0054}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{U}
- \Unicode{0055}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{V}
- \Unicode{0056}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{W}
- \Unicode{0057}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{X}
- \Unicode{0058}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Y}
- \Unicode{0059}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Z}
- \Unicode{005A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\nextslot{97}
-\setslot{a}
- \Unicode{0061}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{b}
- \Unicode{0062}{LATIN SMALL LETTER B}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{c}
- \Unicode{0063}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{d}
- \Unicode{0064}{LATIN SMALL LETTER D}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{e}
- \Unicode{0065}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{f}
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \ligature{LIG}{f}{ff}
- \ligature{LIG}{i}{fi}
- \ligature{LIG}{l}{fl}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{g}
- \Unicode{0067}{LATIN SMALL LETTER G}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{h}
- \Unicode{0068}{LATIN SMALL LETTER H}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{i}
- \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I}
- \oddligature{This ligature only occurs in Dutch typography.}
- {LIG}{j}{ij}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{j}
- \Unicode{006A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER J}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{k}
- \Unicode{006B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER K}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{l}
- \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{m}
- \Unicode{006D}{LATIN SMALL LETTER M}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{n}
- \Unicode{006E}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{o}
- \Unicode{006F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{p}
- \Unicode{0070}{LATIN SMALL LETTER P}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{q}
- \Unicode{0071}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Q}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{r}
- \Unicode{0072}{LATIN SMALL LETTER R}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{s}
- \Unicode{0073}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{t}
- \Unicode{0074}{LATIN SMALL LETTER T}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{u}
- \Unicode{0075}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{v}
- \Unicode{0076}{LATIN SMALL LETTER V}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{w}
- \Unicode{0077}{LATIN SMALL LETTER W}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{x}
- \Unicode{0078}{LATIN SMALL LETTER X}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{y}
- \Unicode{0079}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Y}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{z}
- \Unicode{007A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsubsection{Mainly East-European accented letters
- in slots 128--191}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{128}
-\setslot{Abreve}
- \Unicode{0102}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH BREVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Aogonek}
- \Unicode{0104}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Cacute}
- \Unicode{0106}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ccaron}
- \Unicode{010C}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Dcaron}
- \Unicode{010E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ecaron}
- \Unicode{011A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Eogonek}
- \Unicode{0118}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Gbreve}
- \Unicode{011E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G WITH BREVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Lacute}
- \Unicode{0139}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Lcaron}
- \Unicode{013D}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH CARON}
- \comment{The normal glyph for this character consists of a capital
- L and a right single quote, but the underlying accent is a caron.
- The glyph name \texttt{Lquoteright} is not uncommon, but
- \cite{AGL} uses \texttt{Lcaron}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Lslash}
- \Unicode{0141}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE}
- \comment{The letter `\L'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Nacute}
- \Unicode{0143}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ncaron}
- \Unicode{0147}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Eng}
- \Unicode{014A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ENG}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ohungarumlaut}
- \Unicode{0150}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH DOUBLE ACUTE}
- \comment{The letter `\H{O}'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Racute}
- \Unicode{0154}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Rcaron}
- \Unicode{0158}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Sacute}
- \Unicode{015A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Scaron}
- \Unicode{0160}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Scedilla}
- \Unicode{015E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CEDILLA}
- \comment{In Romanian, character \textunicode{0218}{latin
- capital letter s with comma below} is preferred, but that
- wasn't known when this encoding was designed.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Tcaron}
- \Unicode{0164}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Tcommaaccent}
- \Unicode{021A}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH COMMA BELOW}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Uhungarumlaut}
- \Unicode{0170}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DOUBLE ACUTE}
- \comment{The letter `\H{U}'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Uring}
- \Unicode{016E}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH RING ABOVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ydieresis}
- \Unicode{0178}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Zacute}
- \Unicode{0179}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Zcaron}
- \Unicode{017D}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Zdotaccent}
- \Unicode{017B}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{1}
-\setslot{Idotaccent}
- \Unicode{0130}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH DOT ABOVE}
- \comment{This character's |\lccode| value points to slot 105
- (\texttt{i}), as does that of slot 73 (\texttt{I}).}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{dcroat}
- \Unicode{0111}{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\nextslot{160}
-\setslot{abreve}
- \Unicode{0103}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH BREVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{aogonek}
- \Unicode{0105}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{cacute}
- \Unicode{0107}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ccaron}
- \Unicode{010D}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{dcaron}
- \Unicode{010F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH CARON}
- \comment{The normal glyph for this character consists of a
- lower case d and a right single quote, but the underlying
- accent is a caron.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ecaron}
- \Unicode{011B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{eogonek}
- \Unicode{0119}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{gbreve}
- \Unicode{011F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER G WITH BREVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{lacute}
- \Unicode{013A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{lcaron}
- \Unicode{013E}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH CARON}
- \comment{The normal glyph for this character consists of a
- lower case l and a right single quote, but the underlying
- accent is a caron. The glyph name \texttt{lquoteright} is
- not uncommon, but \cite{AGL} uses \texttt{lcaron}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{lslash}
- \Unicode{0142}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{nacute}
- \Unicode{0144}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ncaron}
- \Unicode{0148}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{eng}
- \Unicode{014B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER ENG}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ohungarumlaut}
- \Unicode{0151}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DOUBLE ACUTE}
- \comment{The letter `\H{o}'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{racute}
- \Unicode{0155}{LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{rcaron}
- \Unicode{0159}{LATIN SMALL LETTER R WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{sacute}
- \Unicode{015B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{scaron}
- \Unicode{0161}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{scedilla}
- \Unicode{015F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CEDILLA}
- \comment{In Romanian, character \textunicode{0219}{latin
- small letter s with comma below} is preferred, but that
- wasn't known when this encoding was designed.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{tcaron}
- \Unicode{0165}{LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH CARON}
- \comment{The normal glyph for this character consists of a
- lower case t and a right single quote, but the underlying
- accent is a caron.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{tcommaaccent}
- \Unicode{021B}{LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH COMMA BELOW}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{uhungarumlaut}
- \Unicode{0171}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DOUBLE ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{uring}
- \Unicode{016F}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH RING ABOVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ydieresis}
- \Unicode{00FF}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{zacute}
- \Unicode{017A}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{zcaron}
- \Unicode{017E}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{zdotaccent}
- \Unicode{017C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsubsection{Mainly West-European accented letters in slots 192--255}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{192}
-\setslot{Agrave}
- \Unicode{00C0}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Aacute}
- \Unicode{00C1}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Acircumflex}
- \Unicode{00C2}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Atilde}
- \Unicode{00C3}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH TILDE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Adieresis}
- \Unicode{00C4}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Aring}
- \Unicode{00C5}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{AE}
- \Unicode{00C6}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER AE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ccedilla}
- \Unicode{00C7}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Egrave}
- \Unicode{00C8}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Eacute}
- \Unicode{00C9}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ecircumflex}
- \Unicode{00CA}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Edieresis}
- \Unicode{00CB}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Igrave}
- \Unicode{00CC}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Iacute}
- \Unicode{00CD}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Icircumflex}
- \Unicode{00CE}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Idieresis}
- \Unicode{00CF}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Eth}
- \Unicode{00D0}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}
- \Unicode{0110}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}
- \comment{This slot is being used to represent two different
- letters whose capital forms are identical. The |\lccode| value
- points to slot \ref{eth}.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ntilde}
- \Unicode{00D1}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH TILDE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ograve}
- \Unicode{00D2}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Oacute}
- \Unicode{00D3}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ocircumflex}
- \Unicode{00D4}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Otilde}
- \Unicode{00D5}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH TILDE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Odieresis}
- \Unicode{00D6}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{OE}
- \Unicode{0152}{LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE}
- \comment{This is a single letter, and should not be faked with `OE'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Oslash}
- \Unicode{00D8}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH STROKE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ugrave}
- \Unicode{00D9}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Uacute}
- \Unicode{00DA}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Ucircumflex}
- \Unicode{00DB}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Udieresis}
- \Unicode{00DC}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Yacute}
- \Unicode{00DD}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{Thorn}
- \Unicode{00DE}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{SS}
- \comment{This is an ``uppercased'' sharp s (`\ss') which always
- looks exactly like two S's next to each other. In a monowidth
- font it should be two letters wide. There are other characters
- which could have made better use of this slot; the only function
- of this slot which could not have been handled using macros is
- that |\SS| and |SS| can have different hyphenation.}
- \label{SS}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0053}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S}
- \Unicode{0053}{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S}
- }
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{agrave}
- \Unicode{00E0}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{aacute}
- \Unicode{00E1}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{acircumflex}
- \Unicode{00E2}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{atilde}
- \Unicode{00E3}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH TILDE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{adieresis}
- \Unicode{00E4}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{aring}
- \Unicode{00E5}{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ae}
- \Unicode{00E6}{LATIN SMALL LETTER AE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ccedilla}
- \Unicode{00E7}{LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{egrave}
- \Unicode{00E8}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{eacute}
- \Unicode{00E9}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ecircumflex}
- \Unicode{00EA}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{edieresis}
- \Unicode{00EB}{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{igrave}
- \Unicode{00EC}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{iacute}
- \Unicode{00ED}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{icircumflex}
- \Unicode{00EE}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{idieresis}
- \Unicode{00EF}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{eth}
- \Unicode{00F0}{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}
- \label{eth}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ntilde}
- \Unicode{00F1}{LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH TILDE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ograve}
- \Unicode{00F2}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{oacute}
- \Unicode{00F3}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ocircumflex}
- \Unicode{00F4}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{otilde}
- \Unicode{00F5}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH TILDE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{odieresis}
- \Unicode{00F6}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{oe}
- \Unicode{0153}{LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE}
- \comment{This is a single letter, and should not be faked with `oe'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{oslash}
- \Unicode{00F8}{LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH STROKE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ugrave}
- \Unicode{00F9}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{uacute}
- \Unicode{00FA}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ucircumflex}
- \Unicode{00FB}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CIRCUMFLEX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{udieresis}
- \Unicode{00FC}{LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{yacute}
- \Unicode{00FD}{LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{thorn}
- \Unicode{00FE}{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{germandbls}
- \Unicode{00DF}{LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Accents}
-The Unicode equivalents of the accents are taken to be the combining
-forms of the accents found in code point \texttt{U+0300} and upwards.
-The reasons for this are (i) that they are primarily used with the
-|\accent| primitive, i.e., as combining characters, (ii) that some
-of them (e.g. \texttt{tilde}) have non-combining counterparts
-elsewhere in the encoding, and (iii) that they are not primarily
-phonetic marks.
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{0}
-\setslot{grave}
- \Unicode{0300}{COMBINING GRAVE ACCENT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{acute}
- \Unicode{0301}{COMBINING ACUTE ACCENT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{circumflex}
- \Unicode{0302}{COMBINING CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{tilde}
- \Unicode{0303}{COMBINING TILDE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{dieresis}
- \Unicode{0308}{COMBINING DIAERESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{hungarumlaut}
- \Unicode{030B}{COMBINING DOUBLE ACUTE ACCENT}
- \comment{The long Hungarian umlaut `\H{}'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ring}
- \Unicode{030A}{COMBINING RING ABOVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{caron}
- \Unicode{030C}{COMBINING CARON}
- \comment{The caron or h\'a\v cek accent `\v{}'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{breve}
- \Unicode{0306}{COMBINING BREVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{macron}
- \Unicode{0304}{COMBINING MACRON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{dotaccent}
- \Unicode{0307}{COMBINING DOT ABOVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{cedilla}
- \Unicode{0327}{COMBINING CEDILLA}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ogonek}
- \Unicode{0328}{COMBINING OGONEK}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Digits}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{48}
-\setslot{zero}
- \Unicode{0030}{DIGIT ZERO}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{one}
- \Unicode{0031}{DIGIT ONE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{two}
- \Unicode{0032}{DIGIT TWO}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{three}
- \Unicode{0033}{DIGIT THREE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{four}
- \Unicode{0034}{DIGIT FOUR}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{five}
- \Unicode{0035}{DIGIT FIVE}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{six}
- \Unicode{0036}{DIGIT SIX}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{seven}
- \Unicode{0037}{DIGIT SEVEN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{eight}
- \Unicode{0038}{DIGIT EIGHT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{nine}
- \Unicode{0039}{DIGIT NINE}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Symbols and punctuation}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{13}
-\setslot{quotesinglbase}
- \Unicode{201A}{SINGLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{guilsinglleft}
- \Unicode{2039}{SINGLE LEFT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}
- \comment{In French typography this is an opening quotation mark,
- but in German typography it is a closing quotation mark. The
- character should kern well in both cases.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{guilsinglright}
- \Unicode{203A}{SINGLE RIGHT-POINTING ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}
- \comment{In French typography this is a closing quotation mark,
- but in German typography it is an opening quotation mark. The
- character should kern well in both cases.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{quotedblleft}
- \Unicode{201C}{LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{quotedblright}
- \Unicode{201D}{RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK}
- \comment{In English typography this quotation mark is always
- closing, but in Swedish typography it is also an opening
- quotation mark. The character should kern well in both cases.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{quotedblbase}
- \Unicode{201E}{DOUBLE LOW-9 QUOTATION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{guillemotleft}
- \Unicode{00AB}{LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}
- \comment{In French typography this is an opening quotation mark,
- but in German typography it is a closing quotation mark. The
- character should kern well in both cases. The glyph name is
- misspelt (it should be \texttt{guillemetleft}), but this
- incorrect name is \emph{de facto} the glyph name used.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{guillemotright}
- \Unicode{00BB}{RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}
- \comment{In French typography this is a closing quotation mark,
- but in German typography it is an opening quotation mark. The
- character should kern well in both cases. The glyph name is
- misspelt (it should be \texttt{guillemetright}), but this
- incorrect name is \emph{de facto} the glyph name used.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{endash}
- \Unicode{2013}{EN DASH}
- \label{endash}
- \Ligature{LIG}{hyphen}{emdash}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{emdash}
- \Unicode{2014}{EM DASH}
- \comment{In a monowidth font this character is preferably given the
- width of two normal characters.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{32}
-\setslot{visiblespace}
- \Unicode{2423}{OPEN BOX}
- \comment{A visible space glyph `\textvisiblespace'.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{exclam}
- \Unicode{0021}{EXCLAMATION MARK}
- \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{exclamdown}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{quotedbl}
- \Unicode{0022}{QUOTATION MARK}
- \comment{The `neutral' double quotation mark, included for use in
- monowidth fonts, or for setting computer programs.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{numbersign}
- \Unicode{0023}{NUMBER SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{dollar}
- \Unicode{0024}{DOLLAR SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{percent}
- \Unicode{0025}{PERCENT SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ampersand}
- \Unicode{0026}{AMPERSAND}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{quoteright}
- \Unicode{2019}{RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK}
- \Ligature{LIG}{quoteright}{quotedblright}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenleft}
- \Unicode{0028}{LEFT PARENTHESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{parenright}
- \Unicode{0029}{RIGHT PARENTHESIS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{asterisk}
- \Unicode{002A}{ASTERISK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{plus}
- \Unicode{002B}{PLUS SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{comma}
- \Unicode{002C}{COMMA}
- \Ligature{LIG}{comma}{quotedblbase}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{hyphen}
- \Unicode{002D}{HYPHEN-MINUS}
- \Ligature{LIG}{hyphen}{endash}
- \Ligature{LIG}{hyphenchar}{hyphenchar}
- \comment{See also slot \ref{hyphenchar}.}
- \label{hyphen}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{period}
- \Unicode{002E}{FULL STOP}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{slash}
- \Unicode{002F}{SOLIDUS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\skipslots{10}
-\setslot{colon}
- \Unicode{003A}{COLON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{semicolon}
- \Unicode{003B}{SEMICOLON}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{less}
- \Unicode{003C}{LESS-THAN SIGN}
- \Ligature{LIG}{less}{guillemotleft}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{equal}
- \Unicode{003D}{EQUALS SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{greater}
- \Unicode{003E}{GREATER-THAN SIGN}
- \Ligature{LIG}{greater}{guillemotright}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{question}
- \Unicode{003F}{QUESTION MARK}
- \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{questiondown}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{at}
- \Unicode{0040}{COMMERCIAL AT}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{91}
-\setslot{bracketleft}
- \Unicode{005B}{LEFT SQUARE BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{backslash}
- \Unicode{005C}{REVERSE SOLIDUS}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bracketright}
- \Unicode{005D}{RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{asciicircum}
- \Unicode{005E}{CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT}
- \comment{The ASCII upward-pointing arrow head `\textasciicircum'.
- This is included for compatibility with typewriter fonts used
- for computer listings.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{underscore}
- \Unicode{005F}{LOW LINE}
- \comment{The ASCII underline character `\textunderscore', usually
- set on the baseline. This is included for compatibility with
- typewriter fonts used for computer listings.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{quoteleft}
- \Unicode{2018}{LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK}
- \Ligature{LIG}{quoteleft}{quotedblleft}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{123}
-\setslot{braceleft}
- \Unicode{007B}{LEFT CURLY BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{bar}
- \Unicode{007C}{VERTICAL LINE}
- \comment{The ASCII vertical bar `\textbar'.
- This is included for compatibility with typewriter fonts used
- for computer listings.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{braceright}
- \Unicode{007D}{RIGHT CURLY BRACKET}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{asciitilde}
- \Unicode{007E}{TILDE}
- \comment{The ASCII tilde `\textasciitilde'.
- This is included for compatibility with typewriter fonts used
- for computer listings.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{159}
-\setslot{section}
- \Unicode{00A7}{SECTION SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{189}
-\setslot{exclamdown}
- \Unicode{00A1}{INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{questiondown}
- \Unicode{00BF}{INVERTED QUESTION MARK}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{sterling}
- \Unicode{00A3}{POUND SIGN}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\subsection{Miscellanea}
-\endcomment
-
-\nextslot{23}
-\setslot{compwordmark}
- \Unicode{200C}{ZERO WIDTH NON-JOINER}
- \comment{An invisible glyph, with zero width and depth, but the
- height of lower case letters without ascenders.
- It is used to stop ligaturing in words like `shelf{}ful'.
- It is possible that this character should be considered a
- letter (and that hyphenation patterns should be designed to
- include it), but since its |\lccode| is 0, \TeX's hyphenation
- mechanism considers it to be a nonletter which ends the
- hyphenatable part of a word.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{perthousandzero}
- \comment{A glyph which is placed after `\%' to produce a
- `per-thousand', or twice to produce `per-ten-thousand'.
- Your guess is as good as mine as to what this glyph should look
- like in a monowidth font. Since most fonts don't include this
- glyph anyway, its use is discouraged.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{127}
-\setslot{hyphenchar}
- \label{hyphenchar}
- \comment{This character is provided as a discretionary hyphen
- symbol and may only appear at the end of a line, since it is often
- hanging out of the character box, but apart from that it is almost
- always the same as the \texttt{hyphen} character. Since \LaTeX\
- sets the |\hyphenchar| of \texttt{T1} fonts to slot \ref{hyphen}
- rather than this slot, this feature is usually not used.}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Usual characters}
-The following characters are only accessed through ligatures and can
-therefore be replaced by others or completely left out if the
-ligature programs are modified accordingly.
-\endcomment
-
-
-\nextslot{27}
-\setslot{ff}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
- \ligature{LIG}{i}{ffi}
- \ligature{LIG}{l}{ffl}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{fi}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{fl}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be two characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ffi}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0069}{LATIN SMALL LETTER I}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be three characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\setslot{ffl}
- \charseq{
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{0066}{LATIN SMALL LETTER F}
- \Unicode{006C}{LATIN SMALL LETTER L}
- }
- \comment{This glyph should be three characters wide in a monowidth
- font.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{156}
-\setslot{IJ}
- \Unicode{0132}{LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE IJ}
- \comment{This is a single letter, and in a monowidth font should
- ideally be one letter wide.}
-\endsetslot
-
-\nextslot{188}
-\setslot{ij}
- \Unicode{0133}{LATIN SMALL LIGATURE IJ}
- \comment{This is a single letter, and in a monowidth font should
- ideally be one letter wide.}
-\endsetslot
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Fontdimens}
-\endcomment
-
-\setfontdimen{1}{italicslant} % italic slant
-\setfontdimen{2}{interword} % interword space
-\setfontdimen{3}{stretchword} % interword stretch
-\setfontdimen{4}{shrinkword} % interword shrink
-\setfontdimen{5}{xheight} % x-height
-\setfontdimen{6}{quad} % quad
-\setfontdimen{7}{extraspace} % extra space after .
-\setfontdimen{8}{capheight} % cap height
-\setfontdimen{9}{ascender} % ascender
-\setfontdimen{10}{acccapheight} % accented cap height
-\setfontdimen{11}{descender} % descender's depth
-\setfontdimen{12}{maxheight} % max height
-\setfontdimen{13}{maxdepth} % max depth
-\setfontdimen{14}{digitwidth} % digit width
-\setfontdimen{15}{verticalstem} % dominant width of verical stems
-\setfontdimen{16}{baselineskip} % baselineskip
-
-
-\begincomment
-\section{Coding scheme}
-\endcomment
-
-\setstr{codingscheme}{EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN}
-
-
-\endencoding
-
-
-\section{Discussion}
-
-As the \texttt{T1} encoding is an established standard, the discussion
-of it has already been published elsewhere. [Unfortunately, I do not
-know where as it all happened long before I started using \TeX. This
-part of the document definitely needs to be improved. To begin with, I
-would like to know if the TUGboat articles whose bibliography entries
-appear in Figure~\ref{Bib-entries} are relevant for the matter.
-\begin{figure*}
-\small
-\begin{verbatim}
-@Article{Beebe:TB11-2-171,
- author = "Nelson Beebe",
- title = "{Character set encoding}",
- journal = j-TUGboat,
- volume = "11",
- number = "2",
- pages = "171--175",
- month = jun,
- year = "1990",
- ISSN = "0896-3207",
- bibdate = "Fri Jun 4 18:08:09 MDT 1999",
- bibsource = "ftp://ftp.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/tugboat.bib;
- http://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/index-table-t.html#tugboat",
- acknowledgement = ack-bnb # " and " # ack-nhfb,
-}
-@Article{Bien:TB11-2-175,
- author = "Janusz S. Bie{\'n}",
- title = "{On standards for computer modern font extensions}",
- journal = j-TUGboat,
- volume = "11",
- number = "2",
- pages = "175--183",
- month = jun,
- year = "1990",
- ISSN = "0896-3207",
- bibdate = "Fri Jun 4 18:08:09 MDT 1999",
- bibsource = "ftp://ftp.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/tugboat.bib;
- http://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/index-table-t.html#tugboat",
- acknowledgement = ack-bnb # " and " # ack-nhfb,
-}
-@Article{Ferguson:TB11-4-514,
- author = "Michael Ferguson",
- title = "{Report on multilingual activities}",
- journal = j-TUGboat,
- volume = "11",
- number = "4",
- pages = "514--516",
- month = nov,
- year = "1990",
- ISSN = "0896-3207",
- bibdate = "Fri Jun 4 18:08:09 MDT 1999",
- bibsource = "ftp://ftp.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/tugboat.bib;
- http://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/index-table-t.html#tugboat",
- acknowledgement = ack-bnb # " and " # ack-nhfb,
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\normalsize
-
-\caption{Entries in \texttt{tugboat.bib} which may describe papers
-that contain (at least part of) the discussion regarding the
-\texttt{T1} encoding}
-\label{Bib-entries}
-\end{figure*}
-Actually reading them would be nice too, as would of course getting
-the references for whatever other papers there might be that
-constituted the discussion of the \texttt{T1} encoding. The file
-\texttt{cork.enc} in the \textit{Fontname} standard makes a cryptic
-reference to ``TTN 1(4), December 1992'', whatever that might be.]
-
-I can however answer questions on the more immediate matter of how the
-interpretation of the established standard that this file expresses was
-constructed. It is mainly the result of a comparison between the
-file \texttt{t1.etx}~\cite{t1.etx}, the Unicode
-standard~\cite{Unicode}, and the Adobe glyph list~\cite{AGL}.
-
-(Some concerns have been expressed about the fact that the glyph name
-listed for slot~0 is `\texttt{grave}', although that glyph name in
-\cite{AGL} corresponds to \textunicode{0060}{GRAVE ACCENT}, whereas
-\textunicode{0300}{COMBINING GRAVE ACCENT} is listed as corresponding
-to `\texttt{gravecomb}'. This is however formally irrelevant, since
-the glyph names are formally only internal labels in the encoding
-specification. `\texttt{gravecomb}' would furthermore be a more
-impractical label, since most font contains a `\texttt{grave}' glyph
-that is used as a combining accent but no `\texttt{gravecomb}'
-glyph.)
-
-
-\section{Changes}
-
-The changes made to this specification since the original 2001/06/19
-version are as follows.
-
-2001/09/01: Corrected some typos (reported by Vladimir Volovich). /LH
-
-2001/09/16: Added \cite{latin-page} to the bibliography. /LH
-
-2001/09/21: Removed comment on \textunicode{2012}{FIGURE DASH} from
-slot~\ref{endash}. \cite[Sec.~6.1]{Unicode} makes quite clear that
-it's not to be used for ranges. /LH
-
-2002/07/05: Added the Ferguson:TB11-4-514 and ``TTN~1(4)'' references
-to the discussion section. Also added remark on \texttt{grave} versus
-\texttt{gravecomb}. /LH
-
-2004/11/28: Changed the f-ligatures to character sequences, which
-makes more sense for \texttt{CMap}s. Added equivalent for
-slot~\ref{SS}. /LH
-
-
-\begin{thebibliography}{9}
-\bibitem{AGL}
- Adobe Systems Incorporated: \textit{Adobe Glyph List}, 1998;
- \textsc{http}:/\slash \texttt{partners.adobe.com}\slash
- \texttt{asn}\slash \texttt{developer}\slash \texttt{type}\slash
- \texttt{glyphlist.txt}
-\bibitem{latin-page}
- Roman Czyborra: \textit{The ISO 8859 Alphabet Soup}, web page at
- \textsc{http:}/\slash \texttt{czyborra.com}\slash
- \texttt{charsets}\slash \texttt{iso8859.html}, 1998.
-\bibitem{ISO8859-1}
- International Organization for Standardization:
- \textit{ISO/IEC standard 8859-1} (Information technology --
- 8-bit single-byte coded graphic character sets --
- Part 1: Latin alphabet No. 1).
- See also~\cite{latin-page}.
-\bibitem{t1.etx}
- Alan Jeffrey, Sebastian Rahtz, and Ulrik Vieth:
- \textit{The \TeX\ extended text encoding vector},
- version~1.801, 1998,
- \textsc{ctan}:\discretionary{}{}{\thinspace}\texttt{fonts}\slash
- \texttt{utilities}\slash \texttt{fontinst}\slash
- \texttt{inputs}\slash \texttt{etx}\slash \texttt{t1.etx}.
-\bibitem{TeXbook}
- Donald E.\ Knuth, Duane Bibby (illustrations):
- \textit{The \TeX book}, Ad\-di\-son--Wes\-ley, 1986;
- ISBN~0-201-13447-0.
-\bibitem{Unicode}
- The Unicode Consortium (editor), \emph{et al.}:
- \textit{The Unicode Standard, Version 3.0},
- Addison Wesley Longman Publisher, 2000; ISBN~0-201-61633-5.
- Most of the information in this book is also available online at
- the Unicode consortium website, at \textsc{http}:/\slash
- \texttt{www.unicode.org}\slash \texttt{unicode}\slash
- \texttt{uni2book}\slash \texttt{u2.html}.
-\end{thebibliography}
-
-
-
-\end{document} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index fe7f6f69935..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,431 +0,0 @@
-% basicex.tex
-%
-% This file contains some basic examples of commands for
-% installing the AGaramond family of fonts with fontinst v1.9.
-% It is pretty similar to what the \latinfamily command
-% does for these fonts, but the details are not identical.
-%
-% In case you want to run this file yourself, the metrics for
-% the AGaramond font family can be downloaded from
-%
-% ftp://ftp.adobe.com/pub/adobe/type/win/all/afmfiles/051-100/100/
-% and
-% ftp://ftp.adobe.com/pub/adobe/type/win/all/afmfiles/101-150/101/
-%
-% The AFM files found in these directories should then be renamed
-% as indicated in the Fontname adobe.map file. Also note that
-% the line endings are Windows-style (CRLF), so you probably need
-% to download as binary and do some conversion before you can use
-% these files comfortably.
-
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-% This tells fontinst to collect information about font
-% transformations in the file basicex.recs. That file is
-% then used by basicex2.tex.
-\recordtransforms{basicex.recs}
-
-% These commands perform transformations on the metrics of
-% some of the fonts, thereby creating new metrics files for
-% the transformed fonts.
-\transformfont{padr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}}
-\transformfont{padrc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padrc8a}}}
-\transformfont{padri8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padri8a}}}
-\transformfont{padro8r}{\slantfont{250}{\frommtx{padr8r}}}
-\transformfont{padro8x}{\slantfont{250}{\fromafm{padr8x}}}
-
-% The first three lines of each group reencode fonts
-% so that TeX can access all glyphs in them.
-\transformfont{pads8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{pads8a}}}
-\transformfont{padsc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsc8a}}}
-\transformfont{padsi8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsi8a}}}
-% The last two lines artifically create slanted variants
-% of fonts by skewing them. 250 is the natural slant of
-% the italics in this family.
-\transformfont{padso8r}{\slantfont{250}{\frommtx{pads8r}}}
-\transformfont{padso8x}{\slantfont{250}{\fromafm{pads8x}}}
-
-\transformfont{padb8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padb8a}}}
-% There is no padbc8a, hence nothing to make a padbc8r from.
-\transformfont{padbi8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padbi8a}}}
-\transformfont{padbo8r}{\slantfont{250}{\frommtx{padb8r}}}
-\transformfont{padbo8x}{\slantfont{250}{\fromafm{padb8x}}}
-% The DVI driver must be told to make the same transformations
-% to the actual fonts when a document using them is to be viewed
-% or printed. The information collected in basicex.recs can
-% help with this. The job of basicex2.tex is to translate this
-% information to a format understood by DVI drivers.
-
-
-% The \transformfont commands above generate metric files in MTX
-% format (for use by the \installfont commands below) and PL
-% format (for transformation to TFMs that are needed by the DVI
-% driver when interpreting VFs based on these fonts). These PL
-% files are minimal and not suitable for direct use in typesetting
-% since there is no kerning information, ligaturing instructions,
-% or fontdimens, but they are perfectly adequate to serve as
-% base fonts for VFs.
-%
-% The next bunch of commands generate a new set of PL files for
-% these fonts (overwriting the previous), and these new files
-% do contain kerning information, ligaturing instructions, and
-% fontdimens. (As a side-effect, these files are also larger than
-% the previous ones.) Since 8r-encoded fonts are not in practice
-% used for typesetting (not much, anyway), it is perfectly
-% possible to skip this step.
-\installfonts
- \installrawfont {padr8r}{padr8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{m}{n}{}
- \installrawfont {padrc8r}{padrc8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{m}{sc}{}
- \installrawfont {padri8r}{padri8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{m}{it}{}
- \installrawfont {padro8r}{padro8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{m}{sl}{}
-
- \installrawfont {pads8r}{pads8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{sb}{n}{}
- \installrawfont {padsc8r}{padsc8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installrawfont {padsi8r}{padsi8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{sb}{it}{}
- \installrawfont {padso8r}{padso8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{sb}{sl}{}
-
- \installrawfont {padb8r}{padb8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{b}{n}{}
- \installrawfont {padbi8r}{padbi8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{b}{it}{}
- \installrawfont {padbo8r}{padbo8r,8r}{8r} {8r}{pad}{b}{sl}{}
-\endinstallfonts
-
-
-% In the above commands, the commands have been lined up to
-% visually separate those arguments that have to do with how
-% a font is declared to LaTeX (rightmost) from those arguments
-% that specify how the font is made and what it should be called.
-
-
-% The following commands make a very basic installation of "pad"
-% families in the OT1, T1, and TS1 encodings; there is not attempt
-% to make use of the -Exp (expert) or -SC (smallcaps) fonts in
-% the AGaramond family. (One reason for making this distinction
-% is that Adobe sell these other fonts separately, so some people
-% may have the basic set used below and nothing more. Another
-% reason is that for many typefaces, there are no expert or -SC
-% fonts at all. Adapting an example using such fonts to a typeface
-% which do not have them is much too confusing for a beginner.)
-\installfonts
- \installfamily{OT1}{pad}{}
- \installfamily{T1}{pad}{}
- \installfamily{TS1}{pad}{}
-
- \installfont {padr8t}{padr8r,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{n}{}
- \installfont {padr7t}{padr8r,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{n}{}
- \installfont {padrc8t}{padr8r,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{pad}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padrc7t}{padr8r,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{pad}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padr8i}{padr8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{n}{}
- % There is no difference between the n and the sc shapes
- % of TS1 encoded fonts, hence the same TeX font can be
- % used for both. LaTeX does however need the declarations
- % to be explicit, hence this \installfontas command.
- \installfontas{padr8i} {TS1}{pad}{m}{sc}{}
- % The "option nosc" below is a speed optimization.
- % newlatin.mtx normally makes sure that a smallcaps
- % alphabet is defined (faking it if necessary),
- % regardless of whether that alphabet is at all
- % going to be used. By passing it the "nosc" option,
- % one can tell newlatin.mtx to completely skip those
- % commands that have to do with smallcaps.
- \installfont {padri8t}{padri8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padri7t}{padri8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padri8i}{padri8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padro8t}{padro8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padro7t}{padro8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padro8i}{padro8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{sl}{}
-
- % The reason newlatin is not passed the nosc option when
- % making the "n" shape fonts here is another (more tricky)
- % speed optimization. If the metric argument of two
- % subsequent \installfont commands are identical then the
- % respective glyph bases will be identical too, and in these
- % cases fontinst saves work by not rebuilding the glyph base
- % at the second command, but instead using the cached
- % definitions from the first.
- \installfont {pads8t}{pads8r,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfont {pads7t}{pads8r,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfont {padsc8t}{pads8r,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padsc7t}{pads8r,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{}
- % Thus the last four commands cause four fonts to be
- % generated, but the pads8r.mtx and newlatin.mtx files
- % are only read once.
- \installfont {pads8i}{pads8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfontas{pads8i} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padsi8t}{padsi8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padsi7t}{padsi8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padsi8i}{padsi8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padso8t}{padso8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padso7t}{padso8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padso8i}{padso8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{}
-
- \installfont {padb8t}{padb8r,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{n}{}
- \installfont {padb7t}{padb8r,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{n}{}
- \installfont {padbc8t}{padb8r,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{pad}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padbc7t}{padb8r,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{pad}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padb8i}{padb8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{n}{}
- \installfontas{padb8i} {TS1}{pad}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padbi8t}{padbi8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbi7t}{padbi8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbi8i}{padbi8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbo8t}{padbo8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padbo7t}{padbo8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padbo8i}{padbo8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{sl}{}
-\endinstallfonts
-
-
-% The set of commands above will "fake" an sc shape for the typeface
-% by making dual use of the capitals in the n shape (Regular): both
-% as normal (for the upper case in the sc shape) and shrunk to 80% of
-% their normal size (for the lower case in the sc shape). This works
-% (anyone who looks at it will understand what was intended), but it
-% does not look good, and therefore it is always better to make use
-% of proper smallcaps when it is available.
-%
-% The next set of commands is another take at creating the "pad"
-% families, this time making use of the proper smallcaps in padrc8r
-% and padsc8r. The files created by this set of commands will
-% completely overwrite the files created by the previous set of
-% commands; in practice one would only include one set of commands,
-% but both are provided here for comparison.
-\installfonts
- \installfamily{OT1}{pad}{}
- \installfamily{T1}{pad}{}
- \installfamily{TS1}{pad}{}
-
- % Since the glyph bases used for the n and sc shapes in this
- % case are different, there is no point in doing the smallcaps
- % processing when making the n shape fonts.
- \installfont {padr8t}{padr8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{n}{}
- \installfont {padr7t}{padr8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{n}{}
- % There is actually no point in doing that processing for
- % the sc shape fonts either! This is because the glyph names
- % used in padrc8r are the same as those used in padr8r (and
- % padri8r), and thus the smallcaps glyphs will already have
- % been delt with by the code for lower case glyphs. Another
- % consequence is that the same ETX files as are used for
- % the other shapes should be used for the sc shape.
- \installfont {padrc8t}{padrc8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padrc7t}{padrc8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padr8i}{padr8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{n}{}
- \installfontas{padr8i} {TS1}{pad}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padri8t}{padri8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padri7t}{padri8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padri8i}{padri8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padro8t}{padro8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{m}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padro7t}{padro8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{m}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padro8i}{padro8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{m}{sl}{}
-
- \installfont {pads8t}{pads8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfont {pads7t}{pads8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfont {padsc8t}{padsc8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padsc7t}{padsc8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {pads8i}{pads8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfontas{pads8i} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padsi8t}{padsi8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padsi7t}{padsi8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padsi8i}{padsi8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padso8t}{padso8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padso7t}{padso8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padso8i}{padso8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{sb}{sl}{}
-
- % There is however no padbc8r font; hence the sc shape of
- % the b series must still be faked, just as above.
- \installfont {padb8t}{padb8r,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{n}{}
- \installfont {padb7t}{padb8r,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{n}{}
- \installfont {padbc8t}{padb8r,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{pad}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padbc7t}{padb8r,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{pad}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padb8i}{padb8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{n}{}
- \installfontas{padb8i} {TS1}{pad}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padbi8t}{padbi8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbi7t}{padbi8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbi8i}{padbi8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbo8t}{padbo8r,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{pad}{b}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padbo7t}{padbo8r,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{pad}{b}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padbo8i}{padbo8r,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{pad}{b}{sl}{}
-\endinstallfonts
-
-
-% The "pad" family installed above is however still far from perfect.
-% The `ff', `ffi', and `ffl' ligatures are fakes, since those aren't
-% available in the fonts used. There are however such glyphs in the
-% expert (8x) companions of the fonts used above, and hence the
-% results will be better if these resources can be combined.
-%
-% One of the great advantages with TeX, virtual fonts, and fontinst
-% is the ease with which one can combine glyphs from (what the foundry
-% has packaged as) several different fonts into a single font;
-% if \installfont is given the metrics of two fonts, and some glyph
-% is available in one font but not the other, then fontinst will
-% automatically take it from the font where it was available.
-% Hence one can fill in (at least some of) the blanks of one font
-% by also listing a second font in the metrics argument of
-% \installfont. It will do the right thing automatically.
-\installfonts
- \installfamily{OT1}{padx}{}
- \installfamily{T1}{padx}{}
- \installfamily{TS1}{padx}{}
- % The "padx" family name used here is mainly motivated by
- % tradition. It has been considered useful to simultaneously
- % on a single system have both a family of virtual fonts which
- % do not make use of the expert set of base fonts, and a family
- % of virtual fonts which do make use of the expert set of base
- % fonts. For this to work, the different fonts must have
- % different names. In the Fontname scheme, this is accomplished
- % by including an "x" variant letter in the names to signify that
- % the font is "expertized". In LaTeX there is no proper standard
- % for this, but the custom is to similarly append an "x" to the
- % basic three letter family name, thus yielding "padx" instead
- % of "pad".
-
- % The Fontname scheme is in this case further complicated by
- % a desire to avoid names of more than eight characters
- % (a limit which is important in many old file systems).
- % Therefore many of the two-character variants starting with
- % 9 is a combination of an encoding variant with one or two
- % other variants (most commonly the "x" variant). The commands
- % below utilize these abbreviations (but there is no software
- % involved which would require them to).
- \installfont {padr9e}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{padx}{m}{n}{}
- \installfont {padr9t}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{m}{n}{}
- % Besides the extra ligatures, the upright 8x fonts also contain
- % a proper smallcaps alphabet. This makes it possible to make do
- % without the -c8r fonts. The commands below will make a font
- % using the upper case from padr8r and (as lower case) the
- % small caps from padr8x.
- \installfont {padrc9e}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{padx}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padrc9t}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{padx}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padr9i}{padr8r,padr8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{m}{n}{}
- \installfontas{padr9i} {TS1}{padx}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padri9e}{padri8r,padri8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padri9t}{padri8r,padri8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padri9i}{padri8r,padri8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padro9e}{padro8r,padro8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{m}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padro9t}{padro8r,padro8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{m}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padro9i}{padro8r,padro8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{m}{sl}{}
-
- \installfont {pads9e}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{padx}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfont {pads9t}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfont {padsc9e}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{padx}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padsc9t}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{padx}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {pads9i}{pads8r,pads8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfontas{pads9i} {TS1}{padx}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padsi9e}{padsi8r,padsi8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padsi9t}{padsi8r,padsi8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padsi9i}{padsi8r,padsi8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padso9e}{padso8r,padso8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{sb}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padso9t}{padso8r,padso8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{sb}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padso9i}{padso8r,padso8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{sb}{sl}{}
-
- \installfont {padb9e}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{t1} {T1}{padx}{b}{n}{}
- \installfont {padb9t}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{b}{n}{}
- % The padb8x font does not contain a smallcaps alphabet --
- % hence in this case the newlatin.mtx file reverts to faking
- % such an alphabet by shrinking the upper case. The commands
- % can however be the same as above!
- \installfont {padbc9e}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{t1c} {T1}{padx}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padbc9t}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{ot1c} {OT1}{padx}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padb9i}{padb8r,padb8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{b}{n}{}
- \installfontas{padb9i} {TS1}{padx}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padbi9e}{padbi8r,padbi8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbi9t}{padbi8r,padbi8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbi9i}{padbi8r,padbi8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbo9e}{padbo8r,padbo8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1} {T1}{padx}{b}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padbo9t}{padbo8r,padbo8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1} {OT1}{padx}{b}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padbo9i}{padbo8r,padbo8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padx}{b}{sl}{}
-\endinstallfonts
-
-
-% Finally we get to my personal favourite -- the families with hanging
-% (a.k.a. oldstyle) figures. From a historical point of view, this is
-% really the most correct appearence of these fonts, because in the 16th
-% century (when Claude Garamond designed the metal types after which the
-% AGaramond fonts where modelled) there was no such thing as lining
-% figures; all figures were hanging.
-%
-% The 8x fonts all contain a suitable set of hanging figures. This makes
-% it very straightforward to make use of these instead of the lining
-% digits of the base fonts. One simply has to make use of ETX files
-% which selects these glyphs hanging figure glyphs instead of the
-% lining figure glyphs.
-\installfonts
- \installfamily{OT1}{padj}{}
- \installfamily{T1}{padj}{}
- \installfamily{TS1}{padj}{}
- % Another custom: a "j" (the Fontname hanging figure variant letter)
- % is appended to the LaTeX family name to distinguish between
- % lining and hanging figure families.
-
- \installfont {padr9d}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{m}{n}{}
- \installfont {padr9o}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{m}{n}{}
- \installfont {padrc9d}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{t1cj} {T1}{padj}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padrc9o}{padr8r,padr8x,newlatin}{ot1cj} {OT1}{padj}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padr9i}{padr8r,padr8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{m}{n}{}
- \installfontas{padr9i} {TS1}{padj}{m}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padri9d}{padri8r,padri8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padri9o}{padri8r,padri8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padri9i}{padri8r,padri8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{m}{it}{}
- \installfont {padro9d}{padro8r,padro8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{m}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padro9o}{padro8r,padro8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{m}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padro9i}{padro8r,padro8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{m}{sl}{}
-
- \installfont {pads9d}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfont {pads9o}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfont {padsc9d}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{t1cj} {T1}{padj}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padsc9o}{pads8r,pads8x,newlatin}{ot1cj} {OT1}{padj}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {pads9i}{pads8r,pads8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{sb}{n}{}
- \installfontas{pads9i} {TS1}{padj}{sb}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padsi9d}{padsi8r,padsi8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padsi9o}{padsi8r,padsi8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padsi9i}{padsi8r,padsi8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{sb}{it}{}
- \installfont {padso9d}{padso8r,padso8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{sb}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padso9o}{padso8r,padso8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{sb}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padso9i}{padso8r,padso8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{sb}{sl}{}
-
- \installfont {padb9d}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{b}{n}{}
- \installfont {padb9o}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{b}{n}{}
- \installfont {padbc9d}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{t1cj} {T1}{padj}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padbc9o}{padb8r,padb8x,newlatin}{ot1cj} {OT1}{padj}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padb9i}{padb8r,padb8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{b}{n}{}
- \installfontas{padb9i} {TS1}{padj}{b}{sc}{}
- \installfont {padbi9d}{padbi8r,padbi8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbi9o}{padbi8r,padbi8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbi9i}{padbi8r,padbi8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{b}{it}{}
- \installfont {padbo9d}{padbo8r,padbo8x,newlatin option nosc}{t1j} {T1}{padj}{b}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padbo9o}{padbo8r,padbo8x,newlatin option nosc}{ot1j} {OT1}{padj}{b}{sl}{}
- \installfont {padbo9i}{padbo8r,padbo8x,textcomp}{ts1} {TS1}{padj}{b}{sl}{}
-\endinstallfonts
-
-% This closes the file opened by \recordtransforms above.
-\endrecordtransforms
-
-\bye
-
-% The installations made by the above commands are certainly not
-% optimal. Some things which can be improved are:
-%
-% - Although the padrc9e, padrc9t, padsc9e, padsc9t, padrc9d,
-% padrc9o, padsc9d, and padsc9o fonts contain proper smallcaps
-% glyphs, there are no kerns between the smallcaps and
-% the upper case in these fonts, because there were no such
-% kerns in any of the fonts they are based on. There are
-% however such kerning pairs in padrc8r and padsc8r, and it is
-% quite easy to extract this information using the \reglyphfont
-% command with the settings in the csckrn2x.tex file.
-%
-% - The padrc8t, padrc7t, padsc8t, and padsc7t fonts that are
-% based on padrc8r and padsc8r respectively have hanging figures,
-% whereas the other fonts in the same family have lining figures.
-% This is only because that is how the foundry packaged the
-% glyphs into fonts, and the careful font installer might want
-% to straighten out this situation. One way to do that is
-% to make use of the unsetnum.mtx file, another is to make
-% use of the `suffix' mechanism (new in v1.923).
-%
-% - One glyph which is missing from all the fonts made above is
-% the Euro glyph (and that is kind of awkward these days, although
-% as of v1.926 textcomp.mtx fakes this using a C and two rules).
-% One way to supply a Euro glyph is to provide yet another font
-% (besides the -8r's and -8x's) as base font, if that extra
-% font contains the missing Euro glyph. The same trick can be used
-% to get greek capitals for the OT1-encoded fonts.
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex2.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 74fe2a4df5a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/examples/basicex2.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-%
-% basicex2.tex
-%
-% fontinst command file for writing map file fragments for
-% the raw fonts used by the fonts made in basicex.tex.
-%
-
-\input finstmsc.sty
-
-% At this point, you might want to change some settings
-% to make the map file fragments written better adjusted
-% to your particular system. Some common examples are:
-%
-% \resetstr{PSfontsuffix}{.pfb}
-%
-% which is useful if the actual fonts are in PFB format.
-%
-% \AssumeLWFN
-%
-% This is useful if the font files are named according to
-% the old Mac OS Classic convention for PostScript fonts
-% (names like AGarBolIta).
-
-\adddriver{dvips}{dvips.map}
-% This causes a .map file for dvips to be written.
-% It is probably better to choose a name that has to
-% do with the fonts than to use `dvips.map'.
-% In some systems, there is a program updmap which combines
-% several small .map files such as this one into a large
-% psfonts.map file.
-\adddriver{dvipdfm}{dvipdfm.map}
-% Similar file for dvipdfm.
-\adddriver{pltotf}{pltotf-script.sh}
-% A shell script that runs pltotf on those .pl files
-% which you need to turn into .tfm files.
-\adddriver{debug}{mapdump.txt}
-% This file contains the available data in a human-readable
-% format. This is useful if your dvi driver uses some other
-% kind of map file.
-
-\input basicex.recs
-% This is where all the work is done.
-
-\donedrivers
-% This closes the files and does some cleanup.
-
-\bye
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.dvi b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.dvi
deleted file mode 100644
index ae8133acad4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.dvi
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 20c50851cdd..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 19f5f012231..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/fontinst.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4160 +0,0 @@
-%%% ====================================================================
-%%% @LaTeX-file{
-%%% author = "Alan Jeffrey and Rowland McDonnell and
-%%% Ulrik Vieth and Lars Hellstr{\"o}m",
-%%% version = "1.928",
-%%% date = "2004-12-16",
-%%% time = "12:18:32 +01:00",
-%%% filename = "fontinst.tex",
-%%% email = "fontinst@tug.org",
-%%% checksum = "",
-%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
-%%% keywords = "fontinst, TeX, PostScript, documentation",
-%%% supported = "yes",
-%%% abstract = "This is the documentation for the fontinst
-%%% font installation package.",
-%%% package = "fontinst",
-%%% dependencies = "ltxguide.cls, url.sty, xspace.sty"
-%%% }
-%%% ====================================================================
-
-% Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 Alan Jeffrey
-
-% Modified by Rowland McDonnell June 1998
-% Modified and revised by Ulrik Vieth June 1998
-% Modified by Lars Hellstr\"om July 2004
-
-
-\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxguide}
-\usepackage[OT1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{url,xspace}
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-
-\IfFileExists{palatino.flag}{
- \renewcommand\rmdefault{ppl}
-}
-%\renewcommand\rmdefault{padx}
-%\renewcommand\rmdefault{pmnx}
-
-% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-
-% Title page and running heads.
-
-\makeatletter
-\newcommand{\subtitle}[1]{\renewcommand{\@subtitle}{#1}}
-\newcommand{\version}[1]{\renewcommand{\@version}{#1}}
-\newcommand{\illustration}[1]{\renewcommand{\@illustration}{#1}}
-
-\newcommand{\@subtitle}{}
-\newcommand{\@version}{???}
-\newcommand{\@illustration}{cover.eps}
-
-% \pagestyle{myheadings}
-% \AtBeginDocument{\markright{\small\itshape
-% \@author\hfill\@title: \@subtitle\quad}}
-
-
-\renewcommand{\maketitle}{{%
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
- \normalfont\centering
- \null
- {\fontsize{100}{100}\textit{\@title}}%
- \par\bigskip
- {\Large\textbf{\@subtitle}}%
- \vfill
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{\@illustration}%
- \vfill
- {\Large\textbf{%
- \def\and{\egroup\qquad\hbox\bgroup}
- \leavevmode \hbox{\@author}\\[\smallskipamount]
- \@title~v\@version
- \quad\textperiodcentered\quad \@date}}%
- \clearpage
-}}
-\makeatother
-
-
-% Set lists tighter (assuming non-zero \parskip).
-
-\makeatletter
-\renewcommand{\@listI}{%
- \leftmargin\leftmargini
- \parsep\medskipamount
- \itemsep\z@ % + parsep
- \topsep\z@ % + parskip
- \partopsep\z@
-}
-\newenvironment{isyntax}{%
- \let\\\@centercr
- \list{}{%
- \itemsep \z@
- \itemindent -1.5em%
- \listparindent \itemindent
- \advance \leftmargin 1.5em%
- }%
- \advance \rightskip \z@\@plus0.7\linewidth \relax
- \linepenalty=100\relax
- \item\relax
-}{\endlist}
-\makeatother
-
-\newenvironment{smalldes}{%
- \list{}{%
- \setlength\labelwidth{0pt}%
- \setlength\itemindent{-\leftmargin}%
- \setlength\listparindent{1em}%
- \setlength\parsep{0pt}%
- \setlength\itemsep{0pt plus 1pt}%
- \setlength\topsep{\itemsep}%
- \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel
- }%
-}{\endlist}
-
-\newenvironment{hackernote}{%
- \list{}{
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{0pt}%
- \setlength\labelwidth{0pt}%
- \setlength{\listparindent}{1.4em}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{0pt plus 1pt}%
- \setlength{\itemsep}{\medskipamount}%
- }\item[]%
- \small
- \textit{Note for hackers.}\hspace{0.5em}%
-}{\endlist}
-
-% % I don't use the <...> feature for verbatim,
-% % so I undo that ltxguide feature.
-% \makeatletter
-% \renewcommand{\verbatim@font}{%
-% \normalfont \ttfamily
-% % \catcode`\<=\active
-% % \catcode`\>=\active
-% }
-% \makeatother
-
-
-% ltxguide.cls decl environment, but with equal space above and
-% below.
-\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
-\makeatletter
-\newenvironment{decl*}[1][]{%
- \par
- \small\addvspace{2.3ex}%
- \vskip -\parskip
- \ifx\relax#1\relax
- \def\@decl@date{}%
- \else
- \def\@decl@date{\NEWfeature{#1}}%
- \fi
- \noindent\hspace{-\leftmargini}%
- \begin{tabular}{|l|}%
- \hline\ignorespaces
-}{%
- \\\hline
- \end{tabular}%
- \nobreak\@decl@date\par\nobreak
- \vspace{2.3ex}\vskip -\parskip
-}
-\makeatother
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-
-% Set spacing around captions.
-
-\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{\medskipamount}
-\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{\medskipamount}
-
-% Markup for logos, file types, programs, etc.
-
-\newcommand*{\meta}{\m}
-\newcommand*{\marg}{\arg}
-\newcommand*{\parg}[1]{\texttt{(}\m{#1}\texttt{)}}
-
-\newcommand*{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\ #1}\xspace}
-
-\newcommand*{\OzTeX}{O\kern-.03em z\kern-.15em\TeX}
-\newcommand*{\OzMF}{O\kern-.03em zMF}
-\newcommand*{\OzTools}{O\kern-.03em z\kern-.15em Tools}
-
-\newcommand{\PS}{Post\-Script\xspace}
-\newcommand{\TT}{True\-Type\xspace}
-
-\newcommand*{\setfilename}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\setdotfilename}[1]{\setfilename{.#1}}
-\newcommand*{\setpackagename}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-
-\newcommand{\dvips} {\setpackagename{dvips}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Dvips} {\setpackagename{Dvips}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\fontinst}{\setpackagename{font\-inst}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Fontinst}{\setpackagename{Font\-inst}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\fontdoc}{\setpackagename{font\-doc}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Fontdoc}{\setpackagename{Font\-doc}\xspace}
-
-% \show\fontname
-\newcommand{\fontnamekb}{fontname\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Fontnamekb}{Fontname\xspace}
-
-\newcommand{\mf} {\setfilename{mf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Mf} {\setfilename{Mf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\vf} {\setfilename{vf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Vf} {\setfilename{Vf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pl} {\setfilename{pl}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Pl} {\setfilename{Pl}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\fd} {\setfilename{fd}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Fd} {\setfilename{Fd}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pk} {\setfilename{pk}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Pk} {\setfilename{Pk}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\afm}{\setfilename{afm}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Afm}{\setfilename{Afm}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\vpl}{\setfilename{vpl}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Vpl}{\setfilename{Vpl}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\tfm}{\setfilename{tfm}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Tfm}{\setfilename{Tfm}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\mtx}{\setfilename{mtx}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Mtx}{\setfilename{Mtx}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\etx}{\setfilename{etx}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Etx}{\setfilename{Etx}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pfa}{\setfilename{pfa}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Pfa}{\setfilename{Pfa}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pfb}{\setfilename{pfb}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Pfb}{\setfilename{Pfb}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\dvi}{\setfilename{dvi}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Dvi}{\setfilename{Dvi}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pdf}{\setfilename{pdf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Pdf}{\setfilename{Pdf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\ttf}{\setfilename{ttf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Ttf}{\setfilename{Ttf}\xspace}
-
-\newcommand{\vftovp}{\setpackagename{vftovp}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\vptovf}{\setpackagename{vptovf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pltotf}{\setpackagename{pltotf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\tftopl}{\setpackagename{tftopl}\xspace}
-
-\newcommand{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX}
-
-
-% % Stolen from Dr Knuth
-% \makeatletter % borrow the private macros of PLAIN (with care)
-% \def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant
-% \def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}} % hexadecimal constant
-% % macros for font tables
-% \def\oddline#1{\cr
-% \noalign{\nointerlineskip}
-% \multispan{19}\hrulefill&
-% \setbox0=\hbox{\lower 2.3pt\hbox{\hex{#1x}}}\smash{\box0}\cr
-% \noalign{\nointerlineskip}}
-% \def\evenline{\cr\noalign{\hrule}}
-% \def\chartstrut{\lower4.5pt\vbox to14pt{}}
-% \def\beginchart#1{$$\global\count@=0 #1
-% \halign to\hsize\bgroup
-% \chartstrut##\tabskip0pt plus10pt&
-% &\hfil##\hfil&\vrule##\cr
-% \lower6.5pt\null
-% &&&\oct0&&\oct1&&\oct2&&\oct3&&\oct4&&\oct5&&\oct6&&\oct7&\evenline}
-% \def\endchart{\raise11.5pt\null&&&\hex 8&&\hex 9&&\hex A&&\hex B&
-% &\hex C&&\hex D&&\hex E&&\hex F&\cr\egroup$$}
-% \def\*{\global\advance\count@ by1 }
-% \def\:{\setbox0=\hbox{\char\count@}%
-% \ifdim\ht0>7.5pt\reposition
-% \else\ifdim\dp0>2.5pt\reposition\fi\fi
-% \box0\global\advance\count@ by1 }
-% \def\reposition{\setbox0=\hbox{$\vcenter{\kern2pt\box0\kern2pt}$}}
-% \def\smallchart{%
-% %\global\advance\count@ by16
-% &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0
-% &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1
-% &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2
-% &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3
-% &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4
-% &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5
-% &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6
-% &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7
-% &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline}
-%
-% \def\bigchart{%
-% %\global\advance\count@ by16
-% &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0
-% &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1
-% &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2
-% &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3
-% &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4
-% &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5
-% &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6
-% &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7
-% &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{20x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline8
-% &\oct{21x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{22x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline9
-% &\oct{23x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{24x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{A}
-% &\oct{25x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{26x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{B}
-% &\oct{27x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{30x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{C}
-% &\oct{31x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{32x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{D}
-% &\oct{33x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{34x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{E}
-% &\oct{35x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
-% &\oct{36x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{F}
-% &\oct{37x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline}
-%
-% % \font\xrm = cmr10 at 10pt % change this line to test font
-% % \beginchart\xrm \normalchart \endchart
-%
-% \newcommand{\smallfontchart}[1]{%
-% \font\xrm = #1 \beginchart\xrm \smallchart \endchart}
-% \newcommand{\bigfontchart}[1]{%
-% \font\xrm = #1 \beginchart\xrm \bigchart \endchart}
-%
-% % \smallfontchart{cmr10 at 10pt}
-% % \bigfontchart{ecrm1000 at 10pt}
-% \makeatother
-% % End stolen from Dr Knuth
-
-
-
-\title{fontinst}
-\subtitle{Font installation software for \TeX}
-\author{Alan Jeffrey\and Rowland McDonnell\and Lars Hellstr\"om}
-\illustration{roadmap.eps}
-\version{1.9}
-\date{December 2004}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{itshape}
- This manual is currently being rewritten, and may therefore be a
- bit disorganised. For authoritative information on command syntaxes
- and the like, see the Literate Programming sources for
- \fontinst. The main file there is \textsl{\texttt{fisource.tex}}.
-\end{itshape}
-
-\bigskip
-
-\begin{footnotesize}
- This manual describes the \texttt{fontinst} software for converting
- fonts from Adobe Font Metric format to forms readable by \TeX. This
- manual should be distributed with the \texttt{fontinst} software,
- which is available by anonymous FTP from
- \url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/fonts/utilities/fontinst}, and
- on the various CD-ROMs containing material from the CTAN archives.
- Please do not contact the author directly for copies.
-
- If you would like to report a bug with \texttt{fontinst}, please
- mail \url{fontinst@tug.org}. The mail will be sent to the
- \texttt{fontinst} mailing list. If you would like to be on the
- \texttt{fontinst} mailing list, see
- \url{http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/fontinst}.
-\end{footnotesize}
-
-\tableofcontents
-
-% \vfill
-
-\clearpage
-
-
-% \section{Introduction}
-%
-% Digital fonts, as they may be bought from a foundry or other supplier,
-% are usually not directly usable with \LaTeX. An obvious problem can be
-% that the font information is not available in a format that \LaTeX\
-% understands. A more subtle problem is that the fonts are often
-% organised in a way that is unsuitable for automatic typesetting.
-% % \Fontinst was written to overcome these problems.
-%
-% % The main thing \fontinst does is creating virtual fonts (\vf's).
-%
-%
-% % The \fontinst package is a set of \TeX\ macros written to create
-% % virtual fonts for use with \TeX.
-
-
-\section{Defining terms}
-
-This is rather a large and perhaps tedious section. You might be
-tempted to skip it so you can get to some more direct information on
-how to use \fontinst. That's fine if you understand everything about
-how \TeX\ handles fonts. If not, I suggest you at least skim though
-this section.
-
-\subsection{What's a font?}
-
-Once upon a time, this question was easily answered: a font is a
-set of type in one size, style, etc. There used to be no
-ambiguity, because a font was a collection of chunks of type metal
-kept in a drawer, one drawer for each font.
-
-These days, with digital typesetting, things are more complicated.
-What a font `is' isn't easy to pin down. A typical use of a \PS
-font with \LaTeX\ might use these elements:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Type 1 printer font file
-\item Bitmap screen font file
-\item Adobe font metric file (\afm file)
-\item \TeX\ font metric file (\tfm file)
-\item Virtual font file (\vf file)
-\item font definition file (\fd file)
-\end{itemize}
-Looked at from a particular point of view, each of these files
-`is' the font. So what's going on?
-
-
-\subsubsection{Type 1 printer font files}
-
-These files contain the information needed by your printer to draw
-the shapes of all the characters in a font. They're typically
-files with a \pfa or \pfb extension; on Macs they're usually in
-files of type `LWFN' which usually have icons that look like a
-laser printer. The information in all these files is basically
-the same: the only difference is in its representation. \pfa
-stands for `printer font ASCII', while \pfb stands for `printer
-font binary'. That is, \pfa files contain plain text information,
-while \pfb files contain the same information encoded as
-machine-readable binary data.
-
-If you have Adobe Type Manager (ATM) installed on your computer,
-ATM will use these files to draw an accurate representation of the
-letters on the screen of your computer when you are previewing a
-\TeX\ document.
-
-Printer font files are not used directly by \TeX\ at all -- \TeX\
-just prepares a \dvi file that refers to the fonts by name and the
-characters by number: \TeX\ knows nothing about the shapes
-involved. The DVI driver uses the printer font files when you ask
-it to print the \dvi file. This means that you can produce a \dvi
-file which uses, say, Palatino, even if you do not have the
-Type~1 printer font file for this font on your computer. You will
-need to find a computer that does have Palatino before you can
-print it or preview it, though.
-
-Pdf\TeX\ is different from \TeX\ in this respect; since pdf\TeX\
-integrates most of the functionality of a DVI driver, it may be unable
-to generate working \pdf output if the some Type~1 printer font file
-is not available.
-
-
-\subsubsection{Bitmap screen font files}
-
-These files contain a low-resolution bitmap for drawing a
-representation of the font on the screen of your computer if ATM
-is not installed. In the \TeX\ world, these files are only used
-for screen previews by the DVI driver. They are kept in font
-suitcase files on Macintoshes.
-%\marginnote{And where on other computers?}
-
-
-\subsubsection{Adobe font metric files (\afm files)}
-
-These files are text files which contain information about the
-size of each character in a font, kerning and ligature
-information, and so on. They can't be used by \TeX\ directly, but
-the information they contain is essential if you want to use a
-font with \TeX. \Fontinst can create from an \afm file the
-necessary \tfm and \vf files so you can use a font with \TeX.
-Once you have created all the files you need to use a font with
-\TeX, you can remove the corresponding \afm files from your
-computer unless you have other software that needs them.
-
-The job of turning an \afm file into a set of \tfm and \vf files
-is one of the main uses for \fontinst. Most of this document is
-concerned with this process, so don't worry if it seems a bit
-vague at the moment.
-
-
-\subsubsection{\TeX\ font metric files (\tfm files)}
-
-These are binary data files in a format designed for use by \TeX\
-which contain (more-or-less) the same information as \afm files:
-the size of each character in a font (font metric data), kerning,
-and ligature information.
-
-When you select a font in \TeX, you are telling \TeX\ to typeset
-using a particular \tfm file; from \TeX's point of view, a \tfm
-file (and nothing else) \emph{is} a font. \TeX\ itself doesn't
-see printer font files, screen bitmaps, \pk files, \vf files, or
-anything else to do with fonts: only \tfm files.
-
-\TeX\ uses these \tfm files to decide where to put characters when
-typesetting. From \TeX's point of view, \tfm files are fonts,
-even though they contain no information about the shape of
-letters, and are not used by anything except \TeX\ -- once you
-have produced a \dvi file, you don't need the \tfm files to print
-it out. (This is a slight lie: \dvips can read \tfm files
-corresponding to \PS and \TT fonts so it can modify the metrics
-slightly to improve the letterspacing at your chosen output
-resolution. This is an optional minor tweak and not an essential
-part of the output process.)
-
-
-\subsubsection{Property list files (\pl files)}
-
-\pl files are human-readable text files which contain all the font
-metric, kerning, ligature, and other information needed to create
-a \tfm file. You can convert between the two file formats using
-\tftopl and \pltotf.
-
-
-\subsubsection{Virtual font files (\vf files)}
-
-These are binary data files in a format designed for use by \TeX\
-\dvi drivers. They're main purpose in life is to let you use
-fonts in different encodings to the standard \TeX\ encodings.
-These files are used by \dvi driver software only.
-
-They are used only by \dvi drivers to work out what it should
-\emph{really} print when you ask for a particular character.
-Technically they are like subroutine libraries for \dvi drivers,
-with one subroutine for each character in the virtual font: when
-the \dvi driver sees a \dvi command to set a character from a virtual
-font, it will execute a sequence of \dvi commands (the ``mapcommands
-property'' of this character) that it reads in the \vf file. You need
-not worry about the details of this, as \fontinst deals with them for
-you. Creating and using virtual fonts is what this document is about,
-so don't worry if this doesn't make sense yet. (After all, how much
-do you need to know about the inner workings of \dvi files to typeset
-and print \TeX\ documents?)
-
-Each \vf file has a \tfm file with the same name. To use a
-virtual font, you select the \tfm file as the font to use in your
-document. When the \dvi driver comes across this \tfm file in the
-\dvi file, it looks up the \vf file and uses that to decide what
-to do.
-
-
-\subsubsection{Virtual property list files (\vpl files)}
-
-\vpl files are human-readable text files which contain all the
-font metric, kerning, mapping, and other information needed to
-create a \vf and \tfm pair.
-
-\vptovf will create a \vf/\tfm pair from a \vpl file. \vftovp
-will create a \vpl from a \vf/\tfm pair. \vftovp also needs to be
-able to read all the \tfm files that are referred to by a \vf to
-recreate the \vpl\ -- it looks at the checksums to verify that
-everything's okay.
-
-
-\subsubsection{Font definition files (\fd files)}
-
-These are files containing commands to tell \LaTeX\ which \tfm
-files to associate with a request for a font using \LaTeX's font
-selection commands.
-
-For example, here is a small and edited part of the \fd file
-supplied with \setpackagename{PSNFSS} to allow you to use the
-Adobe Times font in T1 encoding:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- \ProvidesFile{t1ptm.fd}
- [1997/02/11 Fontinst v1.6 font definitions for T1/ptm.]
-
- \DeclareFontFamily{T1}{ptm}{}
-
- \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{m}{n} {<<->> ptmr8t}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{m}{it}{<<->> ptmri8t}{}
- ...
- \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{b}{n} {<<->> ptmb8t}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{b}{it}{<<->> ptmbi8t}{}
- ...
-\end{verbatim}
-What this means is: when you use \LaTeX\ to select the font family
-|ptm| in T1 encoding in the medium series (|m|) and normal shape
-(|n|), \TeX\ uses the font \texttt{ptmr8t.tfm}. Similarly, if you
-select bold italic, \TeX\ uses \texttt{ptmbi8t.tfm}.
-
-\LaTeX\ works out which \fd file to load based on the current
-encoding and font family selected. If you've selected T1 encoded
-|ptm| like this:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont
-\end{verbatim}
-\LaTeX\ loads the file \url{t1ptm.fd} (if it doesn't exist, you're
-in trouble). As you can see above, this file contains information
-so that \LaTeX\ knows which \tfm file to use. So if you ask for,
-say, |T1/ptm/b/it| (T1 encoded Times-Roman, bold series, italic
-shape), you get the font \texttt{ptmbi8t}.
-
-You can find more about \fd files and \LaTeX's font selection commands
-at CTAN:
-\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/fntguide.tex}
-and \url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/info/simple-nfss.tex} are
-both useful.
-
-
-\subsection{What does \fontinst do?}
-
-\fontinst creates \vpl and \pl files from \afm or \pl files to map
-any glyph or combination of glyphs in the original font files to
-any slot in the output font file. There, isn't that better? Off
-you go now\ldots
-
-If you're still confused, I'll explain a few things.
-\begin{description}
-\item[Glyph]
- A glyph is an image, often associated with one or several characters.
- Some examples of glyphs are:
- `A', `\textsf{A}', `$\mathcal{A}$', `B', `F',
- `{\usefont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}f}',
- `{\usefont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}fi}', `\~{}'.
- Fonts are collections of glyphs. \Fontinst refers to glyphs by name.
-\item[Slot]
- This is jargon for `a numbered position in a font'. (What is
- important is the number, and that this number refers to a position
- in a font, but which font is usually irrelevant.)
-\item[Character]
- The modern definition is that a character is the smallest component
- of written language that has semantic value. Speaking of a
- character, one refers to the abstract meaning and/or shape, rather
- than a specific shape.
-
- Since fonts have often contained a unique glyph for each character
- and each usable glyph has been assigned a particular slot,
- it is not uncommon (in particular in older terminology) to see the
- three mixed up, usually so that one says `character' where one of
- the other two would have been more correct. The \TeX-related font
- file formats is no exception, as you may see examples of elsewhere
- in this document.
-\item[Encoding]
- There are really two different encoding concepts that one encounters
- when using \fontinst. The differences are not great, and an
- encoding of one kind often corresponds to an encoding of the other
- kind, but it is not merely a matter of translation.
-
- A \emph{\LaTeX\ encoding} is a mapping from characters (or more
- formally \LaTeX\ Internal Character Representations) to slots.
- In the \texttt{OT1} encoding, `\o' (or more technically `|\o|') maps
- to slot~28, whereas in the \texttt{T1} encoding it maps to slot~248.
- This kind of encoding affects what \TeX\ is doing; \dvi drivers are
- not involved.
-
- A \emph{font encoding} (or \emph{encoding vector}) is a mapping from
- slots to glyph names. This is the kind of encoding that \fontinst
- primarily deals with, and also the kind of encoding that \dvi
- drivers make use of. \texttt{ot1.etx} associates slot~28 with
- `\texttt{oslash}', whereas \texttt{t1.etx} and \texttt{EC.enc} (one
- of several to \texttt{T1} corresponding encoding vectors that come
- with \dvips) associates slot~28 with `\texttt{fi}'.
-
- \LaTeX\ encodings occur in \fontinst only as names and only in
- relation to \fd files. It is unlikely that you will need to create
- one of your own. The mappings defined by font encodings are on the
- other hand of great importance and \etx files are used to direct
- the generation of virtual fonts. Advanced \fontinst users may well
- find that they need to create new font encodings to achieve their
- goals.
-\end{description}
-
-% You're probably familiar with ASCII
-% encoding, which has the letter `A' in slot~65, `B' in slot~66,
-% and so on. That's it, really. \TeX\ uses several different
-% encodings. The most common ones are OT1 (the original \TeX\
-% 7~bit encoding) and T1 (the newer \TeX\ 8~bit encoding).
-% % -- much more on this later.
-
-The thing is that the average \PS font comes in Adobe standard
-encoding, which, for example, has the glyph dotless~i `\i' in
-slot~245. But \TeX\ \texttt{T1} encoding expects the glyph o~dieresis
-`{\"o}' in that slot, and wants dotless~i in slot~25. So if you
-tried to use a raw \PS font with \TeX, any time you tried to get
-a `{\"o}', you'd get a `\i'; and every time you tried to get a `\i',
-you'd get a blank, because Adobe standard encoding says that
-slot~25 is empty. The process of dealing with this problem is
-called `re-encoding', and is what \fontinst helps with.
-
-This might not make much sense yet; the best thing to do is relax.
-There's a lot of things that need to be dealt with when you're
-setting up \LaTeX\ to use a new font, so you can expect to be a
-bit confused until you've done it a few times.
-
-
-\subsection{What do you do with \fontinst?}
-
-If you're using \fontinst, the usual steps you need to take to use
-an ordinary \PS text font with \LaTeX\ are these:
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Give the \afm files an appropriate name.
-\item Use \fontinst to produce an |8r| encoded \pl files from
- these \afm files.
-\item Use \fontinst to create T1 and OT1 encoded \pl and \vpl
- files from the |8r| encoded \pl files (this procedure will also
- create suitable \fd files).
-\item Use \pltotf to turn each \pl file into a \tfm file.
-\item Use \vptovf to turn each \vpl file into a pair of \vf and
- \tfm files.
-\item Move the \tfm, \vf, and \fd files into the appropriate
- directories so \LaTeX\ can see them.
-\item Tell your DVI driver about the new font (edit \dvips's
- \texttt{psfonts.map} file, or \OzTeX's \texttt{Default}
- configuration file.
-\item Perhaps write a package file to make selecting the new font
- a little easier.
-\item Test it.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-
-\section{Fontmaking commands}
-
-There are three main types of files that you may write to control what
-\fontinst does: \emph{command files} (usually with suffix
-\setdotfilename{tex}), \emph{encoding definition files} (suffix
-\setdotfilename{etx}), and \emph{metric files} (suffix
-\setdotfilename{mtx}). Command files directly tell \fontinst to do
-things, whereas the purpose of an encoding or metric file is more to
-store data, but all three file types are technically sequences of
-\TeX\ commands that \fontinst execute when reading the file. Normal
-\TeX\ syntax rules apply in all three file types, although a few
-commands may behave in unfamiliar ways.
-
-Within the command file category, it is possible to discern certain
-subcategories. Most command files are written for one particular
-task, but some are common pieces that have been factored out from
-larger command files and are merely meant to be |\input| where
-appropriate. (\setfilename{csc2x.tex} in the \fontinst distribution is
-an example of this latter kind.) One may also distinguish between
-command files that are made for use with \setfilename{fontinst.sty}
-command definitions and command files that are made for use with
-\setfilename{finstmsc.sty} command definitions. This section documents
-the commands that are particular to the former category, whereas the
-next section documents commands that are particular to the latter.
-
-
-\subsection{Install commands}
-
-The core fontmaking takes place within a block of ``install
-commands''. (This name is a bit unfortunate since nothing is actually
-installed; rather some files that need to be installed are generated.)
-Such blocks have the structure
-\begin{quote}
- |\installfonts|\\
- \m{install commands}\\
- |\endinstallfonts|
-\end{quote}
-The \m{install commands} describe the fonts, glyphs and encodings used
-to build fonts, whereas the purpose of the delimiting |\installfonts|
-and |\endinstallfonts| are rather to organise the writing of \fd files.
-\begin{decl*}
- |\installfonts|\\
- |\endinstallfonts|
-\end{decl*}
-At |\installfonts|, \fontinst's internal list of \fd files to generate
-are cleared. At |\endinstallfonts|, \fd files are written for those
-combinations of encoding and font family that appeared in the
-\meta{install commands}.
-
-\begin{hackernote}
- |\installfonts|, |\endinstallfonts|, and the individual
- install commands between them also cooperate in a rather complicated
- grouping scheme to cache glyphbases. This may interfere with
- non-\fontinst commands in the \meta{install commands}. If for
- example an assignment to some |\tracing|\dots\ parameter here does
- not seem to have any effect, try making the assignment |\global|.
-\end{hackernote}
-
-The most important \meta{install command} is
-\begin{decl*}
- |\installfont|\arg{font-name}\arg{metrics-list}\arg{etx-list}\\
- \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{encoding}\arg{family}\arg{series}%
- \arg{shape}\arg{size}
-\end{decl*}
-This produces a \TeX\ virtual font called \m{font-name}. The
-\meta{metrics-list} and the \meta{etx-list} determine this font,
-whereas the other arguments specify how the \fd file will declare it
-for \LaTeX. The \m{encoding}, \m{family}, \m{series}, and \m{shape}
-are precisely the NFSS parameters. The \m{size} is either a shorthand
-declared by \verb|\declaresize| (see below), or is an \fd size
-specification.
-
-Like most \fontinst lists, the elements in the \meta{metrics-list} and
-\meta{etx-list} are separated by commas (so-called comma-separated
-lists). In their simplest form, the elements of these lists are file
-names (minus suffixes): \mtx files in the \meta{metrics-list} and
-\etx files in the \meta{etx-list}. First the \mtx files are processed
-to build up a glyphbase, i.e., store definitions of glyphs and their
-metric properties in memory, and then the \etx files are processed
-(several times) to select a set of glyphs and write the corresponding
-information to a \vpl file.
-
-For example, to install the \texttt{T1}-encoded Times Roman font
-(using \texttt{t1.etx} and \texttt{latin.mtx}), you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \installfont{ptmr8t}{ptmr8r,latin}{t1}
- {T1}{ptm}{m}{n}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-To install a \texttt{OT1}-encoded Times Roman font, with a scaled
-version of Symbol for the Greek letters, you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \installfont{zptmrsy}{ptmr8r,psyr scaled 1100,latin}{ot1}
- {OT1}{ptm}{m}{n}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-As the second example indicates, there is more to the list items than
-just file names. In the case of an metrics list item, the syntax
-permits the two forms
-\begin{decl*}
- \meta{filename}\meta{optional modifiers}\\
- |\metrics| \meta{metric commands}
-\end{decl*}
-\NEWfeature{v1.923}
-where an \meta{optional modifier} is one of
-\begin{decl*}
- \verb*| scaled |\meta{rawscale factor}\\
- \verb*| suffix |\meta{glyph name suffix}\\
- \verb*| encoding |\meta{etx}\\
- \verb*| option |\meta{string}
-\end{decl*}
-A list item may contain several such modifiers, but most commonly it
-does not contain any. The
-\meta{metric commands} are explicit metric commands, as described in
-Section~\ref{Sec:Metric}; this latter feature is meant for minor
-adjustments that you don't want to bother creating a separate \mtx
-file for.
-
-The \meta{filename} above primarily refers to a file
-\meta{filename}\texttt{.mtx}, but that need not always exist before
-executing the above command. If there exists a \pl, \afm, or \vpl file
-with the right name then that is first converted to a corresponding
-\mtx file. However, a special case occurs if there is an |encoding|
-modifier: this forces conversion of a \pl or \vpl file even if an
-\mtx file exists, and also forces using the specified \etx file when
-assigning glyph names to the slots of that file. Normally the choice
-of \etx file for such conversions to \mtx is based on
-|\declareencoding| declarations.
-
-The |scaled| modifier sets the \texttt{rawscale} variable for the
-processing of that file. This has the effect of scaling all raw
-glyphs from that file to \meta{rawscale factor} per milles of their
-previous size. The |suffix| modified causes the \meta{glyph name
-suffix} to be implicitly appended to all glyphs defined by this file.
-The |option| modifier adds the \meta{string} to the list of ``options''
-for this file. The |\ifoption| command can be used in the file to test
-whether a particular string has been supplied as an option.
-
-\begin{hackernote}
- In general, \fontinst commands process comma-separated list arguments
- by first splitting at commas and then fully expanding each item, but
- this \meta{metrics-list} argument is an exception. This is first
- fully expanded (|\edef|) and then split into items. The difference
- is that a macro used in this \meta{metrics-list} argument can expand
- to several list items, whereas a macro used in an ordinary
- comma-separated list argument can only expand to (part of) a single
- list item.
-
- The |\metrics| list items do however constitute an exception within
- this exception. These list items are in their entirety protected
- from the initial full expansion, so you don't have to worry about
- peculiar fragility errors there.
-\end{hackernote}
-
-The elements in the \meta{etx-list} have fewer variants, but there is
-still a general syntax
-\begin{decl*}
- \meta{filename}\meta{optional modifiers}
-\end{decl*}
-The \meta{optional modifier}s permitted are:
-\begin{decl*}
- \verb*| mtxasetx|\\
- \verb*| option |\meta{string}
-\end{decl*}
-The \texttt{option} one is as for metric files. \texttt{mtxasetx} is
-probably only relevant for use with |\installrawfont| (see below).
-
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.912]
- |\installfontas|\arg{font-name}\\%
- \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{encoding}\arg{family}\arg{series}%
- \arg{shape}\arg{size}
-\end{decl}
-This install command adds an \fd entry for the \meta{font-name}, but
-it doesn't actually generate that font. Usually that font was
-generated by a previous |\installfont|, and this is used to create
-additional entries for the font.
-
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\installrawfont|\arg{font-name}\arg{metrics-list}\arg{etx-list}\\
- \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{encoding}\arg{family}\arg{series}%
- \arg{shape}\arg{size}
-\end{decl}
-This is similar to |\installfont| except that it produces
-a \TeX\ raw font as \pl file rather than a virtual font. Often a \pl
-font with the specified name will already exist when this command is
-called, and that will then be overwritten. These two \pl files will
-typically be somewhat different.
-The normal reason for using this command is that one wishes to
-``refine'' the metrics of a font that was generated by transformation
-commands.
-
-For example, to install an \texttt{8r}-encoded Times Roman raw font
-(using \texttt{8r.etx} and \texttt{8r.mtx}), you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \installrawfont{ptmr8r}{ptmr8r,8r}{8r}
- {8r}{ptm}{m}{n}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The effect of a
-\begin{decl*}[v1.923]
- \meta{filename}\verb*| mtxasetx|
-\end{decl*}
-in the \meta{etx-list} is not that \meta{filename}\texttt{.etx} is
-read, but that \meta{filename}\texttt{.mtx} is read. The
-interpretation of the commands in this file is however not the
-customary, and almost the only thing paid attention to is the
-correspondence between glyph names and slot numbers that is provided
-by the |\setrawglyph| and |\setscaledrawglyph| commands; this
-correspondence is treated as if it was given by |\setslot| \dots\
-|\endsetslot| commands in an \etx file. This is however only
-guaranteed to work with transformable metric files.
-
-The purpose of this feature is to simplify installation of fonts with
-very special encodings, such as ``Dingbat'' or ``Pi'' fonts. Instead
-of creating an \etx file, which would probably only be useful with
-that particular font, one can make use of the fact that the
-interesting information is anyway available in the \mtx file. To
-install Zapf Dingbats in their default encoding, one can thus say
-\begin{verbatim}
- \installrawfont{pzdr}{pzdr}{pzdr mtxasetx}
- {U}{pzd}{m}{n}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Unlike the case with |\installfont|, which actually creates a real
-(although virtual) font, |\installrawfont| can only create the
-metrics for a font. The \dvi driver will require some other kind of
-implementation of this font, usually an entry in some map file (e.g.
-\texttt{psfonts.map}, in the case of \dvips) that links the \TeX\ font
-name to e.g.\ a \PS\ font name and file. (Many \dvi drivers are
-configured in such a way that they, without such a map file entry,
-will call Metafont with the font name and thereby raise a sequence of
-error messages about a \setdotfilename{mf} that doesn't exist. These
-results are often rather confusing.)
-
-
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\installfamily|\arg{encoding}\arg{family}\arg{fd-commands}
-\end{decl}
-This tells \fontinst to write an \fd file for the given combination
-of encoding and family, and clears the internal list of entries to
-put in that file. |\installfamily| commands usually come first in each
-block of \meta{install commands}.
-
-For example, to produces a \LaTeX\ family with the \texttt{T1}-encoded
-Times family, you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \installfamily{T1}{ptm}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-The \m{fd-commands} are executed every time a font in that family is
-loaded, for example to stop the Courier font from being hyphenated you
-say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \installfamily{T1}{pcr}{\hyphenchar\font=-1}
-\end{verbatim}
-In more recent versions of \fontinst, the |\installfamily| command is
-only necessary if you want the \m{fd-commands} argument to be
-nonempty, but it doesn't hurt to make it explicit.
-
-\begin{hackernote}
- The \m{fd-commands} argument is tokenized with the current catcodes
- and written to file without expansion. In particular this means
- that spaces will be inserted after all control sequences whose
- names consists of letters, which can be unexpected if you intend to
- make use of control sequences whose names contain |@| characters.
-\end{hackernote}
-
-
-
-
-\subsection{Transformation commands}
-
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\transformfont|\arg{font-name}\arg{transformed font}
-\end{decl}
-This makes a raw transformed font, for example expanded, slanted,
-condensed or re-encoded. \emph{It is the responsibility of the device
- driver to implement this transform.} Each \verb|\transformfont|
-command writes out an \mtx file and a raw \pl file for \m{font-name}.
-
-The following commands are valid \m{transformed font}s:
-\begin{decl*}
- |\fromafm|\arg{afm}\\
- |\fromany|\arg{whatever}\\
- |\frompl|\arg{pl}\\
- |\fromplgivenetx|\marg{pl}\marg{etx}\\
- |\frommtx|\arg{mtx}
-\end{decl*}
-This reads the metrics of a font which is about to be transformed from
-an external file. |\fromafm|, |\frompl|, and |\fromplgivenetx| write out
-an \mtx file corresponding to the \afm or \pl file. In addition,
-|\formafm| also writes out a raw \pl file, containing just the glyph
-metrics but no kerning information. |\fromplgivenetx| permits
-specifying which encoding file to use when associating glyph names to
-slots, whereas |\frompl| tries to guess this from the
-\texttt{CODINGSCHEME} property of the \pl file. |\fromany| looks for
-a file in any of the formats (in the order \mtx, \pl, \afm) and
-behaves as the first |\from|\dots\ for which it found a file.
-
-A \m{transformed font} may also be one of the following:
-\begin{decl*}
- |\scalefont|\arg{integer expression}\arg{transformed font}\\
- |\xscalefont|\arg{integer expression}\arg{transformed font}\\
- |\yscalefont|\arg{integer expression}\arg{transformed font}\\
- |\slantfont|\arg{integer expression}\arg{transformed font}
-\end{decl*}
-This applies a geometric transformation to the font metrics of
-\m{transformed font}. The scale factor or slant factor are given in
-1000 units to the design size. Typical examples are 167 for slanted
-fonts or 850 for condensed fonts.
-
-The final case of a \m{transformed font} is:
-\begin{decl*}
- |\reencodefont|\arg{etx}\arg{transformed font}
-\end{decl*}
-This rearranges the encoding vector of \m{transformed font} to match
-the encoding given by the \etx file.
-
-
-For example, to create an oblique, |8r|-encoded version of Adobe Times
-called \texttt{ptmro8r} you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \transformfont{ptmro8r}{
- \reencodefont{8r}{
- \slantfont{167}{\fromafm{ptmr8a}}
- }
- }
-\end{verbatim}
-This will create \texttt{ptmr8a.mtx}, \texttt{ptmr8a.pl},
-\texttt{ptmro8r.mtx} and \texttt{ptmro8r.pl}, which can then be used
-as raw fonts in \verb|\installfont| commands. The equivalent
-transformation can also be achieved in two steps:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \transformfont{ptmr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmr8a}}}
- \transformfont{ptmro8r}{\slantfont{167}{\frommtx{ptmr8r}}}
-\end{verbatim}
-This will create \texttt{ptmr8a.mtx}, \texttt{ptmr8a.pl},
-\texttt{ptmr8r.mtx}, \texttt{ptmr8r.pl}, \texttt{ptmro8r.mtx} and
-\texttt{ptmro8r.pl}.
-
-You will have to inform your device driver about the transformed font,
-using the syntax appropriate for that driver. For example, in \dvips
-you add a line to \texttt{psfonts.map}:
-\begin{verbatim}
- ptmro8r Times-Roman ".167 SlantFont TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc
-\end{verbatim}
-See Section~\ref{Sec:Mapmaking} and
-Subsection~\ref{Ssec:MapFragments} for details on how to generate
-such lines automatically.
-
-
-\subsection{Reglyphing commands}
-
-``Reglyphing'' is an \mtx file transformation that changes glyph
-names but leaves the slot numbers and metrics as they were;
-optionally it may drop some of the metric commands. See
-Subsection~\ref{Ssec:Des:Reglyph} for an introduction to this.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\reglyphfonts|\\
- |\endreglyphfonts|
-\end{decl}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\reglyphfont|\marg{destination font}\marg{source font}
-\end{decl}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\renameglyph|\marg{to}\marg{from}\\
- |\renameglyphweighted|\marg{to}\marg{from}\marg{weight}\\
- |\killglyph|\marg{glyph}\\
- |\killglyphweighted|\marg{glyph}\marg{weight}
-\end{decl}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\offmtxcommand|\marg{command}\\
- |\onmtxcommand|\marg{command}
-\end{decl}
-
-
-
-
-\subsection{Miscellaneous settings}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\substitutesilent|\arg{to}\arg{from}\\
- |\substitutenoisy|\arg{to}\arg{from}
-\end{decl}
-This declares a \LaTeX\ font substitution, that the series or shape
-\m{to} should be substituted if necessary by the series or shape
-\m{from}. \verb|\substitutesilent| means that when the font
-substitution is made, no warning will given.
-
-\verb|\substitutenoisy| is the same as \verb|\substitutesilent|, but
-gives a warning when the substitution is made by \LaTeX.
-
-For example, to say that the series |bx| can be replaced by the
-series |b|, you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \substitutesilent{bx}{b}
-\end{verbatim}
-To say that the shape |ui| can be replaced by the shape |i|, you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \substitutenoisy{ui}{it}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The following weight substitutions are standard:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \substitutesilent{bx}{b}
- \substitutesilent{b}{bx}
- \substitutesilent{b}{sb}
- \substitutesilent{b}{db}
- \substitutesilent{m}{mb}
- \substitutesilent{m}{l}
-\end{verbatim}
-The following shape substitutions are standard:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \substitutenoisy{ui}{it}
- \substitutesilent{it}{sl}
- \substitutesilent{sl}{it}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The |\installfontas| command should be considered as an
-alternative to using font substitution, as it gives much finer
-control over what \fd entries will be made.
-
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\declaresize|\arg{size}\arg{fd-size-range}
-\end{decl}
-This declares a new size, and gives the \fd size specifications for
-it. For example, \url{fontinst.sty} declares the following sizes:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \declaresize{}{<<->>}
- \declaresize{5}{<<5>>}
- \declaresize{6}{<<6>>}
- \declaresize{7}{<<7>>}
- \declaresize{8}{<<8>>}
- \declaresize{9}{<<9>>}
- \declaresize{10}{<<10>>}
- \declaresize{11}{<<10.95>>}
- \declaresize{12}{<<12>>}
- \declaresize{14}{<<14.4>>}
- \declaresize{17}{<<17.28>>}
- \declaresize{20}{<<20.74>>}
- \declaresize{25}{<<24.88>>}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\declareencoding|\arg{string}\arg{etx}
-\end{decl}
-This declares which \etx file corresponds to which \texttt{codingscheme}
-string. For example, \url{fontinst.sty} declares the following
-encoding strings:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \declareencoding{TEX TEXT}{ot1}
- \declareencoding{TEX TEXT WITHOUT F-LIGATURES}{ot1}
- \declareencoding{TEX TYPEWRITER TEXT}{ot1tt}
- \declareencoding{TEX MATH ITALIC}{oml}
- \declareencoding{TEX MATH SYMBOLS}{oms}
- \declareencoding{TEX MATH EXTENSION}{omx}
- \declareencoding{EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN}{t1}
- \declareencoding{TEX TEXT COMPANION SYMBOLS 1---TS1}{ts1}
- \declareencoding{TEXBASE1ENCODING}{8r}
- \declareencoding{TEX TYPEWRITER AND WINDOWS ANSI}{8y}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-
-
-
-\subsection{Other}
-
-The following commands also belong to this section, but there is
-currently no description of them here.
-
-
-|\afmtomtx|\marg{afmfile}\marg{mtxfile}
-
-|\endrecordtransforms|
-
-|\etxtopl|\marg{encoding list}\marg{plfile}
-
-|\etxtovpl|\marg{encoding list}\marg{vplfile}
-
-|\fakenarrow|\marg{width factor}
-
-|\generalpltomtx|\marg{plfile}\marg{mtxfile}\marg{plsuffix}\marg{opt-enc}
-
-|\latinfamily|\marg{family}\marg{commands}
-
-|\mtxtomtx|\marg{source MTX}\marg{destination MTX}
-
-|\mtxtopl|\marg{mtxfile}\marg{plfile}
-
-|\NOFILES|
-
-|\recordtransforms|\marg{filename}
-
-
-
-
-\section{Mapmaking commands}
-\label{Sec:Mapmaking}
-
-The commands described in this section are for use with command files
-that input \texttt{finstmsc.sty}.
-
-
-\subsection{Mapfile command reference}
-
-For an introduction to making map file entries, see
-Subsection~\ref{Ssec:MapFragments}.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\adddriver|\marg{driver name}\marg{fragment file name}
-\end{decl}
-This opens the file \meta{fragment file name} for writing mapfile
-entries to. The \meta{driver name} selects the format of these
-entries.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\makemapentry|\marg{\TeX\ font name}
-\end{decl}
-This causes a mapfile entry for the specified font to be written to
-all files currently open for receiving mapfile entries. These
-commands are usually automatically generated by \fontinst.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\donedrivers|
-\end{decl}
-This closes all files open for receiving mapfile entries.
-
-
-\subsection{Drivers}
-
-The \meta{driver name}s that may be used with |\adddriver| are:
-
-\begin{decl}
- |dvips|
-\end{decl}
-The \dvips driver. The mapfiles generated are useful also with pdf\TeX.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |dvipdfm|
-\end{decl}
-The \setpackagename{dvipdfm} \dvi-to-\pdf driver. Not much tested,
-but appears to work.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.915]
- |pltotf|
-\end{decl}
-Not really a \dvi driver. The file that is generated is a shell
-script of \texttt{pltotf} commands for converting precisely those \pl
-files which are needed to \tfm files (\fontinst generally generates
-also a bunch of \pl files that in the end turn out to be
-unnecessary). The \texttt{TFMfileprefix} variable can be used to
-specify a path to the directory where these files should be placed.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |debug|
-\end{decl}
-Not a \dvi driver either, but for each base font a report on the
-information that was available. Useful if you need to write the
-driver file yourself.
-
-
-\subsection{Configuration commands}
-
-The following commands configure the generation of mapfile entries,
-mostly with respect to how various pieces of information are deduced
-from other pieces.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\AssumeAMSBSYY|\\
- |\AssumeBaKoMa|\\
- |\AssumeLWFN|\\
- |\AssumeMetafont|
-\end{decl}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\declarepsencoding|\marg{etx}\marg{postscript name}\marg{action}
-\end{decl}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\specifypsfont|\marg{PS font name}\marg{actions}
-\end{decl}
-
-
-An \meta{action} is one of
-\begin{decl*}[v1.928]
- |\download|\marg{file}\\
- |\fulldownload|\marg{file}
-\end{decl*}
-where \meta{file} is a file to download (`download' typically means
-``include in the generated \PS output or equivalent''). The difference
-between |\download| and |\fulldownload| have to do with how partial
-downloading (subsetting) of fonts should be handled. |\download| means
-use the driver's defaults (often settable via command line options)
-for this. |\fulldownload| means don't subset: always include the full
-font, if \fontinst knows how to express this in a map file entry for
-this particular driver.
-
-Additional actions could be added in the future, if there is a need
-for them.
-
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\storemapdata|\marg{\TeX\ font name}\marg{source}\marg{transforms}
-\end{decl}
-This records information about how the font named \meta{\TeX\ font
-name} was generated. Such commands are usually found in the file of
-recorded transforms. If a font is encountered for which no
-information has been stored, then the corresponding \mtx file will be
-sourced, looking for a |\storemapdata| command there.
-
-A \meta{source} is one of
-\begin{decl*}
- |\fromafm|\marg{AFM name}\marg{PS name}\\
- |\frompl|\marg{PL name}\\
- |\frommtx|\marg{MTX name}\\
- |\fromvpl|
-\end{decl*}
-Note that several of them have a different syntax and meaning than
-they do in fontmaking command files.
-
-A \meta{transform} is one of
-\begin{decl*}
- |\reencodefont|\marg{etx}\\
- |\reglyphfont|\\
- |\transformfont|\marg{x-scale}\marg{slant-scale}
-\end{decl*}
-Note that all of these have a different meaning than they do in
-fontmaking command files.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\debugvalue|\arg{name}
-\end{decl}
-This adds a value to the list of those that are reported by the
-\texttt{debug} driver. Example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \debugvalue{PS_font_file}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-
-\subsection{Basic conversion commands}
-
-Some of the basic ``convert an $X$ file to a $Y$ file'' commands in
-\fontinst are not useful as part of a fontmaking run, and are
-available only in \texttt{finstmsc.sty} to conserve some memory.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\enctoetx|\marg{encfile}\marg{etxfile}
-\end{decl}
-This reads the file \meta{encfile}\texttt{.enc} which should be
-simple \PS code defining a \PS encoding vector and generates a
-corresponding rudimentary \fontinst encoding file
-\meta{etxfile}\texttt{.etx}. It's a basic ``import encoding to
-\fontinst'' command.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.911]
- |\etxtoenc|\marg{etxfiles}\marg{encfile}
-\end{decl}
-This does the opposite of |\enctoetx|; the information in the \etx
-files that is converted is the correspondence between slots and glyph
-names.
-\NEWfeature{v1.927}
-The \meta{etxfiles} argument is a comma-separated list of encoding
-files which are superimposed to generate the \PS encoding. The first
-|\setslot| for a particular slot is the one which decides which glyph
-will be placed there.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.928]
- |\etxtocmap|\marg{etxfile}\marg{cmapfile}
-\end{decl}
-This reads an \etx file and generates a corresponding ToUnicode CMap
-file; the information that is converted is the map from slot numbers
-to |\Unicode| code points.
-
-
-
-
-\section{General commands}
-
-
-
-This section describes commands and mechanisms that are the same in
-all file types. Commands that are particular for one type of file are
-described in subsequent sections.
-
-
-\subsection{Variables}
-
-Many (but not all) of the activities \fontinst perform can be
-understood as either ``setting variables'' or ``formatting and writing
-to file data stored in some variable''. The accessing of variables is
-an important aspect of how \fontinst works.
-
-Variables come in different types and variables of different types
-live in different namespaces; |\int{foo}|, |\str{foo}|, and
-|\dim{foo}| refer to three different variables which are all named
-|foo|. Variables are either set or not set. Unless the contrary is
-stated explicitly, variables default to not being set. It is an error
-to access the value of a variable that has not been set. \Fontinst
-variable assignments are as a rule local, i.e., will be undone when
-the enclosing \TeX\ group is ended. Most command file commands that
-cause files to be read will begin a group before reading the file(s)
-and end the group at some point after having read them.
-
-Taking string variables as an example, there are three commands for
-changing a string variable:
-\begin{decl*}
- |\setstr|\arg{name}\arg{string expression}\\
- |\resetstr|\arg{name}\arg{string expression}\\
- |\unsetstr|\arg{name}
-\end{decl*}
-The |\resetstr| command unconditionally sets the string variable
-\meta{name} to the full expansion of the \meta{string expression}.
-The |\unsetstr| command unconditionally renders the string variable
-\meta{name} unset. If the the string variable \meta{name} is
-currently unset then the |\setstr| command will set it to the full
-expansion of the \meta{string expression}, but if it already is set
-then |\setstr| does nothing.
-
-This pattern with three commands, one |\set|\dots\ which only sets
-unset variables, one |\reset|\dots\ which sets variables regardless of
-whether they have been set or not, and one |\unset|\dots\ which unsets
-variables is recurring in \fontinst. Variables are most commonly set
-using some |\set|\dots\ command; this has the effect that the first
-command to try to set a variable is the one which actually sets it.
-
-If |\set|\dots\ is the command for setting the value of a variable,
-the command for getting that value has the same name without the
-|set| part, e.g., |\setint|--|\int|, |\setkern|--|\kern|, etc. There
-are typically also conditionals for testing whether variables are
-set, and these take the form |\ifis|\dots\arg{name}|\then|.
-
-
-The following commands for changing the value of a variable can be
-used anywhere:
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\setdim|\arg{dim}\arg{dimension}\\
- |\setint|\arg{int}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\setstr|\arg{str}\arg{string expression}
-\end{decl}
-If the dimension variable \m{dim} is currently undefined, it is
-defined to be the current value of \m{dimension}.
-
-If the integer variable \m{int} is currently undefined, it is
-defined to be the current value of \m{integer expression}.
-
-If the string variable \m{str} is currently undefined, it is
-defined to be the current value of \m{string expression}.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\setcommand|\arg{command}\meta{parameter text}\arg{replacement text}
-\end{decl}
-If the command \m{command} is currently undefined, it is defined to
-grab parameters as specified by the \meta{parameter text} and then
-expand to the \m{replacement text}. This uses the same syntax for
-parameters as the \TeX\ \verb|\def| command.
-\begin{center}
- \begin{tabular}{r l}
- No. parameters& \meta{parameter text}\\
- 0& (empty)\\
- 1& |#1|\\
- 2& |#1#2|\\
- 3& |#1#2#3|\\
- \multicolumn{2}{c}{and so on.}
- \end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-Some examples:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setcommand\lc#1#2{#2}
- \setcommand\lc#1#2{#1small}
-\end{verbatim}
-With the first definition, |\lc{A}{a}| expands to |a|, but with the
-second it expands to |Asmall|.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\resetdim|\arg{dim}\arg{dimension}\\
- |\resetint|\arg{int}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\resetstr|\arg{str}\arg{string expression}
-\end{decl}
-The dimension variable \m{dim} is defined to be the current value
-of \m{dimension}.
-
-The integer variable \m{int} is defined to be the current value of
-\m{integer expression}.
-
-The string variable \m{str} is defined to be the current value of
-the \m{string expression}. (|\resetstr| mostly boils down to a \TeX\
-|\edef| command.)
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\resetcommand|\arg{command}\meta{parameter text}\arg{replacement text}
-\end{decl}
-The command \m{command} is defined to grab parameters as specified by
-the \meta{parameter text} and then expand to the \m{replacement text}.
-This is a synonym for the \TeX\ \verb|\def| command.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\unsetdim|\arg{dim}\\
- |\unsetint|\arg{int}\\
- |\unsetstr|\arg{str}\\
- |\unsetcommand|\arg{command}
-\end{decl}
-Makes \m{dim}, \m{int}, \m{str}, or \m{command} an undefined
-dimension, integer, string or command.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.900]
- |\offcommand|\marg{command}\\
- |\oncommand|\marg{command}
-\end{decl}
-|\offcommand| turns off a command, i.e., it redefines it to do
-nothing (while still taking the same number of arguments).
-|\oncommand| turns a command back on, i.e., it restores the
-definition the command had before a previous |\offcommand|. Using
-|\offcommand| on a command that is already off or |\oncommand| on a
-command that is not off has no effect.
-
-
-\subsection{Argument types}
-
-There are roughly six types of arguments that \fontinst
-commands can take. These are
-\begin{itemize}
- \item integer expressions,
- \item string expressions,
- \item comma-separated lists of string expressions,
- \item dimensions,
- \item commands (i.e., \TeX\ control sequences), and
- \item other (pretty much ``none of the above'').
-\end{itemize}
-Integer expressions are explained in Subsection~\ref{Sec:integer}
-below.
-
-The most common form of a string expression is simply a sequence of
-character tokens, but any balanced text which expands to such a
-sequence of tokens is legal. Several of the standard \etx files use
-macros in string expressions to make glyph names to some extent
-configurable. Besides such custom macros, the following \fontinst
-commands may be used to access variable values inside a string
-expression
-\begin{decl*}
- |\strint|\arg{int}\\
- |\str|\arg{str}\\
- |\dim|\arg{dim}
-\end{decl*}
-Incidentally, these \m{int}, \m{str}, and \m{dim} are themselves
-string expressions (for the names of integer, string, and dimen
-respectively variables).
-
-Dimensions are simply \TeX\ \meta{dimen}s; their use is rather
-limited. \Fontinst does not provide for any sort of ``dimen
-expressions''. Most actual lengths are expressed as integer
-expressions, in \afm units ($1/1000$ of the font size).
-
-Common to integer expressions, string expressions, and
-dimensions is that these argument types get expanded during
-evaluation (in the case of string expressions, this expansion
-\emph{is} the evaluation), which means one can use macros in
-arguments of these types. Command arguments do not get
-expanded---they are mainly used with commands that modify the
-definitions of other commands.
-
-Comma-separated lists of string expressions are first split at commas
-(without prior expansion) and each element is then treated as a
-string expression (i.e., \emph{gets expanded}). (As remarked elsewhere,
-the \meta{metrics-list} argument of |\installfont| is not properly a
-comma-separated list of string expressions, even though it may look
-like one.)
-As for the ``other'' arguments one cannot give any rules: they
-might get expanded, but it could also happen that they won't.
-
-
-
-\subsection{Integer expressions}
-\label{Sec:integer}
-
-The \emph{integer expressions} provide a user-friendly syntax for
-\TeX\ arithmetic. They are used to manipulate any integers,
-including glyph dimensions, which are given in \afm units, that is
-1000 to the design size. \TeX\ \pl fonts have their dimensions
-converted to \afm units automatically.
-
-The \emph{integer expressions} are:
-
-\begin{decl}
- \m{number}
-\end{decl}
-Returns the value of a \TeX\ \m{number} (as explained in
-\emph{The \TeX book}). Typical examples of this kind of integer
-expression are |0|, |1000|, |538|, |-20|, etc.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\int|\arg{int}
-\end{decl}
-Returns the value of the integer variable \m{int}.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\width|\arg{glyph}\\
- |\height|\arg{glyph}\\
- |\depth|\arg{glyph}\\
- |\italic|\arg{glyph}
-\end{decl}
-Returns the width, height, depth, or italic correction of the glyph
-variable \m{glyph}.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\kerning|\arg{left}\arg{right}
-\end{decl}
-Returns the kerning between the \m{left} and \m{right} glyphs. Unlike
-other types of variable accesses, where it is an error to access
-something that has not been explicitly set, this command returns |0|
-if no kern has been set between the two glyphs.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\neg|\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\add|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\sub|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\max|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\min|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\mul|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\div|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\scale|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\half|\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\otherhalf|\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-|\neg| returns the negation of the \m{integer expression}.
-
-|\ad| returns the sum of the two \m{integer expression}s.
-
-|\sub| returns the first \m{integer expression} minus the second.
-
-|\max| returns the maximum of the two \m{integer expression}s.
-
-|\min| returns the minimum of the two \m{integer expression}s.
-
-|\mul| returns the product of the two \m{integer expression}s.
-
-|\div| returns the first \m{integer expression} divided by the second.
-
-|\scale| returns the first \m{integer expression} times the second,
-divided by 1000. |\scale| does better rounding than the corresponding
-combination of |\mul| and |\div|.
-
-|\half| returns half the \m{integer expression}. It does better
-rounding than |\scale|\arg{integer expression}|{500}| or
-|\div|\arg{integer expression}|{2}|.
-
-|\otherhalf| returns the ``other half'' of the \m{integer
-expression}, i.e., the sum of |\half| something and |\otherhalf| the
-same thing is that thing back.
-
-
-\subsection{Conditionals and loops}
-
-\Fontinst has a rather extensive family of conditionals (|\if|s), and
-as of late also some convenient loop commands. The most common forms
-of a \fontinst conditional are
-\begin{decl*}
- |\if|\dots \meta{argument(s)}|\then| \meta{then branch} |\Fi|\\
- |\if|\dots \meta{argument(s)}|\then| \meta{then branch} |\Else|
- \meta{else branch} |\Fi|
-\end{decl*}
-i.e., \fontinst uses Plain\TeX\ style conditionals rather than \LaTeX\
-style conditionals. Every |\if|\dots\ command can be thought of as
-testing some condition. If the condition is true then the \meta{then
-branch} will be executed, but not the \meta{else branch} (if there is
-one). If the condition is false then the \meta{then branch} will nor be
-executed, but if there is an \meta{else branch} then that will be
-executed. Conditionals may be nested (i.e., occur in the then or else
-branch).
-
-\begin{hackernote}
- The |\then| is not just syntactic sugar, but a functional part of
- those conditionals which take arguments. Its purpose is to look
- like an |\if| to \TeX\ when the conditional occurs in a skipped
- branch of another conditional.
-\end{hackernote}
-
-The most common conditionals are those which test if a variable is set.
-\begin{decl*}
- |\ifisint|\arg{int}|\then|\\
- |\ifisdim|\arg{dim}|\then|\\
- |\ifisstr|\arg{str}|\then|\\
- |\ifiscommand|\arg{command}|\then|
-\end{decl*}
-These cause the following \meta{then branch} to be executed if the
-specified variable is set, and the \meta{else branch} to be executed
-if the variable is not set. The \meta{int}, \meta{dim}, and
-\meta{str} are string expressions for the names of an integer,
-dimension, and string respectively variable. The \meta{command} is
-the actual control sequence (command variable) that should be tested.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\ifisglyph|\arg{glyph}|\then|
-\end{decl}
-This similarly tests if a glyph (also a variable of a kind) is set in
-the current glyph base. The glyph name \meta{glyph} is a string
-expression.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.917]
- |\ifareglyphs|\marg{glyph list}|\then|
-\end{decl}
-This command tests whether all the glyphs in the \meta{glyph list}
-(a comma-separated list of string expressions) are set in the current
-glyph base. If one of the glyphs is not set then condition is false.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.900]
- |\ifnumber|\marg{integer expression}\meta{rel}%
- \marg{integer expression}|\then|
-\end{decl}
-The \meta{rel} is one of \texttt{<}, \texttt{=}, and \texttt{>}.
-This command evaluates the two \meta{integer expression}s and
-then tests whether the specified relation holds between their values.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.900]
- |\ifiskern|\marg{glyph1}\marg{glyph2}|\then|
-\end{decl}
-This tests whether a kern has been set with \meta{glyph1} on the left
-and \meta{glyph2} on the right (both arguments are string
-expressions). This is almost the negation of
-\begin{verbatim}
- \ifnumber{\kerning{<glyph1>}{<glyph2>}}={0}\then
-\end{verbatim}
-but |\ifiskern| can distinguish the case that an zero kern has been
-set (true) from the case that no such kern has been set (false),
-which |\kerning| can not. It is however unlikely that this
-distinction would ever be of use in a practical situation.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.924]
- |\ifoption|\marg{string}|\then|
-\end{decl}
-Test whether \meta{string} (a string expression) is among the current
-list of options. This list is by default empty, elements are added
-using |option| modifiers (cf.~the description of |\installfont|), and
-the list is cleared for each new file for which one can specify
-options.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.909]
- |\Else|
- |\Fi|
-\end{decl}
-For \fontinst, these two control sequences are precisely the same as
-the \TeX\ primitives |\else| and |\fi|, but things are a bit more
-complicated in \fontdoc. The mechanism in \fontdoc\ that allows it to
-present both branches of the conditional in the typeset output
-requires that |\Else| and |\Fi| generate typeset output. See also the
-|\showbranches| \fontdoc command.
-
-\begin{hackernote}
- Before |\Else| and |\Fi| were introduced, the \TeX\ primitives
- |\else| and |\fi| were used instead for \fontinst conditionals.
- Back then, \fontdoc defined all conditionals to expand to |\iftrue|.
-
- It used to be the case that all conditionals would be fully
- expandable (which in particular would have made it possible to use
- them in string expressions), but that is no longer the case.
-\end{hackernote}
-
-
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.901]
- |\for|\parg{name}\marg{start}\marg{stop}\marg{step}
- \meta{body} |\endfor|\parg{name}
-\end{decl}
-will cause the \meta{body} code to be repeated some number of times.
-How many depends on the values of \meta{start}, \meta{stop}, and
-\meta{step}, which are integer expressions.
-
-As a precaution, the \meta{body} is not allowed to contain any
-empty lines (|\par| tokens). If you want to have the visual
-separation (for sakes of legibility or otherwise), put a |%|
-somewhere on the line---that makes it nonempty.
-
-\meta{name} is used as the name of an integer variable. This
-variable gets reset to the value of \meta{start} before the first
-repetition of \meta{body code}. After each repetition but the last,
-it is incremented by \meta{step}. \meta{body} gets repeated if
-the value of \meta{name} has not gotten past that of \meta{stop}. To
-get past means to be bigger if \meta{step} is positive and to be
-smaller if \meta{step} is negative. In the case that \meta{step} is
-zero, the entire construction above will be equivalent to
-\begin{quote}
- |\resetint|\marg{name}\marg{start}\\
- \meta{body}
-\end{quote}
-
-|\for| \textellipsis\ |\endfor| constructions can be nested.
-\meta{name} is used by |\for| to identify its matching |\endfor|, so
-they need to be identical in |\for| and |\endfor|. \textbf{Note} that
-the delimiters around the \meta{name} are parentheses, not braces.
-
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.901]
- |\foreach|\parg{name}\marg{csep-list}
- \meta{body} |\endfor|\parg{name}
-\end{decl}
-will cause the \meta{body} code to be repeated one time for each item
-in the \meta{csep-list}. \meta{csep-list} is a comma-separated list
-of string expressions.
-
-As a precaution, the \meta{body} is not allowed to contain any
-empty lines (|\par| tokens). If you want to have the visual
-separation (for sakes of legibility or otherwise), put a |%|
-somewhere on the line---that makes it nonempty.
-
-\meta{name} is used as the name of a string variable. Before each
-repetition of the \meta{body code}, this variable will get reset to
-the next item in the \meta{csep-list}.
-
-|\foreach|\textellipsis\ |\endfor| constructions can be nested.
-\meta{name} is used by |\foreach| to identify its matching |\endfor|,
-so they need to be identical in |\foreach| and |\endfor|.
-\textbf{Note} that the delimiters around the \meta{name} are
-parentheses, not braces.
-
-
-
-\subsection{Other general commands}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\needsfontinstversion|\arg{version}
-\end{decl}
-This issues a warning if the current version of the \fontinst
-package is less than \m{version}.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\needsTeXextension|\marg{extension tests}\marg{who}\\
- |\eTeX|\marg{version number}\\
- |\pdfTeX|\marg{version number}\marg{revision}
-\end{decl}
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.915]
- |\fontinstcc|\\
- |\normalcc|
-\end{decl}
-|\fontinstcc| switches to the catcodes used in e.g.\@
-\texttt{fontinst.sty}: |_| and |@| are letters, space and newline are
-ignored, and |~| is a space. |\normalcc| switches back to normal
-catcodes.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.900]
- |\begincomment| \meta{text} |\endcomment|
-\end{decl}
-This hides the \meta{text} from \fontinst processing, but allows it
-to show up when the file is typeset with \fontdoc.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.906]
- |\fontinsterror|\marg{subsystem}\marg{error}\marg{help}\\
- |\fontinstwarning|\marg{subsystem}\marg{warning}\\
- |\fontinstwarningnoline|\marg{subsystem}\marg{warning}\\
- |\fontinstinfo|\marg{subsystem}\marg{info}
-\end{decl}
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.906]
- |\messagebreak|
-\end{decl}
-
-
-Finally, there are two Plain\TeX\ commands which should be mentioned:
-\begin{decl*}
- |\input| \meta{file name}\\
- |\bye|
-\end{decl*}
-
-
-
-
-
-\section{Encoding files}
-
-An \emph{encoding file} (or \texttt{.etx} file) is a \TeX\ document
-with the structure:
-\begin{quote}
- |\relax|\\
- \meta{ignored material}\\
- |\encoding|\\
- \meta{encoding commands}\\
- |\endencoding|\\
- \meta{ignored material}
-\end{quote}
-This describes the encoding of a font, using the \m{encoding commands}.
-
-Since the encoding file ignores any material between \verb|\relax| and
-\verb|\encoding|, an \emph{encoding file} can also be a \LaTeX\
-document. The structure is then
-\begin{quote}
- |\relax|\\
- |\documentclass{article} %| Or some other class\\
- |\usepackage{fontdoc}|\\
- \meta{\LaTeX\ preamble}\\
- |\begin{document}|\\
- \meta{\LaTeX\ text}\\
- |\encoding|\\
- \m{encoding commands}\\
- |\endencoding|\\
- \meta{\LaTeX\ text}\\
- |\end{document}|
-\end{quote}
-
-
-See also the descriptions in \emph{Writing ETX format font encoding
-specifications} (\texttt{encspecs.tex}).
-
-
-\subsection{Encoding commands}
-
-The \m{encoding commands} are:
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\nextslot|\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-Sets the number of the next slot. If there is no \verb|\nextslot|
-command, the number is the successor of the previous slot.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.8]
- |\skipslots|\arg{integer expressions}
-\end{decl}
-Advances the number of the next slot.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\setslot|\arg{glyph} \m{slot commands} |\endsetslot|
-\end{decl}
-Assigns \m{glyph} to the current slot. The \m{slot commands} can be
-used to specify additional behaviour for the slot, and typically also
-contains comments about the glyph.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.9]
- |\setleftboundary|\marg{glyph} \m{slot commands}
- |\endsetleftboundary|
-\end{decl}
-Makes the beginning of a word (left boundary) behave like the right
-side of \m{glyph} with respect to kerning. |\ligature| commands in
-the \meta{slot commands} create beginning of word ligatures.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.9]
- |\setrightboundary|\marg{glyph}
-\end{decl}
-Makes the end of a word (right boundary) behave like the left
-side of \m{glyph} with respect to kerning and ligatures. The current
-slot position is left empty.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\inputetx|\arg{file}
-\end{decl}
-Inputs the \m{encoding commands} of \m{file}\texttt{.etx}.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.917]
- |\setfontdimen|\marg{fontdimen no.}\marg{integer variable}
-\end{decl}
-Sets up a correspondence between a font dimension and an integer
-variable. When generating a font, the font dimension value is taken
-from the integer variable. When converting a font from \pl or \vpl
-format, the fontdimen value will be recorded as a |\setint| command
-for the variable.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.924]
- |\ifdirect|
-\end{decl}
-Encoding files set up a correspondence between slot numbers and glyph
-names, which can be used in two different ways. In the \emph{direct}
-mode, encoding files map slot numbers to glyph names. In the
-\emph{inverse} mode, glyph names are mapped to slot numbers. The
-inverse mapping can in general be one-to-many, and when precisely one
-target slot is needed \fontinst chooses that arbitrarily. The |\ifdirect|
-conditional can be used to disambiguate the inverse mapping, by
-conditionalising all undesired |\setslot|s on that the file is being
-interpreted in the direct mode.
-
-Currently the only case in which encoding files are being read in
-the inverse mode is when reencoding fonts.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.8]
- |\setslotcomment|\marg{text}\\
- |\resetslotcomment|\marg{text}\\
- |\unsetslotcomment|
-\end{decl}
-These commands can be used to specify an automatic |\comment| text
-for all slots. They are ignored by \fontinst, but interpreted by
-\fontdoc.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.8]
- |\useexamplefont|\marg{font}
-\end{decl}
-This command is ignored by \fontinst. In \fontdoc it sets the font
-that is used by the |\slotexample| command. The \meta{font} argument
-has the same syntax for a font as the \TeX\ primitive |\font|.
-
-
-
-
-\subsection{Slot commands}
-
-The \m{slot commands} are:
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\comment|\arg{text}
-\end{decl}
-A comment, which is ignored by \fontinst, but typeset as a separate
-paragraph by \fontdoc.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.917]
- |\label|\arg{text}
-\end{decl}
-A reference label, which records the slot number and glyph name.
-Ignored by \fontinst.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\ligature|\arg{ligtype}\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}
-\end{decl}
-|\ligature| declares a ligature of type \m{ligtype} from the current
-glyph followed by the first glyph to the second glyph. The \m{ligtype}s
-are as in \vpl files (see the \texttt{vptovf} Web source for more
-details). For example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setslot{ff}
- \ligature{LIG}{i}{ffi}
- \ligature{LIG}{l}{ffl}
- \comment{The `ff' ligature.}
- \endsetslot
-\end{verbatim}
-\begin{decl*}[v1.918]
- |\Ligature|\arg{ligtype}\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\\
- |\oddligature|\marg{note}\arg{ligtype}\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}
-\end{decl*}
-The |\Ligature| command is by default a synonym of |\ligature| (but
-\fontdoc may typeset them differently). The |\oddligature| command is
-by default ignored by \fontinst. See \setfilename{encspecs.tex} for
-an explanation of the semantic differences.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\makerightboundary|\arg{glyph}
-\end{decl}
-This makes the current slot the end of word (right boundary) marker
-with respect to ligatures and kerning, i.e., \TeX\ will kern and
-ligature as if there was an invisible occurrence of this character
-after the last character of every word. All kerns and ligatures with
-\meta{glyph} as the right part will apply for this slot.
-
-It is preferable to use |\setrightboundary| to control end of word
-behaviour if you have an empty slot to spare.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\Unicode|\marg{code point}\marg{name}\\
- |\charseq|\marg{\cs{Unicode} commands}
-\end{decl}
-These commands declare a Unicode character or character sequence as
-possible interpretations of what is in this slot. They are ignored
-when making fonts, but \fontdoc give them a prominent role in
-encoding specifications and to |\etxtocmap| they are the primary
-properties of the slot.
-
-\begin{decl}[Obsolete?!]
- |\usedas|\arg{type}\arg{control sequence}
-\end{decl}
-This command declares a \TeX\ control sequence for this slot, with
-the \emph{type} taken from:
-\begin{verbatim}
- char accent mathord
- mathbin mathrel mathopen
- mathclose mathpunct mathvariable
- mathaccent mathdelim
-\end{verbatim}
-There is currently no code in \fontinst which makes any use of this
-command.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\nextlarger|\arg{glyph}
-\end{decl}
-Sets a \textsc{nextlarger} entry from the current slot to the
-\m{glyph}.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\varchar|
- \m{varchar commands}
- |\endvarchar|
-\end{decl}
-Sets a \textsc{varchar} entry for the current slot, using the
-\m{varchar commands}. The \m{varchar commands} are:
-\begin{decl}
- |\vartop|\arg{glyph}\\
- |\varmid|\arg{glyph}\\
- |\varbot|\arg{glyph}\\
- |\varrep|\arg{glyph}
-\end{decl}
-Sets the top, middle, bottom, or repeated \m{glyph} of the
-\textsc{varchar}.
-
-
-\subsection{Other}
-
-The following commands belong to this section, but there is currently
-no description of them here.
-
-|\ifisinslot|\marg{glyph}\marg{slot}|\then|
-
-
-
-
-\section{Metric files}
-\label{Sec:Metric}
-
-
-A \emph{metric file} (or \mtx file) is a \TeX\ document with the
-structure:
-\begin{quote}
- |\relax|\\
- \emph{ignored material}\\
- |\metrics|\\
- \m{metric commands}\\
- |\endmetrics|\\
- \emph{ignored material}
-\end{quote}
-This describes the glyphs in a font, using the \m{metric commands}.
-Like encoding files, metric files can simultaneously be \LaTeX\
-documents.
-
-Metric files are usually either \emph{hand-crafted} or
-\emph{transformable}. The transformable metric files typically encode
-the metrics of one particular font and are automatically generated.
-Hand-crafted metric files (such as \setfilename{latin.mtx}) typically
-do not contain much explicit metric data, instead the code there makes
-use of metrics previously specified by other files to construct new
-glyphs or adjust metrics to meet special conditions. Whereas
-transformable metric files tend to be mere lists of metric data, the
-hand-crafted metric files are more like programs.
-
-
-\subsection{Metric commands}
-
-The \m{metric commands} are as follows. All glyph name arguments are
-string expressions.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\setglyph|\arg{name} \m{glyph commands} |\endsetglyph|
-\end{decl}
-If the glyph called \m{name} is undefined, it is built using the
-\m{glyph commands} given below, for example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setglyph{IJ}
- \glyph{I}{1000}
- \glyph{J}{1000}
- \endsetglyph
- \setglyph{Asmall}
- \glyph{A}{850}
- \endsetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-The \meta{glyph commands} are not executed if the glyph has already
-been set.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\resetglyph|\arg{name}
- \m{glyph commands}
- |\endresetglyph|
-\end{decl}
-Gives the definition of the glyph called \m{name} using the
-\m{glyph commands}.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\unsetglyph|\arg{name}
-\end{decl}
-Makes the glyph called \m{name} undefined.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\setrawglyph|\arg{name}\arg{font}\arg{dimen}\arg{slot}\\
- \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{width}\arg{height}\arg{depth}\arg{italic
- correction}\\
- |\setscaledrawglyph|%
- \arg{name}\arg{font}\arg{dimen}\arg{scale}\arg{slot}\\
- \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{width}\arg{height}\arg{depth}\arg{italic
- correction}
-\end{decl}
-This sets a glyph called \m{name} from the \m{font}, which has the
-given design size, slot, width, height, depth and italic correction.
-The \meta{scale} is a scaling factor which has been applied to the
-font to give it the specified metrics. These commands will usually be
-generated automatically from an \afm or \pl file.
-
-If the integer variable \texttt{rawscale} is set, another scaling by
-that amount will be applied to the glyph.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\setnotglyph|\arg{name}\arg{font}\arg{dimen}\arg{slot}\\
- \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{width}\arg{height}\arg{depth}\arg{italic
- correction}\\
- |\setscalednotglyph|%
- \arg{name}\arg{font}\arg{dimen}\arg{scale}\arg{slot}\\
- \hspace*{1.5em}\arg{width}\arg{height}\arg{depth}\arg{italic
- correction}
-\end{decl}
-These sets a glyph called \m{name}\texttt{-not}, which is present in
-the \m{font}, but is not in the default encoding. They take the same
-arguments as |\setrawglyph| and |\setscaledrawglyph| respectively,
-although the slot will normally be $-1$. This command will usually
-be generated automatically from an \afm file.
-
-Reencoding a font can turn |\setrawglyph| commands into
-|\setnotglyph| commands and vice versa.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\inputmtx|\arg{file}
-\end{decl}
-Inputs the \m{metric commands} of \m{file}\texttt{.mtx}.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.9]
- |\usemtxpackage|\marg{package~list}\\
- |\ProvidesMtxPackage|\marg{package~name}
-\end{decl}
-
-
-\subsection{Glyph commands}
-
-The \m{glyph commands} add material to the glyph currently being
-constructed in a |\setglyph| \dots\ |\endsetglyph| or
-|\resetglyph| \dots\ |\endresetglyph|. They are:
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\glyph|\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-Sets the named glyph \m{glyph} at the given scale, with 1000 as the
-natural size. This:
-\begin{itemize}
- \item
- Advances the current glyph width.
- \item
- Sets the current glyph height to be at least the height of the
- named glyph, adjusted for the current vertical offset.
- \item
- Sets the current glyph depth to be at least the depth of the
- named glyph, adjusted for the current vertical offset.
- \item
- Sets the current glyph italic correction to be the same as the
- set glyph.
-\end{itemize}
-The named glyph must have already been defined, otherwise an error
-will occur. For example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setglyph{fi}
- \glyph{f}{1000}
- \glyph{i}{1000}
- \endsetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\glyphrule|\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-Sets a rule of the given width and height, for example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setglyph{underline}
- \glyphrule{333}{40}
- \endsetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\glyphspecial|\arg{string expression}
-\end{decl}
-Sets a driver-dependent \verb|\special|, for example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setglyph{crest}
- \glyphspecial{Filename: crest.eps}
- \endsetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\glyphwarning|\arg{string expression}
-\end{decl}
-Sets a warning \verb|\special|, and produces a warning message each
-time the glyph is used, for example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setglyph{missingglyph}
- \glyphrule{500}{500}
- \glyphwarning{Missing glyph `missingglyph'}
- \endsetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\movert|\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-Moves right by the given amount, and advances the current glyph width,
-for example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setglyph{Asmall}
- \movert{50}
- \glyph{A}{700}
- \movert{50}
- \endsetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\moveup|\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-Moves up by the given amount, and advances the current vertical
-offset. Each glyph should always end at vertical offset zero, for
-example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setglyph{onehalf}
- \moveup{500}
- \glyph{one}{700}
- \moveup{-500}
- \glyph{slash}{1000}
- \moveup{-200}
- \glyph{two}{700}
- \moveup{200}
- \endsetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\push| \m{glyph commands} |\pop|
-\end{decl}
-Performs the \m{glyph commands}, but at the |\pop| the current
-position and glyph width are restored to what they were at the |\push|,
-for example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setglyph{aacute}
- \push
- \movert{\half{\sub{\width{a}}{\width{acute}}}}
- \glyph{acute}{1000}
- \pop
- \glyph{a}{1000}
- \endsetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\glyphpcc|\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression}\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-This is generated from \texttt{PCC} instructions in an \afm file, and
-is syntactic sugar for:
-\begin{quote}
- \small
- |\push|\\
- |\movert|\arg{first integer expression}\\
- |\moveup|\arg{second integer expression}\\
- |\glyph|\arg{glyph}|{1000}|\\
- |\pop|
-\end{quote}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\resetwidth|\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\resetheight|\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\resetdepth|\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\resetitalic|\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-Sets the width, height, depth, or italic correction of the current
-glyph.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\samesize|\arg{glyph}
-\end{decl}
-Sets the dimensions of the current glyph to be the same as \m{glyph}.
-
-Inside the definition of \m{glyph}, you can use expressions such as
-|\width|\arg{glyph}, which will refer to the glyph defined so far.
-For example, a display summation sign can be defined to be a text
-summation $\sum$ scaled 120\% with 0.5\,pt extra height and depth
-using:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setglyph{summationdisplay}
- \glyph{summationtext}{1200}
- \resetheight{\add{\height{summationdisplay}}{50}}
- \resetdepth{\add{\depth{summationdisplay}}{50}}
- \endsetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-Within a |\resetglyph|, these expressions will refer to the previous
-definition of the glyph. For example, you can add sidebearings to the
-letter `A' with:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \resetglyph{A}
- \movert{25}
- \glyph{A}{1000}
- \movert{25}
- \endresetglyph
-\end{verbatim}
-
-
-\subsection{Kerning commands}
-
-The kerning commands may be used anywhere in a metrics file.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\setkern|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-This sets a kern between the two glyphs, scaled by the current
-value of \texttt{rawscale}, unless such a kern already has been set.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.9]
- |\resetkern|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-|\resetkern| unconditionally sets a kern between the two glyphs,
-scaled by the current value of \texttt{rawscale}.
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\setleftkerning|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression}\\
- |\setrightkerning|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-Sets the amount by which the first glyph should mimic how the second
-glyph kerns on the left or right, for example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setleftkerning{Asmall}{A}{850}
- \setrightkerning{Asmall}{A}{850}
- \setleftkerning{IJ}{I}{1000}
- \setrightkerning{IJ}{J}{1000}
-\end{verbatim}
-The commands work by copying kerning pairs containing the first glyph.
-As the names indicates, these commands do not override kerning pairs
-previously set.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.8]
- |\setleftrightkerning|\arg{glyph}\arg{glyph}\arg{integer expression}
-\end{decl}
-Sets the amount by which the first glyph should mimic how the second
-glyph kerns on both sides, for example:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setleftrightkerning{Asmall}{A}{850}
-\end{verbatim}
-This command is equivalent to doing first a |\setleftkerning| and
-then a |\setrightkerning|.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.906]
- |\noleftkerning|\arg{glyph}\\
- |\norightkerning|\arg{glyph}\\
- |\noleftrightkerning|\arg{glyph}
-\end{decl}
-Removes all kerning on the specified side(s) of the \meta{glyph}.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.9]
- |\unsetkerns|\marg{left~glyph~list}\marg{right~glyph~list}
-\end{decl}
-Removes all kerns with one glyph in the \meta{left glyph list} on the
-left and one glyph in the \meta{right glyph list} on the right.
-
-
-
-\subsection{Other}
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.915]
- |\aliased|\marg{font's name}\marg{alias name}
-\end{decl}
-This command is meant to be used in glyph name arguments of commands
-one may find in metric files. It was added to support combining
-mapfile entry generation with a custom form of reglyphing that has
-been developed for the \texttt{T2} bundle (Cyrillic font support).
-This does however not necessarily mean that the \texttt{T2} bundle
-has been updated to take advantage of this feature.
-
-The basic problem is that cyrillic fonts display a much greater
-variation in how the glyphs are named than latin fonts do.%
-\footnote{The Adobe guidelines have not been as prevailing here as
-in the latin range, but this isn't entirely surprising when they
-give suggestions such as using the name \texttt{afii10018} for
-\texttt{U+0411} (\textsc{cyrillic capital letter be}), even though
-there is a good reason: AFII is a glyph registry.}
-This complicates writing files similar to \setfilename{latin.mtx}, so
-the author of the \texttt{T2} bundle took the route to regularize the
-glyph names at the \afm to \mtx conversion step. Since \TeX\ does not
-know anything about glyph names, this makes no difference for the
-virtual fonts that are built.
-The glyph names do however make a difference for base fonts that are
-reencoded, since \PS encoding vectors list explicit glyph names that
-have to be the same as in the font. \Fontinst's choice of encoding
-vector for a mapfile entry is based on which \etx file was used in the
-reencoding, and hence the glyph names used when reencoding must match
-those actually used in the font, or problems will follow.
-
-The |\aliased| command can be used to preserve the information
-necessary for such reencodings. If a glyph name is specified as for
-example
-\begin{verbatim}
- \aliased{afii10018}{CYRB}
-\end{verbatim}
-then \fontinst will behave as if the glyph name is \texttt{CYRB}
-(i.e., the \meta{alias name}) for all purposes \emph{except}
-reencoding, where instead \fontinst behaves as if the glyph name is
-the \meta{font's name} \texttt{afii10018}. This makes it possible to
-use \etx files when reencoding which can be correctly translated to
-the right encoding vectors.
-
-
-
-\section{\textsf{fontdoc} commands}
-
-The following commands are defined by \fontdoc but are unknown to
-\fontinst.
-
-
-\subsection{Comment commands}
-
-\begin{decl}
- |\plaindiv|\\
- |\plainint|\\
- |\plainmax|\\
- |\plainmin|\\
- |\plainneg|
-\end{decl}
-These are the \LaTeX\ definitions of |\div|, |\int|, |\max|, |\min|,
-and |\neg| respectively. They are provided under these names because
-\fontinst uses the normal names for integer expression constructions.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.8]
- |\slotexample|
-\end{decl}
-This typesets the character in the current slot from the example font
-(cf.~|\useexamplefont|).
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.916]
- |\macroparameter|\marg{digit}
-\end{decl}
-This can be used in integer and string expressions. It typesets as
-\textit{\#n}, where `\textit{n}' is the \meta{digit}.
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.918]
- |\textunicode|\marg{code point}\marg{name}
-\end{decl}
-This generates a reference to a particular Unicode character, for use
-within a |\comment| or similar.
-
-
-\subsection{Style control commands}
-
-\begin{decl}[v1.909]
- |\showbranches|
-\end{decl}
-The is the main switch that turns on displaying both branches of
-\fontinst conditionals. If you use this command in an encoding or
-metrics file, you \textbf{must} use |\Else| and |\Fi| to delimit the
-conditionals in that file. If you do not use this command in an
-encoding or metrics file, then the conditionals will not generate any
-typeset material and neither will their \meta{else branch}es.
-
-
-
-
-\section{\fontinst variables}
-
-The following is a list of the \fontinst variables that are
-accessible for the user through the |\set|\textellipsis,
-|\reset|\textellipsis, |\unset|\textellipsis, etc.\ commands. You may
-of course set or use other variables in the MTX and ETX files you
-write yourself, as does for example the standard MTX file
-\texttt{latin.mtx}, but all variables that \fontinst commands
-implicitly use or set are listed below.
-
-\begin{list}{}{%
- \setlength\labelwidth{0pt}%
- \setlength\itemindent{-\leftmargin}%
- \setlength\parsep{0pt}
- \def\makelabel#1{\hspace\labelsep \normalfont\ttfamily #1}%
-}
- \item[acccapheight] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The height of accented full capitals.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[address] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Snailmail address put in \BibTeX-style file
- header of automatically generated ENC files. No
- \texttt{address} field is written unless the \texttt{address}
- string is set. Quotes are not automatically inserted around
- the \texttt{address} string.
- \item[Set by] ETX files.
- \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[afm-name] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Name of source font. Internal variable.
- \item[Set by] |\from|\dots\ commands.
- \item[Used by] The |\transform|\-|font|, |\install|\-|font|,
- |\install|\-|raw|\-|font|, and |\reglyph|\-|font| commands.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[ascender] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The ascender height of the font.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes
- |\setint| commands for this integer.
- \item[Used by] Some MTX and ETX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[author] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Author name(s) put in \BibTeX-style file
- header of automatically generated ENC files. See the macro
- |\ref_to_sourcefile| for more details.
- \item[Set by] ETX files.
- \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter. When not set, the
- value \texttt{"See file }\meta{etx name}\texttt{"} is used
- instead.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[\cs{autoinstallfamily}] (command)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Command called by the font installation
- commands, as
- \begin{quote}
- |\autoinstallfamily|\marg{encoding}\marg{family}
- \end{quote}
- when they are asked to install a font with a combination of
- \meta{encoding} and \meta{family} that has not been seen
- before (there was no explicit |\installfamily|).
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to calling
- |\installfamily|.
- \item[Used by] Font installation commands.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[axisheight] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{22}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[baselineskip] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description]
- The font designer's recommendation for natural length of the
- \TeX\ parameter |\baselineskip|.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[bigopspacing1] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{9}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[bigopspacing2] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{10}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[bigopspacing3] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{11}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[bigopspacing4] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{12}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[bigopspacing5] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{13}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[capheight] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The height of the font's full capitals.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes
- |\setint| commands for this variable.
- \item[Used by] Some MTX and ETX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[cmapname] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The name given to the CMap generated from
- an ETX file.
- \item[Set by] ETX files.
- \item[Used by] The ETX-to-CMap converter. When not set, the
- value |fontinst-|\nolinebreak[1]\meta{cmap file name} is
- used instead.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[codingscheme] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The codingscheme name.
- \item[Set by] ETX files.
- \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer. When not set, the
- value \texttt{UNKNOWN} is used instead.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[defaultrulethickness] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\xi\sb{8}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[delim1] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{20}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[delim2] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{21}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[denom1] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{11}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[denom2] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{12}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[descender] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The depth of lower case letters with descenders.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[descender\_neg] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The vertical position of the descender line
- of the font, i.e., the negative of the font's descender depth.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes
- |\setint| commands for this variable.
- \item[Used by] Some MTX and ETX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[designsize] (dimension)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The design size of the font.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The (V)PL-to-MTX converter usually writes
- |\setdim| commands for this variable.
- \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer. The design size defaults to
- $10\,\mathrm{pt}$ if this variable is not set.
- \item[Note] The value of this variable has no effect on how
- the font is declared to \LaTeX.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[designunits] (dimension denoting a real number)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The design size of a font expressed in the
- design unit used in a (V)PL file.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The (V)PL-to-MTX converter usually writes
- |\setdim| commands for this variable.
- \item[Used by] Nothing. If this variable is set, but to any
- value other than $1\,\mathrm{pt}$, then some metrics are most
- likely wrong.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[digitwidth] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The median width of the digits in the font.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[email] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Email address put in \BibTeX-style file
- header of automatically generated ENC files. See the macro
- |\ref_to_sourcefile| for more details.
- \item[Set by] ETX files.
- \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter. When not set, the
- value \texttt{"See file }\meta{etx name}\texttt{"} is used
- instead.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[encodingname] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The name by which the encoding in question is
- made known to a Postscript interpreter.
- \item[Set by] ETX files.
- \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter. When not set, the
- value |fontinst-|\nolinebreak[1]|autoenc-|\nolinebreak[1]%
- \meta{etx name} is used instead.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[etx-name] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Name of ETX file. Internal variable in
- |\transform|\-|font|.
- \item[Set by] The |\reencodefont| command.
- \item[Used by] The |\mtxtomtx| command.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[extraspace] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description]
- The natural width of extra interword glue at the end of a
- sentence.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[fontdimen($n$)] (integer)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Family of semi-internal variables that store
- the values to use for font dimension $n$. It is preferred
- that the newer |\set|\-|font|\-|dimen| interface is used for
- setting these values.
- \item[Set by] ETX files.
- \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[\cs{iftokeep}] (macro)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] |\iftokeep|\,\#1\,|\then|, where \#1 will
- be a \meta{number}, behaves like a switch and decides whether
- a glyph is kept or not while reglyphing.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to
- $$
- \mbox{\cs{iftokeep}\,\#1\,\cs{then}} \mapsto
- \mbox{\cs{ifnum}\,\texttt{-1<}\#1}
- $$
- \item[Used by] The |\reglyphfont| command.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[interword] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The natural width of interword glue (spaces).
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[italicslant] (integer denoting factor)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The italic slant of a font.
- \item[Set by] MTX files generated from AFM or (V)PL files. MTX
- files generated by |\transformfont|. Locally in the AFM-to-MTX
- converter for possible use in |\uprightitalcorr| or
- |\slanteditalcorr|.
- \item[Used by] MTX files (\texttt{latin.mtx} and the like). ETX
- files (for determining \texttt{fontdimen(1)}).
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[killweight] (integer)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Weight for glyphs that are killed.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to $-10$ if not set.
- \item[Used by] The |\kill|\-|glyph| command; indirectly
- the |\reglyphfont| command.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[letterspacing] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Extra width added to all glyphs of a font.
- \item[Set by] ETX or MTX files.
- \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer. Defaults to $0$ if not set.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[maxdepth] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The maximal depth over all slots in the font.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[maxdepth\_neg] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The negative of the maximal depth of a glyph in
- the font.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes
- |\setint| commands for this variable.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[maxheight] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The maximal height of a glyph in the font.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes
- |\setint| commands for this variable.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[minimumkern] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Kerns whose size in absolute value is less
- than or equal to this variable are ignored.
- \item[Set by] Command files or MTX files.
- \item[Used by] The AFM-to-MTX converter and the (V)PL file
- generator. When not set, the value $0$ is used instead.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[monowidth] (flag integer)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Set if this font is monowidth, unset otherwise.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter writes a
- |\setint| command for this variable if the AFM specifies
- \texttt{IsFixedPitch true}.
- \item[Used by] Some MTX files (\texttt{latin.mtx} and the like),
- ETX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[num1] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{8}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[num2] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{9}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[num3] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{10}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[quad] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description]
- The quad width of the font, normally approximately equal to
- the font size and\slash or the width of an `M'.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[PSfontsuffix] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Suffix added to font names to form name of
- file to download to include font.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands in mapmaking command
- files. Defaults to `\texttt{.pfa}'.
- \item[Used by] The map file fragments writer.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[rawscale] (integer denoting factor)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Scaling factor applied to raw glyphs.
- \item[Set by] The |\installfont| command (\texttt{scaled}
- clauses in argument \#2). Unset for metric files listed
- without a \texttt{scaled} clause.
- \item[Used by] The |\set|\-|raw|\-|glyph|,
- |\set|\-|not|\-|glyph|, |\set|\-|scaled|\-|raw|\-|glyph|,
- |\set|\-|scaled|\-|not|\-|glyph|, |\set|\-|kern|, and
- |\reset|\-|kern| commands.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[renameweight] (integer)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Weight for glyphs that are renamed.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to $1$ if not set.
- \item[Used by] The |\rename|\-|glyph| command; indirectly
- the |\reglyphfont| command.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[requireglyphs] (flag integer)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Set if warnings are to be generated for
- glyphs listed in ETX files but not present in the glyph
- base.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands. By default not set.
- \item[Used by] The (V)PL file generator.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[rightboundary] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The name of a glyph with the property that
- kerns on the left may be intended as right word boundary kerns.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The (V)PL-to-MTX converter can write
- |\setstr| commands for this variable.
- \item[Used by] Some MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[shrinkword] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description]
- The (finite) shrink component of interword glue.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[slant-scale] (integer denoting factor)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Factor to slant by.
- Internal variable in |\transform|\-|font|.
- \item[Set by] The |\slant|\-|font|, |\xscale|\-|font|, and
- |\scale|\-|font| commands.
- \item[Used by] The |\mtxtomtx| command.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[\cs{SlantAmount}] (macro expanding to an integer expression)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Slant factor used for faking oblique shape.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands. Defaults to \texttt{167}.
- \item[Used by] The |\latinfamily| command.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[\cs{slanteditalcorr}]
- (macro expanding to an integer expression)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The integer expression used to calculate a
- guess for the italic correction of glyphs in a font with
- positive slant. It has the syntax
- \begin{quote}
- \cs{slanteditalcorr}\marg{width}\marg{left}\marg{right}%
- \marg{bottom}\marg{top}
- \end{quote}
- where \meta{width} is the glyph's advance width, and the
- remaining arguments are coordinates of sides of the glyph's
- bounding box. The \texttt{italicslant} integer provides the
- italic slant of the font.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands in \textsf{fontinst} command
- files. Defaults to
- $$
- \max\{0, \mathit{right}-\mathit{width}\}.
- $$
- \item[Used by] The AFM-to-MTX converter.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[stretchword] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description]
- The (finite) stretch component of interword glue.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[sub1] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{16}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[sub2] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{17}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[subdrop] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{19}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[sup1] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{13}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[sup2] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{14}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[sup3] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{15}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[supdrop] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Math formula parameter $\sigma\sb{18}$.
- \item[Set by] MTX files.
- \item[Used by] Some ETX and MTX files.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[TFMfileprefix] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Prefix (typically a path) added to names of
- TFM files.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands in mapmaking command
- files. By default not set, which is equivalent to being empty.
- \item[Used by] The \textsf{PLtoTF} ``map file fragments writer''.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[underlinethickness] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The recommended thickness of an underlining
- rule.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter usually writes
- |\setint| commands for this variable.
- \item[Used by] Some MTX files (\texttt{latin.mtx} and the like).
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[\cs{uprightitalcorr}]
- (macro expanding to an integer expression)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The integer expression used to calculate a
- guess for the italic correction of glyphs in a font with
- non-positive slant. It has the syntax
- \begin{quote}
- \cs{uprightitalcorr}\marg{width}\marg{left}\marg{right}%
- \marg{bottom}\marg{top}
- \end{quote}
- where \meta{width} is the glyph's advance width, and the
- remaining arguments are coordinates of sides of the glyph's
- bounding box. The \texttt{italicslant} integer provides the
- italic slant of the font.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands in \textsf{fontinst} command
- files. Defaults to $0$.
- \item[Used by] The AFM-to-MTX converter.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[version] (string)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Version number put in \BibTeX-style file
- header of automatically generated ENC files. See the macro
- |\ref_to_sourcefile| for more details.
- \item[Set by] ETX files.
- \item[Used by] The ETX-to-ENC converter. When not set, the
- value \texttt{"See file }\meta{etx name}\texttt{"} is used
- instead.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[verticalstem] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The dominant width of vertical stems
- (usually the width of stems of lower case letters).
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX converter writes
- |\setint| commands for this variable if the AFM file specifies
- \texttt{StdVW}.
- \item[Used by] Currently nothing.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[\texttt{warningspecials}] (switch)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Controls whether |\glyphwarning| commands
- will generate VPL \texttt{SPECIAL}s. Defaults to `true'.
- \item[Set by] Explicit commands (|\warningspecialstrue| and
- |\warningspecialsfalse|).
- \item[Used by] The (V)PL file generator.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[x-scale] (integer denoting factor)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Horizontal scaling factor.
- Internal variable in |\transform|\-|font|.
- \item[Set by] The |\xscale|\-|font| and |\scale|\-|font| commands.
- \item[Used by] The |\mtxtomtx| command.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[xheight] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] The x-height of the font.
- \item[Set by] MTX files. The AFM-to-MTX and (V)PL-to-MTX
- converters usually write |\setint| commands for this variable.
- \item[Used by] MTX files, and ETX files (for determining
- \texttt{fontdimen(5)}).
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[y-scale] (integer denoting factor)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Vertical scaling factor.
- Internal variable in |\transform|\-|font|.
- \item[Set by] The |\yscale|\-|font| and |\scale|\-|font| commands.
- \item[Used by] The |\mtxtomtx| command.
- \end{smalldes}
- \item[\meta{\rmfamily glyph}-spacing] (integer denoting length)
- \begin{smalldes}
- \item[Description] Glyph-specific override for
- \texttt{letterspacing}; extra width added to the glyph
- \meta{glyph} as part of the process of writing a VPL
- file.
- \item[Set by] ETX or MTX files.
- \item[Used by] The (V)PL writer. Defaults to $0$ if not set.
- \end{smalldes}
-\end{list}
-Besides these, the |\latinfamily| command provides a whole range of
-parameters (|\latin_weights|, |\latin_widths|, |\latin_shapes|, etc.)
-that are often used somewhat like variables. That subject
-does however deserve to be treated separately.
-
-
-
-\section{Customisation}
-
-The \fontinst package reads a file \texttt{fontinst.rc} if it
-exists. This can contain your own customisations. The catcodes that
-are in force when this file is read are the same as those selected by
-|\fontinstcc|.
-
-Similarly \texttt{finstmsc.sty} reads \texttt{finstmsc.rc} and the
-\fontdoc package reads \texttt{fontdoc.cfg}.
-
-You can create a \texttt{fontinst} format by running ini\TeX{} on
-\texttt{fontinst.sty} then saying \verb|\dump|.
-
-
-\section{Notes on features new with v\,1.9}
-
-The following notes are copied from \texttt{fisource.tex}; they were
-written to explain new \fontinst features to old \fontinst users.
-
-
-\subsection{Metric packages}
-
-\Fontinst has traditionally come with a collection of MTX
-files that complement the MTX files generated from base font metrics,
-in that they build glyphs that may be missing from the base fonts or
-in some other way needs to be improved. The most well-known of these
-is the \texttt{latin.mtx} file; other examples include
-\texttt{textcomp.mtx}, \texttt{mathit.mtx}, and \texttt{latinsc.mtx}.
-A problem with these is however that they cannot produce optimal
-results for all fonts simply because there are irregular differences
-in how fonts are set up by the foundries. Most glyphs come out all right,
-but there are usually a few for which the parameters used are more or
-less wrong. Therefore most high quality font installations are made
-with modified versions of these files, where the parameters have been
-tuned to the specific font design.
-
-Modifying in particular \texttt{latin.mtx} is however not an entirely
-easy task, because this is a rather large file (with plenty of
-archaic pieces of code in curious places). Doing it once is no big
-problem, but if one has to do it several times (maybe because some
-errors are discovered in the original \texttt{latin.mtx}) then it is
-probably no fun anymore. Furthermore, if one has two or three
-modified copies of this file because one has made high quality
-installations of that many different fonts then even a trivial bugfix
-might start to feel like entirely too much work.
-
-If one has to make modifications then it is usually easier to deal
-with several small files (many of which can be used unchanged) than
-one big file. Thus it would be better if these big files were split up
-into several smaller ones.
-The main problem with splitting up something like \texttt{latin.mtx}
-is that there are some commands which are defined at the top and
-which are then used in almost all sections of the file. One must make
-certain that these commands are always loaded, which makes the metric
-files somewhat harder to use (especially if the one who tries to use
-them is not the one who wrote them).
-
-One strategy is to include all definitions needed for a metric file in
-it. This has the slight disadvantage that the commands will have to be
-defined several times. What is worse however, is that the command
-definitions will appear in several files, so if one finds a bug in one
-of them, one cannot simply correct this bug in one place. As the number
-of files can soon become quite large, correcting such bugs can become
-a boring procedure indeed.
-
-Another strategy is to put all the command definitions in one file
-and then explicitly include it in the \meta{file-list} argument of
-|\installfont|. This eliminates the repeated bug fixing problem, but
-requires the user to do something that the computer can actually do
-just as well.
-
-A third strategy is to put the command definitions in one or several
-files and then in each metric file the user explicitly mentions load
-the command definitions needed for that particular file. Metric
-packages uses an improved version of this strategy, since they also
-make it possible for \fontinst to remember which packages (i.e., sets
-of command definitions) that have already been loaded, so that they
-are not unnecessarily loaded again. The \texttt{newlatin.mtx} file is
-an alternative to \texttt{latin.mtx} that implements this strategy.
-Most of the actual code is located in the following metric packages:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{l p{0.7\linewidth}}
- \texttt{ltcmds.mtx}& Defines some common commands used by the other
- files.\\
- \texttt{llbuild.mtx}& Builds the latin lower case alphabet
- (unaccented letters are `unfakable', the rest are constructed if
- not present in the base fonts).\\
- \texttt{lubuild.mtx}& Builds the latin upper case alphabet.\\
- \texttt{lsbuild.mtx}& Builds accented letters in the latin
- smallcaps alphabet, but only if there are unaccented letters to
- build them from in the base fonts.\\
- \texttt{lsfake.mtx}& Fakes a latin smallcaps alphabet by shrinking
- the upper case alphabet, but only if the glyph had not already
- been manufactured.\\
- \texttt{lsmisc.mtx}& Make some miscellaneous smallcaps glyphs
- (mostly ``smallcaps f-ligatures'').\\
- \texttt{ltpunct.mtx}& Makes digits, punctuation marks, and other
- symbols (mostly by marking as ``unfakable'').
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\noindent All of these are easy to use as components of equivalents
-of a modified \texttt{latin.mtx} files, and all dependencies of one
-package upon another are handled via explicit |\usemtxpackage|
-commands.
-
-% For information on the syntax etcetera of commands related to metric
-% packages, see Section~\ref{Sec:Metric files}.
-
-
-\subsection{Word boundary ligatures and kerns}
-
-One of the new features added in \TeX~3 was that of ligatures and
-kerns with word boundaries. \Fontinst has had an interface
-for making such ligatures and kerns, but it has been completely
-redesigned in v\,1.9 and the old interface (setting the integer
-|boundarychar|) is no longer recognized by \fontinst. Files
-which use the old interface can still be processed with
-\texttt{cfntinst.sty}, though.
-
-Before considering the new commands, it is suitable to make a
-distinction between proper glyphs and pseudoglyphs. A proper glyph has
-been set using one of the commands |\setrawglyph|, |\setglyph|, and
-|\resetglyph|. A pseudoglyph is any name used in the context of a
-glyph name which does not denote a proper glyph. If a pseudoglyph
-|g-not| was set using the |\setnotglyph| command, then
-|\ifisglyph{g-not}\then| will evaluate to true, but something can be
-a pseudoglyph even if an |\ifisglyph| test evaluates to false. The
-interesting point about pseudoglyphs when considering word boundaries
-however, is that a pseudoglyph can have ligatures and kerns.
-
-Kerns and ligatures at the left word boundary (beginning of word) are
-specified using the commands |\setleftboundary| and
-|\endsetleftboundary|, which are syntactically identical to
-|\setslot| and |\endsetslot| respectively. One important difference is
-however that the argument to |\setslot| must be a proper glyph, while
-the argument to |\setleftboundary| may be any glyph, hence any
-pseudoglyph will do just fine.
-
-|\ligature| commands between |\setleftboundary| and
-|\endsetleftboundary| will generate beginning of word ligatures. Kerns
-on the right of the glyph specified in |\setleftboundary| will become
-beginning of word kerns.
-
-Kerns and ligatures at the right word boundary (end of word) are
-trickier, due to the asymmetrical nature of the ligkern table in a PL
-file. What a font can do is to specify that the right word boundary,
-for purposes of kerning and ligatures, should be interpreted as
-character $n$. By including a kern or ligature with character $n$ on
-the right, that kern or ligature will be used at the end of a word,
-but it will also be used each time the next character is character
-$n$. Because of this, one usually wants the slot $n$, which the right
-word boundary is interpreted as being, to be empty whenever the
-encoding allows this.
-
-The command
-\begin{quote}
- |\setrightboundary|\marg{glyph}
-\end{quote}
-will mark the current slot as used to denote the right word boundary,
-and leave the slot empty, increasing the current slot number by one
-just like a |\setslot| \textellipsis\ |\endsetslot| block does. Kerns on
-the left of \meta{glyph} will be end of word kerns and |\ligature|
-commands with \meta{glyph} as the second argument will be for the end
-of a word.
-
-The command
-\begin{quote}
- |\makerightboundary|\marg{glyph}
-\end{quote}
-is similar to |\setrightboundary|, but it is a slot command which may
-only be used between a |\setslot| and the matching |\endsetslot|. Like
-|\setrightboundary|, it marks the current slot as used to denote the
-right word boundary, but the glyph specified in the enclosing |\setslot|
-will be written to that slot. Ligatures for the glyph specified by the
-|\setslot| and ligatures for the glyph specified by the
-|\makerightboundary| will both be for this single slot. Kerns on the
-right of the |\setslot| glyph and the |\makerightboundary| glyph will
-similarly both be for this single slot. The idea is that the |\setslot|
-glyph should be used when making a kern or ligature for that glyph,
-while the |\makerightboundary| glyph should be used when making a kern
-or ligature for the end of a word. \Fontinst will warn you if
-these two uses of the slot directly contradict each other.
-
-
-\subsection{Changing the names of glyphs}
-\label{Ssec:Des:Reglyph}
-
-Sometimes, primarily when making a virtual font from more than one raw
-font and two of the raw fonts contain different glyphs with the same
-name, it becomes necessary to change the names of some glyphs to make
-some sense out of it. The main source of this kind of trouble is the
-``caps and small caps'' (SC) and ``oldstyle figures'' (OsF) fonts
-within many commercial font families. The typical problem is that what
-is typographically different glyphs---such as the lowercase `a'
-(\texttt{a}, for \fontinst) and the smallcaps `\textsc{a}'
-(\texttt{Asmall}, for \fontinst)---are given the same name by
-the foundry.
-
-One way to get round this is to say for example
-\begin{quote}
- |\setglyph{Asmall} \glyph{a}{1000} \endsetglyph|\\
- |\setleftrightkerning{Asmall}{a}{1000}|\\
- |\unsetglyph{a}|\\
- |\noleftrightkerning{a}|
-\end{quote}
-and continuing like that for all the duplicate glyph names. This is
-however a rather prolix method and if the number of glyphs is large
-then it is usually simpler to use the |\reglyphfont| command.
-
-To reglyph one or several fonts, one writes
-\begin{quote}
- |\reglyphfonts|\\
- \vadjust{}\quad \meta{reglyphing commands}\\
- |\endreglyphfonts|
-\end{quote}
-There are two types of reglyphing commands: the |\reglyphfont|
-command, and the commands that modify what |\reglyphfont| will do to
-the fonts it operates on. The syntax of |\reglyphfont| is
-\begin{quote}
- |\reglyphfont|\marg{destination font}\marg{source font}
-\end{quote}
-The \meta{source font} font here is the name (suffix not included, of
-course) of the font metric file one wants to change the glyph names in.
-This font metric file can be in any of the formats MTX, PL, AFM, and
-VPL, and it will be converted to MTX format if it isn't already in
-that format (this happens just as for files listed in the second
-argument of |\installfont|). \meta{destination font} (which must be
-different from \meta{source font}) will be taken as the name for a
-new \texttt{.mtx} file that will be generated. The destination font
-can differ from the source font only in two ways: the names of some
-glyphs in the source font might be changed, and some of the commands
-from the source font might not have been copied to the destination
-font. To what extent the fonts are different is determined by what
-modifying commands have been executed; when no modifying commands
-have been executed, the source and destination font are equal.
-
-The modifying reglyphing commands are
-\begin{quote}
- |\renameglyph|\marg{to}\marg{from}\\
- |\renameglyphweighted|\marg{to}\marg{from}\marg{weight}\\
- |\killglyph|\marg{glyph}\\
- |\killglyphweighted|\marg{glyph}\marg{weight}\\
- |\offmtxcommand|\marg{command}\\
- |\onmtxcommand|\marg{command}
-\end{quote}
-|\renameglyph| simply declares that occurrences of the glyph name
-\meta{from} should be replaced by the glyph name \meta{to}. To each
-glyph name is also assigned a \emph{weight}, which is used by a
-mechanism which conditions copying of commands from the source font to
-the destination font by the set of glyphs that command mentions. The
-details of this mechanism are however somewhat tricky, so those
-interested in the full generality should read the comments in the
-source of \fontinst. Here it needs only be noted that if one applies
-|\killglyph| to a glyph name, then (under most circumstances) commands
-that refer to that glyph name will not be copied to the destination
-font.
-
-|\offmtxcommand| and |\onmtxcommand| also control whether commands are
-copied to the destination font, but they look at the actual command
-rather than the glyphs it refers to. For example, after the command
-\begin{quote}
- |\offmtxcommand{\setkern}|
-\end{quote}
-no |\setkern| commands will be copied. By using |\offmtxcommand|, it
-is possible to achieve effects similar to those of the files
-\texttt{kernoff.mtx} and \texttt{glyphoff.mtx}---the difference is
-that with |\offmtxcommand|, it happens at an earlier stage of the font
-generation. As expected, |\onmtxcommand| undoes the effect of
-|\offmtxcommand|.
-
-A special rule pertains to the |\set|\-|raw|\-|glyph|,
-|\set|\-|not|\-|glyph|, |\set|\-|scaled|\-|raw|\-|glyph|, and
-|\set|\-|scaled|\-|not|\-|glyph| commands, since |\transformfont|
-doesn't care what something was in the source font when it generates
-the transformed font. To turn these commands off while reglyphing,
-you use |\offmtx|\-|command| on |\set|\-|scaled|\-|raw|\-|glyph|.
-
-The effects of modifying reglyphing commands are delimited by
-|\reglyphfonts| and |\endreglyphfonts|, which starts and ends a group
-respectively.
-
-As we expect the most common reglyphing operation will be to go from SC
-glyph names to expert glyph names, there is a file \texttt{csc2x.tex}
-in the \fontinst distribution which contains the modifying
-reglyphing commands needed for setting up that conversion. Thus you
-can write for example
-\begin{quote}
- |\reglyphfonts|\\
- | \input csc2x|\\
- | \reglyphfont{padrcx8r}{padrc8r}|\\
- | \reglyphfont{padscx8r}{padsc8r}|\\
- |\endreglyphfonts|
-\end{quote}
-to alter the glyph names in the SC fonts in the Adobe Garamond
-(\texttt{pad}) family.
-Note that the names of the destination fonts here really are rather
-arbitrary, since they will only exist as \texttt{.mtx} files, and
-thus only need to work within your local file system. In particular,
-all the |\setrawglyph| commands in the destination font files still
-refer to the source font, so it is that font which the drivers need
-to know about.
-
-
-\subsection{Making map file fragments}
-\label{Ssec:MapFragments}
-
-A \emph{map file fragment} is the lines\footnote{Not in general an
-entire map file, hence the word \emph{fragment}.} of a map file that
-the corresponding driver would need for handling some set of fonts.
-When told to, \fontinst can (in a fairly automatic way) create
-the map file fragment which is needed for the set of raw fonts
-\fontinst has (i) installed directly (using |\installrawfont|)
-or (ii) used as a base font for some installed virtual font (generated
-by |\installfont|). \Fontinst does not support the map file
-syntaxes of every existing driver, but the system is designed to be
-extendable and contributions that extend its capabilities are welcome.
-Nor can \fontinst examine your \TeX\ system and
-determine every piece of information needed to make the correct map
-file fragments, but you can tell it roughly how your installation
-looks, it can make guesses which work most of the time, and you can
-specify most things explicitly if the guesses turn out to be wrong.
-Should the available options for configuring the process turn out to
-be inadequate for your needs, then please write to the
-\fontinst mailing list about this---there is probably a way
-to improve the system so that your needs can be met.
-
-Now what does one have to do to use this map file fragment writer,
-then? First you need to tell \fontinst to record the
-information the map file fragment writer needs. You do this by giving
-the command
-\begin{quote}
- |\recordtransforms{whatever.tex}|
-\end{quote}
-at the beginning of the run. Here \texttt{whatever.tex} is the name of
-a file that will be created, so you can use some other name if you
-like. After that you do all the calls to |\transform|\-|font|,
-|\install|\-|font|, |\install|\-|raw|\-|font|, |\latin|\-|family|,
-etc.\ you need to make the fonts you want. When you're done, you give
-the command
-\begin{quote}
- |\endrecordtransforms|
-\end{quote}
-and end the run (say |\bye|). The file \texttt{whatever.tex} will now
-contain the information about which fonts were used and what needs to
-be done with them.
-
-The second step is to actually run the map file fragment writer.
-Observe that it is located in the file \texttt{finstmsc.sty}, not
-\texttt{fontinst.sty}! The commands you need to give it can be so few
-that you can type them in at \TeX's \texttt{*} prompt, but if you are
-writing a command file then it should typically have the following
-structure (comments not necessary, of course):
-\begin{quote}
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- |\input finstmsc.sty|& |%| Input command definitions\\
- \meta{general settings} & |%| See below\\
- |\adddriver|\marg{driver name}\marg{output file}&
- |%| Open output file\\
- |\input whatever.tex|& |%| Writes to output file(s)\\
- |\donedrivers|& |%| Close output file(s), tidy up\\
- |\bye|& |%| Quit
- \end{tabular}
-\end{quote}
-The |\adddriver| command gives the order ``write map file entries for
-the \meta{driver name} DVI driver to the file \meta{output file}.'' The
-plan is that it should be possible to use the name of just about any
-major driver (\texttt{dvips}, \texttt{xdvi},\footnote{Or
-does that use the same map file as \texttt{dvips}? I heard somewhere
-that it did. /LH} \texttt{pdftex},\footnote{pdf\TeX\ can read
-the map files generated for \texttt{dvips}, but a separate driver is
-desirable because the formats are not completely identical.}
-\texttt{OzTeX}, etc.) here and get suitable map file entries for that
-driver as output, but for the moment only the \texttt{dvips} and
-\texttt{dvipdfm}\footnote{Whose support I made very much to illustrate
-that you \emph{don't} have to be a big and ancient driver like
-\texttt{dvips} to have supporting code put into \fontinst.
-(The fact that I just happened to have printed out the documentation and
-that is was easy to read also helped, of course.) Note, however, that
-there won't be any support for a driver unless someone sits down and
-writes the code for it! Don't assume I will. /LH} drivers are supported.
-
-You may also use \texttt{debug} or \texttt{pltotf} for \meta{driver name}.
-The \texttt{debug} ``DVI driver'' file simply contains all the available
-information about each font (hence it should come handy for debugging
-code writing entries for real drivers) in a format that should be easy
-to interpret for a human. It could be the right choice if you're going
-to write the map file manually, as the combined effects of several
-font transformations are not always easy to compute manually. The
-file generated for the \texttt{pltotf} ``driver'' is actually a shell
-script consisting of a sequence of \pltotf commands. These commands
-perform the \pl to \tfm conversion for precisely those fonts that are
-actually needed (\fontinst usually generates \pl files also for a
-number of fonts at intermediate stages of transformation, and many of
-these need not be converted to \tfm files). The \texttt{TFMfileprefix}
-string can be used to add a directory path to the \tfm file names,
-perhaps saving the step of moving them to their proper location later.
-
-The file \texttt{whatever.tex} in the above example contains the
-commands (|\makemapentry| commands) that actually cause entries to be
-written to the output file. It also contains a number of |\storemapdata|
-commands---these describe how some given font was made. If some
-metric file you have used contains |\setrawglyph| commands that were
-not automatically generated by \fontinst, then there might
-not be a |\storemapdata| for the font they refer to in
-\texttt{whatever.tex}, so you will have to include such a command
-yourself somewhere. This can for example be done in the \meta{general
-settings} part of the above example file.
-
-Another class of things that will typically appear in the
-\meta{general settings} part above is commands that will inform the
-routines actually writing output about your \TeX\ system, about the set
-of fonts you are using on this run, or about something else that might
-be useful. Some such commands are of a general nature and affect what
-assumptions \fontinst will make in certain conditions when no
-specific information is available. For the moment there commands are:
-\begin{description}
- \item[\cs{AssumeMetafont}] Assume all fonts with PL metrics are
- bitmaps generated by Metafont, and therefore make no entries for
- them.
- \item[\cs{AssumeAMSBSYY}] Assume all fonts with PL metrics have their
- \TeX\ names in all upper case as postscript names---just like the
- Computer Modern fonts in the AMS\slash Blue~Sky\slash Y\&Y
- distribution.
- \item[\cs{AssumeBaKoMa}] Assume all fonts with PL metrics have their
- \TeX\ names in all lower case as postscript names---just like the
- Computer Modern fonts in the BaKoMa distribution.
-\end{description}
-Otherwise the default action of the routine for finding out the
-postscript name of a font simply is to observe that it hasn't got a clue
-about what the right value is when the metrics were taken from a PL
-file, and therefore it writes `\texttt{??????}' for the postscript name.
-\begin{description}
- \item[\cs{AssumeLWFN}] Assume postscript fonts for which nothing
- else has been specified are stored in files which are named
- according to the \mbox{MacOS} scheme for
- \texttt{LWFN}s.%\footnote{LaserWriter FoNt}
-\end{description}
-Otherwise the default action is to use the name of the AFM or PL from
-which the metrics were originally taken, and add the file suffix stored
-in the string \texttt{PSfontsuffix}. The default value of this string
-is \texttt{.pfa}, but it can be changed using |\resetstr|.
-
-If neither the default nor the LWFN scheme produce correct results
-then you may use the more specific |\specifypsfont| command, which
-describes exactly which file (or files, if any) a given font is stored
-in. The syntax of this command is
-\begin{quote}
- |\specifypsfont|\marg{PS font name}\marg{actions}
-\end{quote}
-where the \meta{actions} is a sequence of ``action commands''.
-Currently the only such command is
-\begin{quote}
- |\download|\marg{file}
-\end{quote}
-which instructs the map file writer to include in any entry using
-that PS font and ``instruction'' that the specified file should be
-downloaded. Some examples are
-\begin{verbatim}
- \specifypsfont{Times-Roman}{}
- \specifypsfont{Shareware-Cyrillic-Regular}{\download{fcyr.gsf}}
- \specifypsfont{zmnl8ac6}{%
- \download{MinionMM.pfb}\download{zmnl8ac6.pro}%
- }
-\end{verbatim}
-Many \dvi drivers (for example \dvips) have more than one style of
-font downloading (e.g., partial and full downloading). This interface
-could be extended to control also such finer details (for example by
-adding a |\fulldownload| command to force full download of a font),
-but requests for this has so far been scarce.
-
-Finally, there is the |\declarepsencoding| command which is used to
-link ETX files to postscript encodings. If no postscript encoding has
-been linked to a given ETX file then \fontinst will
-automatically create a postscript encoding (\texttt{.enc}) file for
-that encoding, and use this file for all reencoding commands.
-The \texttt{8r} encoding is predeclared, and it doesn't
-matter if an encoding is undeclared if you never use it to reencode
-fonts, but there is potentially a problem with not having declared
-encodings you have installed and use for reencoding, as you may then
-find yourself having two files with identical names that define
-encodings that do not have the same name (as far as postscript is
-concerned).
-
-
-
-\subsection{Tuning accent positions---an application of loops}
-
-The accent placements made by \texttt{latin.mtx} certainly aren't
-perfect for all fonts, and the only way to find out where they should
-be put is through trying in text the accented letters you get for a
-couple of values for the position parameter and deciding which one
-works best. Since to try one parameter value you need to (i) edit it
-into an MTX file, (ii) run \fontinst, (iii) run
-\vptovf, (iv) run \TeX\ on some test text, and (v) print that
-text, trying one parameter value can take annoyingly much time.
-Repeating the same procedure ten times to test ten values is not
-something one does without being bored (unless one scripts it, of
-course), but it is possible to try ten parameter values in a single
-virtual font, and without doing very much typing.
-
-Say you're not too happy with how \texttt{latin.mtx} positions the
-accent in the \texttt{ohungarumlaut} glyph:
-\begin{quote}
- |\setglyph{ohungarumlaut}|\\
- | \topaccent{o}{hungarumlaut}{500}|\\
- |\endsetglyph|
-\end{quote}
-The |500| is the horizontal position (in thousandths of the width of
-the \texttt{o}) that the centre of \texttt{hungarumlaut} in the glyph
-constructed will have, so that is the position parameter value that
-you want to change. Create an MTX file containing the code
-\begin{quote}
- |\for(pos){250}{750}{50}|\\
- | \setglyph{ohungarumlaut\strint{pos}}|\\
- | \topaccent{o}{hungarumlaut}{\int{pos}}|\\
- | \endsetglyph|\\
- | \setleftrightkerning{ohungarumlaut\strint{pos}}|\\
- | {ohungarumlaut}{1000}|\\
- |\endfor(pos)|
-\end{quote}
-This will set eleven glyphs \texttt{ohungarumlaut250},
-\texttt{ohungarumlaut300}, \texttt{ohungarumlaut350}, \textellipsis\,,
-\texttt{ohungarumlaut750}, each being an Hungarianly umlauted `o'
-(i.e., an `\H{o}') but all having that umlaut in slightly different
-positions. In order to put them in a font, you also need to make an
-encoding that contains them. Therefore create an ETX file which
-contains the code
-\begin{quote}
- |\relax\encoding|\\
- |\nextslot{"C0}|\\
- |\for(pos){250}{750}{50}|\\
- | \setslot{ohungarumlaut\strint{pos}}|\\
- | \endsetslot|\\
- |\endfor(pos)|\\
- |\endencoding|
-\end{quote}
-The command for installing this experiment font would be something like
-\begin{quote}
- |\installfont|\marg{some name}|{|\meta{the normal list of metrics}%
- |,|\penalty0\meta{the new MTX}|}|\penalty0
- |{ot1,|\meta{the new ETX}|}|\penalty0|{OT1}|\textellipsis
-\end{quote}
-The reason for including \texttt{ot1} in the third argument above is
-that you'll need letters other than `\H{o}' against which you can
-compare the experimental glyphs. It would not have been possible to
-use \texttt{t1} instead of \texttt{ot1} (even though that has more
-Hungarian letters) since that would set all slots in the font and
-leave none for these experimental \texttt{ohungarumlaut}s.
-
-It is even possible to use a loop for making the test text. The
-\LaTeX\ macros
-\begin{verbatim}
-\newcount\slotcount
-\newcommand\testtext[3]{%
- \slotcount=#1\relax
- \begin{description}%
- \loop\item[\the\slotcount]#3%
- \ifnum #2>>\slotcount \advance \slotcount 1 \repeat
- \end{description}%
-}
-\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\H}{OT1}{o}{\char\slotcount}
-\end{verbatim}
-will let you write
-\begin{quote}
- |\testtext|\marg{first}\marg{last}\marg{text}
-\end{quote}
-to get the text \meta{text} typeset once for each slot from
-\meta{first} to \meta{last} inclusive, with |\H{o}| ranging through the
-glyphs in this interval. Thus in this case
-|\testtext|\penalty\hyphenpenalty|{"C0}|\penalty\hyphenpenalty|{"CA}|%
-\penalty\hyphenpenalty|{Erd\H{o}s}| would be a trivial test.
-
-
-\subsection{Font installation commands}
-\label{Ssec:FontInstCmds}
-
-The |\installfont|, |\installrawfont|, and |\installfontas| commands
-have the respective syntaxes
-\begin{isyntax}
- |\installfont|\marg{font-name}\marg{metrics}\marg{etx-list}\penalty0
- \marg{encoding}\marg{family}\marg{series}\marg{shape}\marg{size}\\
- |\installrawfont|\marg{font-name}\marg{metrics}\marg{etx-list}%
- \penalty0
- \marg{encoding}\marg{family}\marg{series}\marg{shape}\marg{size}\\
- |\installfontas|\marg{font-name}\penalty0\marg{encoding}%
- \marg{family}\marg{series}\marg{shape}\marg{size}
-\end{isyntax}
-The \meta{font-name} argument and the last five arguments are common
-to all these commands. The first argument is the name of a \TeX\ font
-to install. The last five arguments are the NFSS attributes under which
-that font will be declared to \LaTeX---encoding, family, series, shape,
-and size. It is worth observing that encoding names are usually in
-upper case, whereas the family, series, and shape are usually in lower
-case. The size argument is either a shorthand (declared using
-|\declaresize|) for a particular font
-size (or range of font sizes), or an explicit list of font sizes or
-ranges of sizes, which is copied directly to the font declaration.
-The most common case is to let the size argument be empty, as that is
-declared as a shorthand for ``any size''.
-
-The |\installfontas| command does not itself create the font, it just
-makes a note that the specified font declaration should be written to
-the proper FD file at |\end|\-|install|\-|fonts|. The
-|\install|\-|font| and |\install|\-|raw|\-|font| commands do however
-produce the font, in the sense that they write a VPL and PL
-respectively file for the font. It depends solely on the \meta{metrics}
-and \meta{etx-list} arguments what this font will contain. Many
-features of these arguments are new with \fontinst v\,1.9;
-therefore the complete syntaxes are described below.
-
-Both arguments are comma-separated lists of basically file names (not
-including an extension). The files listed in the \meta{metrics} are
-font metric files which together build up a \emph{glyph base}
-(definitions of glyphs and metrics related to one or several glyphs),
-whereas the files listed in the \meta{etx-list} are encoding definition
-files that select a subset of the glyph base for turning into a
-\TeX\ font. The font metrics can be in either of the four formats
-MTX, PL, AFM, and VPL, which are considered in that order. If the
-metrics are not originally in MTX format then they will be converted
-to this format (a new file will be created) before they are used.
-The encoding definitions must be in ETX format. The files actually
-read will have a suffix \texttt{.mtx}, \texttt{.pl}, \texttt{.afm},
-\texttt{.vpl}, or \texttt{.etx} appended to the name given, depending
-on which format is expected.
-
-Within each element of the comma-separated list, the actual file name
-is followed by zero or more \emph{modifier clause}s. A \meta{modifier
-clause} consists of a \emph{keyword} followed by some number (usually
-one) of \emph{arguments}, separated by spaces. The whole thing looks
-a lot like the \meta{rule specifications} of e.g.\ the |\vrule|
-command, but here the spaces are mandatory. The currently defined
-\meta{modifier clause}s are
-\begin{description}
- \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{option}\textvisiblespace
- \meta{string}]
- Available for metric and encoding files. This adds \meta{string}
- to the list of options for this file, which may affect what code
- the file executes. The file can then test, using the |\ifoption|
- command, whether a specific string is one of the options it was
- given.
- \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{scaled}\textvisiblespace
- \meta{factor}]
- Available for metric files. Causes the \texttt{rawscale} integer
- variable to be set to the \meta{factor} (an integer expression)
- while the file is being read. This scales glyphs and kerns that
- are added to the glyph base by the \meta{factor}.
- \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{suffix}\textvisiblespace
- \meta{suffix}]
- Available for metric files. Causes \meta{suffix} to be appended
- to every glyph name appearing in a glyph or kern that file adds
- to the glyph base. Thus ``\texttt{suffix /2}'' effectively
- changes a
- \begin{quote}
- |\setrawglyph{a}|\dots
- \end{quote}
- to a
- \begin{quote}
- |\setrawglyph{a/2}|\dots
- \end{quote}
- \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{encoding}\textvisiblespace
- \meta{etx-name}]
- Available for metric files, and forces \fontinst to
- only consider the PL and VPL formats for this font.
- As these file formats do not contain glyph names, an ETX file
- is used to assign glyph names to the slots in the font.
- This ETX file is usually selected according to the
- \texttt{CODINGSCHEME} property of the PL or VPL (using the
- correspondences set up via the |\declare|\-|encoding| command),
- but that information is not always as one would want it (there
- are even fonts for which it is quite wrong). An \texttt{encoding}
- clause bypasses this automatic mechanism, so that the file
- \meta{etx-name}\texttt{.etx} is used instead.
-
-% % The following is no longer true as of v1.926:
-% \textbf{Note:} The first time that a file in PL or VPL format is
-% used in a \meta{metrics} argument, a corresponding MTX file is
-% generated. This means that if the same file reference is used
-% another time then the reference will be to the MTX file, not to
-% the original PL or VPL, and thus \texttt{encoding} clauses on
-% subsequent uses will have no effect. Each font only has one
-% encoding, so it usually makes no sense to switch the ETX file
-% used to interpret a font, but since MTX files are not
-% automatically deleted between runs there is a risk that this
-% takes away the intended effect of an \texttt{encoding} clause.
-
- \item[\mdseries\textvisiblespace\texttt{mtxasetx}]
- This is available for files in the \meta{etx-list}. The actual
- function of a
- \begin{quote}
- \meta{file-name} \texttt{mtxasetx}
- \end{quote}
- item in the \meta{etx-list} is that the file
- \meta{file-name}\texttt{.mtx} is inputted (\emph{not}
- \meta{file-name}\texttt{.etx}) and that the correspondence
- between glyph names and slot numbers set up in
- |\set|\-|raw|\-|glyph| or |\set|\-|scaled|\-|raw|\-|glyph|
- commands in this file is treated as if it had been set up by
- |\setslot| commands in an ETX file. Provided the MTX file is
- transformable, the glyph base will be unaffected.
-
- The purpose of this feature is to simplify quick and dirty
- installations of odd fonts for which no suitable ETX file is
- available. This can be useful in early stages of the design of
- a new font, but is inferior to installation using proper ETX
- files since one for example cannot specify any ligatures in
- MTX files.
-\end{description}
-Furthermore there is a special exception for the \meta{metrics}: if
-the first token in one of the list items is the control sequence
-|\metrics|, then the rest of that item is interpreted as explicit
-metric commands to execute.
-
-If the \meta{metrics} of two subsequent |\install|\-|font|
-or |\install|\-|raw|\-|font| commands are identical then the glyph
-bases will be identical as well. This creates an opportunity for
-optimization, which \fontinst makes use of by caching glyph
-bases from one installation command to the next so that the glyph
-base does not have to be rebuilt in these cases. A side-effect of
-this caching is that local assignments made between two font
-installation commands are cleared out with the glyph base, but
-|\setint| and similar \fontinst commands make global
-assignments when used in such positions.
-
-Some examples might be in order. The first is an adaptation of an
-installation command from \texttt{mfnt-0.59} %~\cite{mfnt}
-by Matthias Clasen and Ulrik Vieth: the installation command for the
-8-bit math font \texttt{xma1000} (which can be thought of as being
-to \texttt{cmmi10} sort of as \texttt{ecrm1000} is to \texttt{cmr10}).
-The first three \texttt{encoding} clauses are more fine-tuning---without
-them, a few glyphs would get incorrect names---but the last two are
-quite essential, as the \texttt{msam10} and \texttt{msbm10} fonts
-incorrectly claim to have the coding scheme \texttt{TEX MATH
-SYMBOLS}.
-\begin{verbatim}
- \installfont{xma1000}{%
- yma1000 encoding mcin,%
- cmr10 encoding ot1upright,%
- cmmi10,%
- cmsy10 encoding omscal,%
- msam10 encoding msam,%
- msbm10 encoding msbm,%
- mccmhax,mccmkern,mcmissing,%
- cmsy10-base,cmsy10-extra%
- }{mc}{MC}{cm}{m}{n}{<<10->>}
-\end{verbatim}
-Also note the explicit \LaTeX\ size specification for the range
-``10\,pt and up''.
-
-The second example makes use of a \texttt{suffix} clause to combine
-the letters from one font with the digits from another.
-\begin{verbatim}
- \installfont{msbrj8t}{msbr8r,msbrc8r suffix /2,latin}{digit2,t1}
- {T1}{msbj}{m}{n}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-In this case, the glyph base contains the glyphs of Monotype Sabon
-(SabonMT)---under names such as \texttt{A} for `A', \texttt{a} for
-`a', and \texttt{one} for a lining digit one---as well as the
-glyphs of Monotype Sabon Small Caps and Oldstyle Figures
-(SabonMT-SCOSF)---under names such as \texttt{A/2} for `A',
-\texttt{a/2} for `\textsc{a}', and \texttt{one/2} for a hanging
-digit one. The \texttt{digit2.etx} file simply makes the definition
-\begin{verbatim}
- \setcommand\digit#1{#1/2}
-\end{verbatim}
-which causes \texttt{t1.etx} to put \texttt{zero/2} in slot 48 (digit
-zero), \texttt{one/2} in slot 49 etc., instead of as it normally
-would \texttt{zero} in slot 48, \texttt{one} in slot 49 and so on.
-The net effect is that the digits in the generated \texttt{msbrj8t}
-is from \texttt{msbrc8r} (SabonMT-SCOSF) but everything else is from
-\texttt{msbr8r} (SabonMT).
-
-The third example makes use of an \texttt{mtxasetx} clause to install
-(with its default encoding) a font for which creating an appropriate
-ETX file seems not worth the trouble.
-\begin{verbatim}
- \installrawfont{psyr}{psyr,\metrics
- \setint{xheight}{\height{alpha}}
- }{txtfdmns,psyr mtxasetx}{U}{psy}{m}{n}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-The effect of the second \texttt{psyr} is that \texttt{psyr.mtx} is
-read (in case there was no \texttt{psyr.mtx} then it is created from
-(hopefully) \texttt{psyr.afm}) and the information in it will form
-the glyph base. Because of the |\metrics| control sequence, the rest
-of that item will be interpreted as explicit metric commands
-modifying the glyph base, and thus the |\setint| command can provide
-a value for the \texttt{xheight} variable (there doesn't seem to be
-such a value in the AFM). Once the glyph base is completed, the
-|\install|\-|raw|\-|font| starts writing the file \texttt{psyr.pl}
-(that's for the first \texttt{psyr}). The encoding of that font will,
-because of the \texttt{psyr mtxasetx}, be the same as that used in
-\texttt{psyr.mtx}. Finally, the \texttt{txtfdmns} is for
-\texttt{txtfdmns.etx}, an ETX file which sets fontdimens 1--16 as for
-a \texttt{T1} encoded font but does not set any slots. Since
-\texttt{psyr.mtx} reinterpreted as an ETX file sets slots but no
-fontdimens, these complement each other nicely.
-
-
-
-\subsection{Bounding boxes}
-
-Han The Thanh has created an implementation of bounding box support
-for \fontinst, and it is a modified form of that support
-is distributed with \fontinst as the file \texttt{bbox.sty}. To load
-this, begin your command file with
-\begin{verbatim}
- \input fontinst.sty
- \input bbox.sty
-\end{verbatim}
-The reason for not making it default is that keeping track of bounding
-boxes increases some of \fontinst's memory requirements quite a lot.
-
-One important
-characteristic of this implementation is that the dimensions of the
-bounding box are not bundled into the same data structure (the
-|\g-|\meta{glyph} macros) as the glyph's width, height, depth, and
-italic correction are, but stored in a separate data structure (the
-|\gb-|\meta{glyph} macros). A glyph doesn't need to have its bounding
-box set, it is simply a piece of information that \fontinst
-will store if you tell it to and which you can later retrieve.
-
-The bounding box will be stored as coordinates of the sides in the
-normal AFM coordinate system. The commands for retrieving these
-coordinates are
-\begin{center}
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- \textbf{Command}& \textbf{Side}\\
- |\bbtop|\marg{glyph}& top ($y$-coordinate)\\
- |\bbbottom|\marg{glyph}& bottom ($y$-coordinate)\\
- |\bbleft|\marg{glyph}& left ($x$-coordinate)\\
- |\bbright|\marg{glyph}& right ($x$-coordinate)
- \end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-In Thanh's implementation the command names were |\ury|, |\lly|,
-|\llx|, and |\urx| respectively instead, but I think the former are
-easier to remember. If no bounding box has been set for a glyph then
-the above commands will instead report the corresponding coordinate of
-the glyph's \TeX\ box (i.e.\ |\height|\marg{glyph},
-|\neg{\depth|\marg{glyph}|}|, |0|, and |\width|\marg{glyph}
-respectively).
-
-The command for setting the bounding box of a glyph is
-\begin{quote}
- |\setglyphbb|\marg{glyph}\marg{left}\marg{bottom}\marg{right}%
- \marg{top}
-\end{quote}
-
-
-
-\section{Miscellaneous notes}
-
-\subsection{On verbatim, typewriter, and monowidth fonts}
-
-The verbatim, typewriter, and monowidth concepts are common sources
-of confusion for those who use \fontinst to install fonts
-with \LaTeX; in particular
-there are many misconceptions about the relation between them. The
-official view (of which not much has actually been brought forward)
-is that these concepts are really about three quite different things.
-
-A font is a \emph{monowidth} (monospaced, fixed-pitch) font if all
-glyphs in it have exactly the same width. Some font formats make
-special provisions for such fonts; the most notable example is the
-AFM format, where a single \texttt{CharWidth} keyword specifies the
-width for all glyphs in the font. \Fontinst responds to this
-by including the command
-\begin{quote}
- |\setint{monowidth}{1}|
-\end{quote}
-in the MTX file generated from an AFM, but that is everything that is
-hard-wired into the program. That a font is monowidth is however
-something that one should take note of when installing it for \TeX,
-as it means many of the glyphs in it have such a strange appearance
-that they are (pretty much) useless. The \texttt{endash} is for
-example usually only half as long as the \texttt{hyphen} and the
-letters in ligature glyphs are only half as wide as normal letters.
-Many of the ETX and MTX files that come with \fontinst
-contain special commands to avoid making use of such degenerate
-glyphs.
-
-That a font is a \emph{typewriter} font really only means that it has
-a typewriterish look about it. The two most familiar typewriter fonts
-are probably Computer Modern Typewriter (\texttt{cmtt}) and Courier.
-Both of these fonts are monowidth, but there is no absolute rule about
-this. One of the standard \TeX\ fonts is for example Computer Modern
-Variable-width Typewriter (\texttt{cmvtt}), which is not a monowidth
-font, as Figure~\ref{Fig:TTvsVTT} shows.
-\begin{figure}
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- \texttt{cmtt}:& \fontfamily{cmtt}\selectfont
- The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.\\
- \texttt{cmvtt}:& \fontfamily{cmvtt}\selectfont
- The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{Two typewriter fonts}
- \label{Fig:TTvsVTT}
-\end{figure}
-
-The verbatim concept has very little to do with fonts at all; in
-\LaTeX\ it is considered to be a property of the environment
-(\texttt{verbatim}, \texttt{macrocode}, etc.) rather than a property
-of the font. The connection there is with fonts is that the encoding
-of the font must contain visible ASCII (as defined in Appendix~C
-of \emph{The \TeX book}%~\cite{TeXbook}
-) as a subset for the text to
-be rendered correctly. The \texttt{cmtt} family is the only one amongst
-the original Computer Modern fonts which meets this criterion and
-that is the primary grounds for the idea that these three concepts
-should be connected. Today that reason is at best a very weak one, as
-all \texttt{T1}-encoded fonts also meet the criterion of containing
-visible ASCII as a subset.
-
-A circumstance which has probably added to the confusion is that
-\texttt{OT1} is usually claimed to be an encoding. In reality the
-Computer Modern fonts that are declared in \LaTeX\ as being
-\texttt{OT1} display as many as five different encodings, as shown in
-Table~\ref{Tab:OT1-fonts}.
-\begin{table}
- \begin{tabular}{lccc}
- & \texttt{TEX TEXT}&
- \begin{tabular}[b]{c}\texttt{TEX TEXT WITHOUT}\\
- \texttt{F-LIGATURES}\end{tabular}&
- \texttt{TEX TYPEWRITER TEXT}\\
- \noalign{\medskip}
- non-italic&
- \begin{tabular}{l}
- \texttt{cmb10}\\
- \texttt{cmbx5}--\texttt{12}\\
- \texttt{cmbxsl10}\\
- \texttt{cmdunh10}\\
- \texttt{cmff10}\\
- \texttt{cmfib8}\\
- \texttt{cmr6}--\texttt{17}\\
- \texttt{cmsl8}--\texttt{12}\\
- \texttt{cmss8}--\texttt{17}\\
- \texttt{cmssbx10}\\
- \texttt{cmssdc10}\\
- \texttt{cmssi8}--\texttt{17}\\
- \texttt{cmssq8}\\
- \texttt{cmssqi8}\\
- \texttt{cmvtt10}
- \end{tabular}&
- \begin{tabular}{l}
- \texttt{cmcsc8}--\texttt{10}\\
- \texttt{cmr5}
- \end{tabular}&
- \begin{tabular}{l}
- \texttt{cmsltt10}\\
- \texttt{cmtcsc10}\\
- \texttt{cmtt8}--\texttt{12}
- \end{tabular}\\
- \noalign{\medskip}
- italic&
- \begin{tabular}{l}
- \texttt{cmbxti10}\\
- \texttt{cmfi10}\\
- \texttt{cmti7}--\texttt{12}\\
- \texttt{cmu10}
- \end{tabular}&&
- \begin{tabular}{l}
- \texttt{cmitt10}
- \end{tabular}
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{``\texttt{OT1}-encoded'' Computer Modern fonts, collected
- according to the actual font encoding}
- \label{Tab:OT1-fonts}
-\end{table}
-Since most monowidth fonts are only used for setting verbatim text,
-there is some code in \texttt{ot1.etx} which automatically chooses a
-\texttt{TEX TYPEWRITER TEXT} encoding for the font when the
-\texttt{monowidth} integer is set. The only reason for this is the
-guess that this is what the user wanted.
-
-
-
-\section*{Acknowledgements}
-
-I'd like to thank all of the \fontinst $\alpha$-testers, especially
-Karl Berry, Damian Cugley, Steve Grahthwohl, Yannis Haralambous, Alan
-Hoenig, Rob Hutchings, Constantin Kahn, Peter Busk Laursen, Ciar{\'a}n {\'O}
-Duibh{\'\i}n, Hilmar Schlegel, Paul Thompson, Norman Walsh and John Wells,
-who made excellent bug-catchers!
-
-Thanks to Barry Smith, Frank Mittelbach, and especially Sebastian
-Rahtz for many useful email discussions on how virtual fonts should
-interact with \LaTeXe.
-
-Thanks to Karl Berry and Damain Cugley for detailed comments on this
-documentation.
-
-Thanks to David Carlisle for the use of his \texttt{trig} macros for
-calculating trigonometry.
-
-
-% \section*{Warranty and distribution}
-%
-% There is no warranty for the \fontinst package, to the extent
-% permitted by applicable law. Except when otherwise stated in writing,
-% the author provides the program `as is' without warranty of any kind,
-% either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the
-% implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
-% purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the
-% program is with you. Should the package prove defective, you assume
-% the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction.
-%
-% In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing
-% will the author be liable to you for damages, including any general,
-% special, incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or
-% inability to use the program (including but not limited to loss of
-% data or data being rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or
-% third parties or a failure of the program to operate with any other
-% programs), even if such holder or other party has been advised of the
-% possibility of such damages.
-%
-% Redistribution of unchanged files is allowed provided that all files
-% listed in the \texttt{MANIFEST} file are distributed.
-%
-% If you receive only some of these files from someone, or if you
-% receieve altered files, then complain!
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.dvi b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.dvi
deleted file mode 100644
index d272df5088e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.dvi
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f517608d16..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e7c485ab6c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/intro98.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1330 +0,0 @@
-%%% ====================================================================
-%%% @LaTeX-file{
-%%% author = "Alan Jeffrey and Rowland McDonnell and
-%%% Ulrik Vieth and Lars Hellstr{\"o}m",
-%%% version = "1.927",
-%%% date = "28 July 2004",
-%%% time = "23:20:27 CEST",
-%%% filename = "intro98.tex",
-%%% email = "fontinst@tug.org",
-%%% checksum = "",
-%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
-%%% keywords = "fontinst, TeX, PostScript, documentation",
-%%% supported = "yes",
-%%% abstract = "This is documentation for the fontinst
-%%% font installation package.",
-%%% package = "fontinst",
-%%% dependencies = "ltxguide.cls, url.sty, xspace.sty"
-%%% }
-%%% ====================================================================
-
-% Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 Alan Jeffrey
-
-% Modified by Rowland McDonnell June 1998
-% Modified and revised by Ulrik Vieth June 1998
-
-\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxguide}
-\usepackage[OT1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{url,xspace}
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-%\renewcommand\rmdefault{ppl}
-%\renewcommand\rmdefault{padx}
-%\renewcommand\rmdefault{pmnx}
-
-
-% Title page and running heads.
-
-\makeatletter
-\newcommand{\subtitle}[1]{\renewcommand{\@subtitle}{#1}}
-\newcommand{\version}[1]{\renewcommand{\@version}{#1}}
-\newcommand{\illustration}[1]{\renewcommand{\@illustration}{#1}}
-
-\newcommand{\@subtitle}{}
-\newcommand{\@version}{???}
-\newcommand{\@illustration}{cover.eps}
-
-\pagestyle{myheadings}
-\AtBeginDocument{\markright{\small\itshape
- \@author\hfill\@title: \@subtitle\quad}}
-
-
-\renewcommand{\maketitle}{{%
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
- \normalfont\centering
- \null
- {\fontsize{100}{100}\textit{\@title}}%
- \par\bigskip
- {\Large\textbf{\@subtitle}}%
- \vfill
- \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{\@illustration}%
- \vfill
- {\Large\textbf{%
- \@author\\[\smallskipamount] \@title~v\@version
- \quad\textperiodcentered\quad \@date}}%
- \clearpage
-}}
-\makeatother
-
-
-% Set lists tighter (assuming non-zero \parskip).
-
-\makeatletter
-\renewcommand{\@listI}{%
- \leftmargin\leftmargini
- \parsep\medskipamount
- \itemsep\z@ % + parsep
- \topsep\z@ % + parskip
- \partopsep\z@
-}
-\makeatother
-
-% Set spacing around captions.
-
-\setlength{\abovecaptionskip}{\medskipamount}
-\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{\medskipamount}
-
-% Markup for logos, file types, programs, etc.
-
-\newcommand*{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\ #1}\xspace}
-
-\newcommand*{\OzTeX}{O\kern-.03em z\kern-.15em\TeX}
-\newcommand*{\OzMF}{O\kern-.03em zMF}
-\newcommand*{\OzTools}{O\kern-.03em z\kern-.15em Tools}
-
-\newcommand{\PS}{Post\-Script\xspace}
-\newcommand{\TT}{True\-Type\xspace}
-
-\newcommand*{\setfilename}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\setdotfilename}[1]{\setfilename{.#1}}
-\newcommand*{\setpackagename}[1]{\textsc{#1}}
-
-\newcommand{\dvips} {\setpackagename{dvips}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Dvips} {\setpackagename{Dvips}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\fontinst}{\setpackagename{font\-inst}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Fontinst}{\setpackagename{Font\-inst}\xspace}
-
-% \show\fontname
-\newcommand{\fontnamekb}{fontname\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Fontnamekb}{Fontname\xspace}
-
-\newcommand{\mf} {\setfilename{mf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Mf} {\setfilename{Mf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\vf} {\setfilename{vf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Vf} {\setfilename{Vf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pl} {\setfilename{pl}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Pl} {\setfilename{Pl}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\fd} {\setfilename{fd}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Fd} {\setfilename{Fd}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pk} {\setfilename{pk}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Pk} {\setfilename{Pk}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\afm}{\setfilename{afm}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Afm}{\setfilename{Afm}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\vpl}{\setfilename{vpl}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Vpl}{\setfilename{Vpl}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\tfm}{\setfilename{tfm}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Tfm}{\setfilename{Tfm}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\mtx}{\setfilename{mtx}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Mtx}{\setfilename{Mtx}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\etx}{\setfilename{etx}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Etx}{\setfilename{Etx}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pfa}{\setfilename{pfa}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Pfa}{\setfilename{Pfa}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pfb}{\setfilename{pfb}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Pfb}{\setfilename{Pfb}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\dvi}{\setfilename{dvi}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Dvi}{\setfilename{Dvi}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\ttf}{\setfilename{ttf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\Ttf}{\setfilename{Ttf}\xspace}
-
-\newcommand{\vftovp}{\setpackagename{vftovp}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\vptovf}{\setpackagename{vptovf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\pltotf}{\setpackagename{pltotf}\xspace}
-\newcommand{\tftopl}{\setpackagename{tftopl}\xspace}
-
-
-% Stolen from Dr Knuth
-\makeatletter % borrow the private macros of PLAIN (with care)
-\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant
-\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}} % hexadecimal constant
-% macros for font tables
-\def\oddline#1{\cr
- \noalign{\nointerlineskip}
- \multispan{19}\hrulefill&
- \setbox0=\hbox{\lower 2.3pt\hbox{\hex{#1x}}}\smash{\box0}\cr
- \noalign{\nointerlineskip}}
-\def\evenline{\cr\noalign{\hrule}}
-\def\chartstrut{\lower4.5pt\vbox to14pt{}}
-\def\beginchart#1{$$\global\count@=0 #1
- \halign to\hsize\bgroup
- \chartstrut##\tabskip0pt plus10pt&
- &\hfil##\hfil&\vrule##\cr
- \lower6.5pt\null
- &&&\oct0&&\oct1&&\oct2&&\oct3&&\oct4&&\oct5&&\oct6&&\oct7&\evenline}
-\def\endchart{\raise11.5pt\null&&&\hex 8&&\hex 9&&\hex A&&\hex B&
- &\hex C&&\hex D&&\hex E&&\hex F&\cr\egroup$$}
-\def\*{\global\advance\count@ by1 }
-\def\:{\setbox0=\hbox{\char\count@}%
- \ifdim\ht0>7.5pt\reposition
- \else\ifdim\dp0>2.5pt\reposition\fi\fi
- \box0\global\advance\count@ by1 }
-\def\reposition{\setbox0=\hbox{$\vcenter{\kern2pt\box0\kern2pt}$}}
-\def\smallchart{%
-%\global\advance\count@ by16
- &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0
- &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1
- &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2
- &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3
- &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4
- &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5
- &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6
- &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7
- &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline}
-
-\def\bigchart{%
-%\global\advance\count@ by16
- &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0
- &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1
- &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2
- &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3
- &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4
- &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5
- &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6
- &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7
- &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{20x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline8
- &\oct{21x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{22x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline9
- &\oct{23x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{24x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{A}
- &\oct{25x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{26x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{B}
- &\oct{27x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{30x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{C}
- &\oct{31x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{32x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{D}
- &\oct{33x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{34x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{E}
- &\oct{35x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline
- &\oct{36x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline{F}
- &\oct{37x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline}
-
-% \font\xrm = cmr10 at 10pt % change this line to test font
-% \beginchart\xrm \normalchart \endchart
-
-\newcommand{\smallfontchart}[1]{%
- \font\xrm = #1 \beginchart\xrm \smallchart \endchart}
-\newcommand{\bigfontchart}[1]{%
- \font\xrm = #1 \beginchart\xrm \bigchart \endchart}
-
-% \smallfontchart{cmr10 at 10pt}
-% \bigfontchart{ecrm1000 at 10pt}
-\makeatother
-% End stolen from Dr Knuth
-
-
-
-\title{fontinst}
-\subtitle{Font installation software for \TeX}
-\author{Alan Jeffrey and Rowland McDonnell}
-\illustration{roadmap.eps}
-\version{1.8}
-\date{30 June 1998}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle
-
-
-\begin{small}
- This is the tutorial part of the 1998 \fontinst manual, chiefly
- written by Rowland McDonnell and conveying his then-view on related
- subjects. Although most of it is still correct,
- the passing of time has rendered it somewhat antiquated, and the
- average current (2004) user new to \fontinst would probably find
- Philipp Lehman's \emph{The Font Installation Guide}
- (\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/Type1fonts/fontinstallationguide/})
- more relevant.
-\end{small}
-
-\tableofcontents
-
-
-\clearpage
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-The \fontinst package is a set of \TeX\ macros written to create
-virtual fonts for use with \TeX. Its main use is creating the
-files needed so you can use PostScript Type 1 fonts with \LaTeX.
-
-\Fontinst needs information about the fonts it works with. This
-information needs to be supplied in an Adobe Font Metric (\afm) or
-\TeX\ Property List (\pl) file. \pl files can be created from
-\tfm files using \tftopl, a program normally included with a \TeX\
-system.
-
-The job that \fontinst does is complicated, but it can be used for
-many tasks by people who are not \TeX\ font wizards. Having said
-that, you do need to understand at least the basics of \LaTeXe's
-font selection mechanism, which is documented in
-\texttt{fntguide.tex}, part of the standard \LaTeX\ distribution.
-\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/fntguide.tex}
-will fetch a copy if you don't have one to hand.
-
-To get the most benefit out of \fontinst, it's important to
-understand and use Karl Berry's `\Fontnamekb' naming scheme. The
-definitive version of this is available from your nearest CTAN
-server. The following URL will fetch all the files needed
-compressed into a single ZIP archive:
-\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/info/fontname.zip}. I
-suggest that you print out the \Fontnamekb documentation and have
-it handy when you're learning about \fontinst.
-
-The \fontinst package:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Is written in \TeX, for maximum portability (at the cost of
- speed).
-\item Supports the OT1 (Computer Modern) and T1 (Cork) encodings.
-\item Allows fonts to be generated with arbitrary `fake'
- characters; for example the `ij' character can be faked if
- necessary by putting an `i' next to a `j'.
-\item Allows caps and small caps fonts with letter spacing and
- kerning.
-\item Allows kerning to be shared between characters, for example
- `ij' can be kerned on the left as if it were an `i' and on the
- right as if it were a `j'. This is useful, since many
- PostScript fonts only include kerning information for characters
- without diacriticals.
-\item Allows the generation of math fonts with \verb|nextlarger|,
- \verb|varchar|, and arbitrary font dimensions.
-\item Allows more than one PostScript font to contribute to a
- \TeX\ font, for example the `ffi' ligatures for a font can be
- taken from the Expert encoding, if you have it.
-\item Can automatically generate a \fd file for use with \LaTeXe.
-\item Can be customized by the user to deal with arbitrary font
- encodings.
-\end{itemize}
-Fontinst has been a stable piece of software since mid-1994. All
-further updates will be upwardly compatible with the interface
-described in this document.
-
-\subsection{What does \fontinst do?}
-
-\Fontinst is a tool written in \TeX\ that can create the various
-extra files needed so you can use \PS fonts with \LaTeX\ and \TeX.
-It can read in \afm files, and produces the necessary \vpl, \pl,
-and \fd files to use the fonts (the human-readable \vpl and \pl
-files produced by \fontinst are turned into the machine-readable
-\vf and \tfm forms by \vptovf and \pltotf). It does not help you
-configure your DVI driver.
-
-There also exists a \texttt{perl} front-end to \fontinst, intended
-specifically for use with a Unix \TeX\ system, which takes care of
-routine tasks such as running \vptovf and \pltotf on the generated
-files after \fontinst has finished it's job. It also generates a
-font map file for use with \dvips.
-
-\Fontinst's main job is creating \vf files (virtual fonts). Not
-all \TeX\ systems can use them. As far as I know, all current
-(1998) free and shareware \TeX\ systems can; virtual fonts have
-been in widespread use with \TeX\ since 1990. If you have a TeX
-system that can't use virtual fonts, \fontinst is most likely
-useless to you.
-
-There are some nice things about having a tool written in \TeX\ to
-do this: it's completely portable and you can modify its behaviour
-using \TeX\ commands. The only real problem is that it's
-relatively slow: you can expect a typical \fontinst run to take
-something like 10--20 minutes on, say, a 40~MHz 80486SX PC or a
-25~MHz 68LC040 Macintosh.
-
-\Fontinst can do its work on any font for which you have a
-corresponding \afm or \tfm metric file, so it's not limited to
-working with \PS fonts; I have used it to produce the files I
-needed to use \TT fonts with \LaTeX. Whether or not you can do
-this depends on whether or not you have suitable metric files and
-whether or not your \TeX\ system can use \TT fonts. In
-particular, the pdf\TeX\ program supports \TT fonts and includes a
-utility \texttt{ttf2afm} to generate \afm files from \ttf fonts.
-
-Some people have used \fontinst to produce `special effects' with
-normal \TeX\ fonts. One example is the \setpackagename{eco} set
-of fonts (available from CTAN:
-\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/fonts/eco/}). These fonts
-are the same as the standard EC (European Modern) fonts, but with
-normal numerals replaced with old style numerals --
-\oldstylenums{12345} rather than 12345 -- everywhere except in
-maths mode.
-
-\subsection{Installation}
-
-To install \fontinst, put the contents of the \url{inputs/tex},
-\url{inputs/etx}, \url{inputs/mtx} and \url{examples} directories
-into a directory read by \TeX, for example
-\url{TEXMF/tex/generic/fontinst}.
-
-When you use \fontinst, you need to make sure that the \afm and
-\pl files it will work on are in a directory searched by \TeX.
-
-If you are using \texttt{web2c} \TeX\ on a Unix system with the
-\TeX\ directory structure (TDS), you might put all the \afm files
-in subdirectories of \url{TEXMF/fonts/afm/*}. And then say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- setenv TEXINPUTS $TEXMF/fonts/afm//::
-\end{verbatim}%$
-Note that \pl files are not normally kept in \TeX\ installations, so
-if you want to use MF fonts with \fontinst you have to generate the
-corresponding \pl files from \tfm files and put them in your working
-directory before running \fontinst.
-
-You could adopt a similar strategy with other \TeX\ systems:
-create directories for the required files and then change the
-relevant parameter (\url{input_folders} in the default
-configuration file with \OzTeX, for example).
-
-The approach I use is this: I write a file containing commands for
-\fontinst to process, and put the \afm and \pl files needed in the
-same directory as that file. When \fontinst has finished working,
-I delete the \afm and \pl files because they are not needed and
-waste space on my hard disc drive. Some application programs on
-some computers need \afm files, so it's not always a good idea to
-remove them completely.
-
-\subsection{Why do we need \fontinst?}
-
-\TeX\ refers to characters by number when it's typesetting. When
-you use a command like \verb|\i|, \TeX\ puts a number (16 if
-you're using OT1, 25 if you're using T1) into the \dvi file. If
-you're using a font designed for use with \TeX, this number will
-correspond to the character `\i'. Assuming OT1 encoding for the
-moment, when you come to print out your \dvi file, the DVI driver
-will see the number 16 in the \dvi file, and select the character
-that sits in position 16 of the corresponding printer font file (a
-\pk file in the case of normal \TeX\ fonts). Unless something has
-gone wrong, that will result in the character `\i' being placed on
-the page.
-
-It's useful to think of these numbers and the actual characters
-corresponding to each number as sets called `encodings'. A
-particular set of characters are assigned particular numbers. An
-example of an encoding is shown in table~\ref{OT1table}.
-
-\TeX\ began life using 7-bit fonts. This means the original \TeX\
-fonts used the numbers 0--127 to represent characters:
-128~characters per font. \TeX\ can now use 8-bit fonts:
-256~numbers from 0--255, but even so, most typesetting with \TeX\
-still uses the original 7-bit encoding, now called `OT1' (Old
-\TeX~1 encoding). This has a correspondance between numbers and
-characters shown in table~\ref{OT1table}. The numbers used in
-that table are hexadecimal and octal because it makes for a neat
-table and anyway I stole the code to generate it from Donald Knuth
-and that's how he did it.
-
-\begin{table}[!t]
-\smallfontchart{cmr10 at 10pt}
-\caption{The OT1 font encoding}\label{OT1table}
-\end{table}
-
-Returning to the example above, if you've a number 16 in your \dvi
-file (expecting `\i', a dotless~i), but rather than printing
-with an OT1 encoded font, you print using a non re-encoded \PS
-font in Adobe standard encoding, you'll get a blank, because the
-Adobe standard encoding has nothing in that character position.
-
-There are several ways round this problem; I'll consider two cases
-here. If you are using \LaTeX\ you can tell it about a new
-encoding and re-define the commands that produce characters like
-`\i' that live in different positions in different encodings, or
-you can use a tool to re-encode the font so that it has the
-expected characters in the appropriate positions.
-
-Re-encoding is the approach \fontinst uses: it can produce files
-to map the characters in the new font to one of \TeX's existing
-encodings; this works with formats other than \LaTeX.
-
-The first approach is used to define the standard encodings that
-\LaTeX\ uses. See, for example, the file \texttt{ot1enc.def} that
-comes with the current \LaTeX\ distribution, which defines the a
-few commands that refer to characters which aren't in the
-positions \TeX\ would otherwise assume. This works only with
-modern versions of \LaTeX.
-
-The second approach is used to allow you to use fonts in other
-encodings with any dialect of \TeX. It has the some advantages
-over the first method: it works with any \TeX\ format; and it
-improves portability, because you can typeset a document using a
-standard \TeX\ encoding, sure that the same document will print
-correctly on a different kind of computer using a font with a
-different encoding. For example, you might say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \usepackage{times}
-\end{verbatim}
-in the preamble of your document. On my computer, that means my
-DVI driver will use a Macintosh encoded \TT version of Times. On
-your computer, it might mean the dvi driver will use a Unicode
-encoded \PS version of Times-Roman. The results will be identical
-in either case, without needing to modify the document.
-
-\subsection{How do you use \fontinst?}
-
-\Fontinst works on \afm files named (more-or-less) according to
-Karl Berry's font naming scheme (see
-\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/info/fontname} at CTAN).
-Let's say you want to use the Adobe Times fonts. You can get the
-metric files for this font from CTAN:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{small}
-\begin{tabular}{ll}
- \emph{Location of file at CTAN} & \emph{Rename to} \\
- \url{fonts/psfonts/adobeafm/base35/tib_____.afm} &
- \texttt{ptmb8a.afm} \\
- \url{fonts/psfonts/adobeafm/base35/tibi____.afm} &
- \texttt{ptmbi8a.afm} \\
- \url{fonts/psfonts/adobeafm/base35/tii_____.afm} &
- \texttt{ptmri8a.afm} \\
- \url{fonts/psfonts/adobeafm/base35/tir_____.afm} &
- \texttt{ptmr8a.afm}
-\end{tabular}
-\end{small}
-\end{center}
-The new name is the name you should give the \tfm files so that
-\fontinst understands what each file contains. The initial `|p|'
-means `Adobe'; `|tm|' means `Times'; `|b|' bold, `|r|' roman,
-`|i|' italic; and `|8a|' means `Adobe standard encoding'.
-
-The simplest use of \fontinst is to put the four \afm files in the
-same directory as \texttt{fontinst.sty} and run \TeX\ on
-\texttt{fontinst.sty}. At the \verb|*| prompt type:
-\begin{verbatim}
- *\latinfamily{ptm}{} \bye
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Some time later (about 17 minutes on my rather old computer),
-\fontinst will have finished, having created:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Two \pl files for each \afm file
-\item One \vpl file for each \TeX\ font
-\item One \fd file for each family
-\end{itemize}
-The \pl files come in pairs: for example, \texttt{ptmb8a.pl} and
-\texttt{ptmb8r.pl}. The |8a| version has the same encoding as the
-original font; the |8r| version is re-encoded to |TeXBase1| (|8r|)
-encoding, and is the font that is the base on which the T1 and OT1
-encoded versions are based on. The raw |8a| (Adobe standard)
-encoded font is not normally used.
-
-These can be converted to \TeX\ fonts using \pltotf or \vptovf.
-If you have \OzTeX, launch \OzMF, select \pltotf (or \vptovf) from
-the Tools menu, and say `Do all files'.
-
-If you use the \texttt{bash} shell on a Unix system, you can
-process all files using these one-liners at the \verb|$| prompt:
-\begin{verbatim}
- $ for f in in *.pl; do pltotf $f; done
- $ for f in in *.vpl; do vptovf $f; done
-\end{verbatim}%$
-(This assumes that \pltotf and \vptovf can deduce the file names
-of the corresponding \tfm and \vf files automatically.)
-
-You should then:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Move the \tfm files to your \TeX\ fonts directory\\
- (e.g.~\url{TEXMFLOCAL/fonts/tfm/*}).
-\item Move the \vf files to your virtual fonts directory\\
- (e.g.~\url{TEXMFLOCAL/fonts/vf/*}).
-\item Move the \fd files to your \TeX\ inputs directory\\
- (e.g.~\url{TEXMFLOCAL/tex/latex/psfonts/*}).
-\end{itemize}
-If your \TeX\ installation is organized using the \TeX\ directory
-structure (TDS), it is customary to subdivide the \tfm and \vf
-files into subdirectories by supplier and typeface name.
-
-The \pl, \vpl, and \mtx files are debris that can now be deleted.
-\mtx files are font metric files \fontinst creates for its own use
-from \afm and \pl files. They're just more convenient for \TeX\
-to read than other forms -- think of them as \fontinst readable
-\afm and \pl files.
-
-By now, you have all the files in place to produce a \dvi file
-using the new fonts. You can make Adobe Times the default roman
-font in your document by putting this in your preamble:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\TeX\ will now happily produce a perfectly good \dvi file
-including the new font, which your DVI driver will choke on
-because you've not yet told it about the new fonts. Exactly how
-you do this depends on the dvi driver, but they all need the same
-information: the name of a \TeX\ font; the printer font name it
-corresponds to; some information to handle an re-encoding needed;
-and (in the case of a \PS driver) perhaps an instruction to
-download the font to the printer. You don't need to download the
-Times font to a \PS printer, because Times is built in to every
-\PS printer.
-
-If you use \dvips, these lines added to your \texttt{psfonts.map}
-file will do the job:
-\begin{verbatim}
- ptmr8r Times-Roman "TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc
- ptmri8r Times-Italic "TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc
- ptmb8r Times-Bold "TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc
- ptmbi8r Times-BoldItalic "TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc
- ptmro8r Times-Roman "0.167 SlantFont TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc
- ptmbo8r Times-Bold "0.167 SlantFont TeXBase1Encoding ReEncodeFont" <<8r.enc
-\end{verbatim}
-And now you can print a \dvi file containing the new fonts. If
-you really do want to use the `raw' |8a| encoded fonts for some
-reason, you need to add these lines to your \texttt{psfonts.map}
-file:
-\begin{verbatim}
- ptmr8a Times-Roman
- ptmri8a Times-Italic
- ptmb8a Times-Bold
- ptmbi8a Times-BoldItalic
- ptmro8a Times-Roman "0.167 SlantFont"
- ptmbo8a Times-Bold "0.167 SlantFont"
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Assuming that you're using the \fd file that \fontinst has
-produced, and that you've asked for the Adobe Times family (|ptm|)
-in medium series (|m|) and upright shape (|n| for normal) using
-the NFSS font selection commands:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
- \rmfamily \mdseries \upshape
-\end{verbatim}
-Assuming further that you are using the \fd file \texttt{t1ptm.fd}
-produced by \fontinst, the \TeX\ font (\tfm file) \texttt{ptmr8t.tfm}
-will be selected by the above commands, as you can see from the
-relevant line in \texttt{t1ptm.fd}:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1}{ptm}{m}{n}{<<->> ptmr8t}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-This is what happens:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item \TeX\ typesets your document using the font metric file
- \texttt{ptmr8t.tfm}; this is the font that is put in the \dvi
- file.
-\item \Dvips looks at the \dvi file, and sees a reference to the
- font \texttt{ptmr8t}.
-\item \Dvips searches for a \vf file corresponding to
- \texttt{ptmr8t}; when it finds \texttt{ptmr8t.vf}, it knows it
- has a virtual font on its hands.
- %\footnote{This is a slight lie--why?}
-\item \Dvips follows the instructions in the \vf file, which map
- characters in \texttt{ptmr8t.tfm} to characters in the font
- \texttt{ptmr8r.tfm}. That is, when it sees a number~25 in the
- \dvi file (dotless~i -- `\i' -- in T1 encoding), it replaces it
- with a number~17, which is a dotless~i in |8r| encoding.
-\item Then \dvips looks up the name of each number according to
- the scheme given in the file \texttt{8r.enc}, and replaces each
- number with the name of the character, in this case, number~17
- is listed as `dotlessi'.
-\item And finally, \dvips tells the printer to print the named
- character.
-\end{itemize}
-
-Not all DVI drivers can manage re-encoding as well as \dvips can.
-For example, \OzTeX's built-in non-\PS \dvi driver can only work
-with numbers, so if I'm using a \PS font, I can't print characters
-(such as Eth) that don't have a number in Macintosh text encoding
-unless I use \dvips and print on a \PS printer. \Dvips works with
-character names, so it's not subject to this restriction. In the
-example above, \OzTeX\ would replace the number~17 for `dotlessi'
-in |8r| encoding with a number~245 for `dotlessi' in Macintosh
-text encoding.
-
-The details of the \LaTeXe{} font selection scheme are described
-in \emph{\LaTeXe{} font selection} (distributed with \LaTeXe\ as
-the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}) and \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion}
-(Goossens, Mittelbach and Samarin, Addison-Wesley).
-%You might also find useful the file \url{info/simple-nfss.tex}
-%available at your nearest comprehensive \TeX\ archive network
-%(CTAN) FTP server.
-
-The files you need to use Times, Helvetica, Courier, and the rest
-of the `standard' \PS fonts are distributed as part of the
-\setpackagename{PSNFSS} bundle available from CTAN, so there's no
-need to create new files to use these fonts.
-
-A more involved example of \fontinst use can be seen in the file
-\texttt{fontptcm.tex} which creates the files you need to use a
-combination of Times, Symbol, Zapf Chancery and Computer Modern as
-\TeX\ math fonts.
-
-
-\section{Installing your own font family}
-
-The \fontinst package has a command \verb|\latinfamily| meant to
-do most of the work to install a `normal' set (family) of roman
-text fonts from Adobe. Assuming you have a set of \afm files to
-match the fonts you wish to use, the first step is to rename the
-\afm files according to the \Fontnamekb naming scheme.
-
-A `normal' set of text fonts usually includes the basic upright
-roman version, bold, italic, and bold italic. Sometimes there
-will also be small caps versions, perhaps some `expert' fonts, and
-maybe some other weights such as light, medium, semi bold, black
-or ultra bold.
-
-The most important point to note is this: no matter what sort of
-computer you're using and no matter what font encoding it uses
-normally, \afm files for text fonts are almost always in |8a|
-encoding (Adobe standard encoding), so the \afm files when renamed
-normally end in |8a|.
-
-A typical set of four \afm files re-named for use with \fontinst
-is this:
-\begin{verbatim}
- ptmr8r.afm Times-Roman
- ptmri8r.afm Times-Italic
- ptmb8r.afm Times-Bold
- ptmbi8r.afm Times-BoldItalic
-\end{verbatim}
-Not all \afm files use |8a| encoding. If you open an \afm file
-using a text editor, you'll see a line looking like this somewhere
-near the top:
-\begin{verbatim}
- EncodingScheme AdobeStandardEncoding
-\end{verbatim}
-and if you see exactly that, the \afm file should end with |8a|.
-If you see something like this:
-\begin{verbatim}
- EncodingScheme FontSpecific
-\end{verbatim}
-have a look at the name of the font in the \afm file. If you see
-something like this:
-\begin{verbatim}
- FontName AGaramondExp-Regular
- FullName Adobe Garamond Regular Expert
-\end{verbatim}
-you have an `expert' encoded font on your hands, and the \afm file
-should end with |8x| to indicate this to \fontinst. An |8x|
-encoded font contains extra glyphs like old style numerals, small
-capital letters, more ligatures, and so on.
-
-%% UV: taken out -- repeated below
-%%
-%If you have an expert font, you can tell \fontinst to use it when
-%it's processing a \verb|\latinfamily| command by putting an `|x|'
-%on the end of the family name:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \latinfamily{padx}{}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%If you want to tell \fontinst to use expert fonts to install fonts
-%with old style numerals, you can do so by putting an `|j|' on the
-%end of the family name:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \latinfamily{padj}{}
-%\end{verbatim}
-
-The |\latinfamily| command is used like this:
-\begin{decl}
- |\latinfamily|\arg{family}\arg{commands}
-\end{decl}
-This installs a Latin family of fonts.
-
-For example, to install Adobe Times, you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \latinfamily{ptm}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-The \textit{commands} issued by \LaTeX\ each time a font from that
-family is loaded. This is most often used with typewriter fonts,
-to switch off hyphenation. For example, Adobe Courier can be
-installed with:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \latinfamily{pcr}{\hyphenchar\font=-1}
-\end{verbatim}
-Once the installation is over (which may take some time) the fonts
-can be used in \LaTeX\ by selecting an appropriate
-\verb|\fontfamily|, for example Adobe Times can be selected with:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont
-\end{verbatim}
-If the fourth letter of the family name is `|x|' then \fontinst
-will use expert fonts in creating the fonts. If the fourth letter
-is `|j|' (or for backward compatibility `|9|') then \fontinst will
-use expert fonts to create fonts with old style digits.
-
-For example, to install Adobe Garamond using expert fonts, you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \latinfamily{padx}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-To install Adobe Garamond using expert fonts with oldstyle digits,
-you say:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \latinfamily{padj}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-When you have expert fonts, and you've told \fontinst to use
-them, it will carry on as normal, but the resulting font family
-will have the name `|padx|' or `|padj|', and it will use expert
-glyphs whenever possible, so you'll have a real (rather than
-faked) small caps font, real (rather than faked) `ffl' ligatures,
-and so on.
-
-Before using these commands, you will need to make sure that you
-have the Adobe Font Metric (\afm) files for the fonts, and that
-they have appropriate names. The \fontinst package uses the
-\LaTeX\ convention for naming fonts, and uses a \emph{font family}
-name which consists of:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item a \emph{supplier} (or foundry), such as `|p|' for Adobe.
-\item a \emph{typeface}, such as `|ad|' for Adobe Garamond.
-\item up to two \emph{variants}, such as `|j|' or `|x|' for `old
- style digits' or `expert'.
-\end{itemize}
-So the family name `|padj|' indicates Adobe Garamond with old
-style digits. Note that the variants `|j|' or `|x|' are
-interpreted by \fontinst itself and do not appear in external font
-names, whereas other variants are passed through as part of the
-font names. (This is needed for families which have a sans serif
-or typewriter variant.)
-
-The \emph{supplier} must be one letter, and the \emph{typeface}
-must be two (this is an attempt to fit all filenames into MS-DOS
-format). Each variant is one letter. The full list of foundries,
-typefaces, shapes and variants is given in Karl Berry's
-`\emph{Filenames for fonts}' (available by anonymous FTP from
-\url{ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/tex-archive/info/fontname}), but the more
-common ones are given in
-Tables~\ref{Tab:foundry}--\ref{Tab:typeface}.
-
-\begin{table}[!t]
-\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
- \small
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- |b| & Bitstream \\
- |f| & `free' (public domain) \\
- |h| & Bigelow \& Holmes \\
- |i| & ITC \\
- |l| & Linotype \\
- |m| & Monotype \\
- |p| & Adobe (|p| for \PS) \\
- |r| & `raw' (obsolete) \\
- |u| & URW \\
- |z| & bizarre
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{A partial list of foundries}
- \label{Tab:foundry}
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- |a| & alternate \\
- |d| & display, titling \\
- |f| & fraktur, handtooled \\
- |j| & oldstyle digits \\
- |n| & informal, casual \\
- |p| & ornaments \\
- |s| & sans serif \\
- |t| & typewriter \\
- |w| & script, handwriting, swash \\
- |x| & expert \\
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{A partial list of variants}
- \label{Tab:variant}
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- |c| & small caps \\
- |i| & italic \\
- |o| & oblique (i.e.,~slanted) \\
- |u| & unslanted italic \\
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{A partial list of shapes}
- \label{Tab:shape}
-\end{minipage}
-\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
- \small
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- |ac| & Adobe Caslon \\
- |ad| & Adobe Garamond \\
- |ag| & Avantgarde \\
- |bb| & Bembo \\
- |bd| & Bodoni \\
- |bk| & Bookman \\
- |bv| & Baskerville \\
- |ca| & Caslon \\
- |ch| & Charter \\
- |cr| & Courier \\
- |fr| & Frutiger \\
- |fu| & Futura \\
- |gl| & Galliard \\
- |gm| & Garamond \\
- |gs| & Gill Sans \\
- |hv| & Helvetica \\
- |mn| & Minion \\
- |lc| & Lucida \\
- |lh| & Lucida Bright \\
- |ls| & Lucida Sans \\
- |nb| & New Baskerville \\
- |nc| & New Century Schoolbook \\
- |op| & Optima \\
- |pl| & Palatino \\
- |sy| & Symbol \\
- |tm| & Times \\
- |ut| & Utopia \\
- |zc| & Zapf Chancery \\
- |zd| & Zapf Dingbats \\
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{A partial list of faces}
- \label{Tab:typeface}
-\end{minipage}
-\end{table}
-
-The \fontinst package uses Karl Berry's naming scheme for \afm
-files. The full naming scheme is rather more flexible than the
-subset used by \fontinst, which uses filenames consisting of:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item a \emph{supplier}, such as `|p|' for Adobe.
-\item a \emph{typeface}, such as `|hv|' for Helvetica.
-\item a \emph{weight}, such as `|r|' for regular.
-\item up to two \emph{shapes} or \emph{variants}, such as `|o|'
- for oblique.
-\item an \emph{encoding}, such as `|7t|' for Knuth's 7-bit \TeX{}
- encoding.
-\item an optional \emph{width}, such as `|n|' for narrow.
-\item a \emph{file extension}, such as `\texttt{.tfm}'
- for \TeX{} Font Metric.
-\end{itemize}
-So the filename name `\texttt{phvro7tn.tfm}' indicates Adobe
-Helvetica regular oblique narrow, in the 7-bit \TeX{} encoding.
-
-The full list of shapes, encodings and weights is given in Karl
-Berry's `\emph{Filenames for fonts}', but the more common ones are
-given in Tables~\ref{Tab:shape}--\ref{Tab:weight}.
-
-\begin{table}
-\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
- \small
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- |b| & bold \\
- |c| & black \\
- |d| & demibold \\
- |h| & heavy \\
- |k| & book \\
- |l| & light \\
- |m| & medium \\
- |r| & regular \\
- |s| & semibold \\
- |u| & ultra bold \\
- |x| & extra bold \\
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{A partial list of weights}
- \label{Tab:weight}
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- |c| & condensed \\
- |n| & narrow \\
- |w| & wide \\
- |x| & extended \\
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{A partial list of widths}
- \label{Tab:width}
-\end{minipage}
-\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
- \small
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- |8a| & Adobe Standard \\
- |8x| & Adobe Expert \\
- |8r| & \TeX{} 8-bit `raw' (\texttt{TeXBase1}) \\
- |8y| & \TeX{} 8-bit `raw' (\texttt{TeXnANSI}) \\
- |7t| & \TeX{} 7-bit text (\texttt{OT1}) \\
- |7m| & \TeX{} 7-bit math italic (\texttt{OML}) \\
- |7y| & \TeX{} 7-bit math symbol (\texttt{OMS}) \\
- |7v| & \TeX{} 7-bit math extension (\texttt{OMX}) \\
- |8t| & \TeX{} 8-bit text (\texttt{T1}) \\
- |8c| & \TeX{} 8-bit text symbols (\texttt{TS1}) \\
- |9t| & \TeX{} 7-bit text with expert glyphs \\
- |9o| & \TeX{} 7-bit text with expert glyphs \\
- & and old-style digits \\
- |9e| & \TeX{} 8-bit text with expert glyphs \\
- |9d| & \TeX{} 8-bit text with expert glyphs \\
- & and old-style digits \\
- |9c| & \TeX{} 8-bit symbols with expert glyphs \\
- & and old-style digits \\
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{A partial list of encodings}
-\end{minipage}
-\end{table}
-
-For example, to install Adobe Garamond including the expert fonts, you
-would need to rename the \afm files:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{small}
-\begin{tabular}{lll}
- \emph{Adobe name} & \emph{ATM name} & \emph{Fontinst name} \\
- |AGaramond-Bold.afm| & |gdb_____.afm| & |padb8a.afm| \\
- |AGaramond-BoldItalic.afm| & |gdbi____.afm| & |padbi8a.afm| \\
- |AGaramond-Italic.afm| & |gdi_____.afm| & |padri8a.afm| \\
- |AGaramond-Regular.afm| & |gdrg____.afm| & |padr8a.afm| \\
- |AGaramond-Semibold.afm| & |gdsb____.afm| & |pads8a.afm| \\
- |AGaramond-SemiboldItalic.afm| & |gdsbi___.afm| & |padsi8a.afm| \\
- |AGaramondExp-Bold.afm| & |geb_____.afm| & |padb8x.afm| \\
- |AGaramondExp-BoldItalic.afm| & |gebi____.afm| & |padbi8x.afm| \\
- |AGaramondExp-Italic.afm| & |gei_____.afm| & |padri8x.afm| \\
- |AGaramondExp-Regular.afm| & |gerg____.afm| & |padr8x.afm| \\
- |AGaramondExp-Semibold.afm| & |gesb____.afm| & |pads8x.afm| \\
- |AGaramondExp-SemiboldItalic.afm| & |gesbi___.afm| & |padsi8x.afm| \\
- |AGaramond-RegularSC.afm| & |gdsc____.afm| & |padrc8a.afm| \\
- |AGaramond-SemiboldSC.afm| & |gdsbs___.afm| & |padsc8a.afm| \\
-\end{tabular}
-\end{small}
-\end{center}
-You can then run \TeX{} on the following document to install the
-Adobe Garamond family:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \input fontinst.sty
- \latinfamily{padx}{}
- \latinfamily{padj}{}
- \bye
-\end{verbatim}
-Not all font families can be installed using the \verb|\latinfamily|
-command, nor does it always produce optimal results. The main
-interfaces to \fontinst are at a slightly lower level, where all font
-names appear explicitly in command arguments, and at that level it is
-possible to fine tune the font generation. The \verb|\latinfamily|
-command is mainly a clever collection of macros which expand to a
-mostly fixed\footnote{Commands that would refer to files which are
-not present are skipped, and in some cases there is a ``Plan B''
-when ``Plan A'' would have made use of such a nonexistent file, but
-that is about it.} sequence of lower level \fontinst commands.
-
-\begin{bfseries}
- Descriptions of the sub-\verb|\latinfamily| commands can be found
- in the main \fontinst manual.
-\end{bfseries}
-
-
-
-\section{More on the \cs{latinfamily} command}
-
-The \verb|\latinfamily| command is essentially a short-cut to save you
-preparing a huge file with many different \fontinst commands in it.
-
-It takes \afm or \mtx files as the source of font metric data to work
-with. Usually, you have a set of \afm files. They must be named
-according to a subset of the \Fontnamekb naming scheme. To illustrate
-the process, here is an edited part of the console log from a use of
-\verb|\latinfamily|:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \latinfamily{pad}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-This log does not show \fontinst `in action'; it's just to illustrate
-which fonts are looked for when you use the \verb|\latinfamily|
-command.
-\begin{verbatim}
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,n,>> seek padr8r.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sc,>> seek padrc8r.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sl,>> seek padro8r.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,it,>> seek padri8r.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,n,c>> seek padr8rn.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sc,c>> seek padrc8rn.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sl,c>> seek padro8rn.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,it,c>> seek padri8rn.mtx
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The important point to notice is that \fontinst needs an |8r| encoded
-\mtx file for each font when you are using the \verb|latinfamily|
-command. If it can't find an |8r| encoded \mtx file, it'll look for
-for an |8a| encoded \afm file. It will automatically turn the file it
-finds into an |8r| encoded \mtx file. So when \fontinst says
-`\verb|seek padr8r.mtx|', it is in fact looking for
-\texttt{padr8r.mtx} and \texttt{padr8a.afm}. Whatever it finds, it
-will end up with \verb|padr8r.mtx| to work on.
-
-The first line of the log shows that \fontinst is trying to create a
-\vpl file for |pad/m/n|. That is, font family |pad| (Adobe Garamond),
-font series |m| (normal `book' or `regular' weight), and font shape
-|n| (normal upright).
-
-If it finds what it's looking for, it will create the files:
-\begin{verbatim}
- padr7t.vpl
- padr8t.vpl
- padr8c.vpl
-\end{verbatim}
-And add these lines to the given \fd files:
-\begin{verbatim}
- OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{m}{n}{<<->> padr7t}{}
- T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{m}{n}{<<->> padr8t}{}
- TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{m}{n}{<<->> padr8c}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-This means you will have three new fonts to use in \LaTeX: the OT1, T1
-and TS1 encoded versions of |pad/m/n|. You'll be able to select (say)
-|T1/pad/m/n| by saying:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{pad}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\selectfont
-\end{verbatim}
-This is the clumsiest way of selecting that particular font, but I've
-done it to illustrate exactly what's happening.
-
-The next line:
-\begin{verbatim}
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sc,>> seek padrc8r.mtx
-\end{verbatim}
-shows that \fontinst is trying to install a small caps font. If you
-have a real small caps metric file named \texttt{padrc8r.mtx} (don't
-forget it'll look for an |8a| encoded \afm file), \fontinst will go
-ahead and create the \vpl file and \fd file entry as expected.
-
-But you don't normally have a real small caps font, so \fontinst will
-quite happily produce a fake small caps font. To do this, it looks
-for a suitable metric file by dropping the `|c|':
-\begin{quote}
- `Hmm\ldots\ I can't find \texttt{padrc8r}, so I'll look for
- \texttt{padr8r}.'
-\end{quote}
-And you will eventually have:
-\begin{verbatim}
- padrc7t.vpl
- padrc8t.vpl
-\end{verbatim}
-And add these lines to the given \fd files:
-\begin{verbatim}
- OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{m}{sc}{<<->> padrc7t}{}
- T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{m}{sc}{<<->> padrc8t}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-(Note that it won't install a TS1-encoded small caps font because
-TS1 is a text symbol font, which would look the same in the upright
-and small caps shape.)
-
-The next log line shows \fontinst trying to create a \vpl for the
-oblique version of Adobe Garamond:
-\begin{verbatim}
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,sl,>> seek padro8r.mtx
-\end{verbatim}
-It's quite usual for an oblique version to be unavailable, but
-\fontinst has a way round this: it can fake an oblique font from the
-corresponding `straight' version:
-\begin{quote}
- `Oh dear: I can't find \texttt{padro8r}, so I'll look for
- \texttt{padr8r} and use clever maths to fake a slanted version.'
-\end{quote}
-This is not as straightforward as the small caps case. \Fontinst
-only works out what the metrics ought to be if the entire font is
-slanted to the right. It's up to the DVI driver to actually print a
-slanted font. \Dvips can do this.
-
-You will eventually have:
-\begin{verbatim}
- padro7t.vpl
- padro8t.vpl
- padro8c.vpl
-\end{verbatim}
-And these lines added to the given \fd files:
-\begin{verbatim}
- OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{m}{sl}{<<->> padro7t}{}
- T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{m}{sl}{<<->> padro8t}{}
- TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{m}{sl}{<<->> padro8c}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The next line is straightforward:
-\begin{verbatim}
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,it,>> seek padri8r.mtx
-\end{verbatim}
-If \fontinst can't find a suitable metrics file (\texttt{padri8r.mtx}
-or \texttt{padri8a.afm}), it carries on without doing anything. If it
-does find a suitable metrics file, it churns away until you will
-eventually have:
-\begin{verbatim}
- padri7t.vpl
- padri8t.vpl
- padri8c.vpl
-\end{verbatim}
-And these lines added to the given \fd files:
-\begin{verbatim}
- OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{m}{it}{<<->> padri7t}{}
- T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{m}{it}{<<->> padri8t}{}
- TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{m}{it}{<<->> padri8c}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The next line is a bit different. \Fontinst is now trying to create a
-\vpl file for a \emph{condensed} font:
-\begin{verbatim}
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,m,n,c>> seek padr8rn.mtx
-\end{verbatim}
-If it finds a suitable metric file (Adobe Garamond, medium weight,
-normal upright shape, condensed), it will eventually produce:
-\begin{verbatim}
- padr7tn.vpl
- padr8tn.vpl
- padr8cn.vpl
-\end{verbatim}
-And these lines added to the given \fd files:
-\begin{verbatim}
- OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{mc}{n}{<<->> padr7tn}{}
- T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{mc}{n}{<<->> padr8tn}{}
- TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{mc}{n}{<<->> padr8cn}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-There is no standard \LaTeX\ command like \verb|\bfseries| to select
-the medium condensed (|mc|) series created here. If you want to use
-this font, you must do something like:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \fontfamily{pad}\fontseries{mc}\selectfont
-\end{verbatim}
-If it doesn't find a suitable metric file for a narrow series,
-\fontinst will just skip over and continue, unless you specifically
-tell it to fake a narrow series.
-
-And so the process continues: \fontinst attempts to create \vpl files
-for condensed versions of all the font shapes met so far, and then
-goes on to:
-\begin{verbatim}
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,n,>> seek padb8r.mtx
-\end{verbatim}
-And again, if it finds a suitable metric file (\texttt{padb8r.mtx} or
-\texttt{padb8a.afm}), it'll potter off and create the files:
-\begin{verbatim}
- padb7t.vpl
- padb8t.vpl
- padb8c.vpl
-\end{verbatim}
-And these lines added to the given \fd files:
-\begin{verbatim}
- OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{b}{n}{<<->> padb7t}{}
- T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b}{n}{<<->> padb8t}{}
- TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{b}{n}{<<->> padb8c}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-With this step done, fontinst will try to create \vpl files for the
-small caps, slanted, and italic versions of |pad/b|; and then it'll
-try to create condensed versions of all those:
-\begin{verbatim}
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,n,>> seek padb8r.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,sc,>> seek padbc8r.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,sl,>> seek padbo8r.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,it,>> seek padbi8r.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,n,c>> seek padb8rn.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,sc,c>> seek padbc8rn.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,sl,c>> seek padbo8rn.mtx
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,b,it,c>> seek padbi8rn.mtx
-\end{verbatim}
-If it manages to find the files it needs to create the \vpl files to
-use all those fonts with \LaTeX, you'll end up with the following
-lines in the T1 \fd file (I've ignored the OT1 \fd file to save some
-space):
-\begin{verbatim}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b} {n} {<<->> padb8t}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b} {sc}{<<->> padbc8t}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b} {sl}{<<->> padbo8t}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{b} {it}{<<->> padbi8t}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{bc}{n} {<<->> padb8tn}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{bc}{sc}{<<->> padbc8tn}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{bc}{sl}{<<->> padbo8tn}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{bc}{it}{<<->> pckbi8tn}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-To translate into English: Adobe Garamond bold in `normal', small
-caps, slanted, and italic versions, as well as condensed versions of
-all four.
-
-Again, because there's no convenient way of selecting the condensed
-versions with existing \LaTeX\ commands, you need to say something
-like:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \fontfamily{pad}\fontseries{bc}\selectfont
-\end{verbatim}
-to use the bold condensed (|bc|) versions of this font; you can of
-course use \verb|\itshape|, \verb|\scshape|, \verb|\slshape|, and
-\verb|upshape| to switch between the italic, small caps, slanted, and
-`normal' versions of Adobe Garamond bold condensed once you've got
-|pad/bc| selected.
-
-So far, you've seen \verb|\latinfamily| look at two different weights
-and two different widths. For each weight, \verb|\latinfamily| will
-try and install eight different fonts as you can see above. It will
-try and install the same eight different fonts for each of the
-following different weights:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{lll}
- \emph{\LaTeX} & \emph{Fontname} & \emph{description} \\
- |ul| & |a| & ultra light \\
- |el| & |i| & extra light \\
- |l| & |l| & light \\
- |m| & |k|, |r| & book, regular \\
- |mb| & |m| & medium \\
- |db| & |d| & demi bold \\
- |sb| & |s| & semi bold \\
- |b| & |b| & bold \\
- |eb| & |c|, |h|, |x| & black, heavy, extra bold \\
- |ub| & |u| & ultra bold
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-The \LaTeX\ column contains the label that will be used in the
-\verb|\DeclareFontShape| command to specify the font series. The
-\Fontnamekb column contains the width specifier used to name the font
-metric file that \fontinst will look for in that case.
-
-In other words, at some stage \fontinst will look for:
-\begin{verbatim}
- INFO>> to make LaTeX font shape <<pad,sb,n,>> seek pads8r.mtx
-\end{verbatim}
-and if it finds a suitable metric file (\texttt{pads8r.mtx} or
-\texttt{pads8a.afm}), it will create:
-\begin{verbatim}
- pads7t.vpl
- pads8t.vpl
- pads8c.vpl
-\end{verbatim}
-and \fd file entries like this:
-\begin{verbatim}
- OT1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{pad}{sb}{n}{<<->> pads7t}{}
- T1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{T1} {pad}{sb}{n}{<<->> pads8t}{}
- TS1pad.fd: \DeclareFontShape{TS1}{pad}{sb}{n}{<<->> pads8c}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-and since |sb| is not a normal \LaTeX\ font series, you'll need to use
-something like:
-\begin{verbatim}
- \fontfamily{pad}\fontseries{sb}\selectfont
-\end{verbatim}
-to use this font.
-
-% For example, \verb|\latinfamily{ptm}{}| is
-% syntactic sugar for:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \transformfont{ptmr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmr8a}}}
-% \transformfont{ptmri8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmri8a}}}
-% \transformfont{ptmb8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmb8a}}}
-% \transformfont{ptmbi8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{ptmbi8a}}}
-% \transformfont{ptmro8r}{\slantfont{167}{\frommtx{ptmr8r}}}
-% \transformfont{ptmbo8r}{\slantfont{167}{\frommtx{ptmb8r}}}
-% \installfonts
-% \installfamily{T1}{ptm}{}
-% \installfamily{OT1}{ptm}{}
-% \installfont{ptmr8t}{ptmr8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{m}{n}{}
-% \installfont{ptmr7t}{ptmr8r,latin}{OT1}{OT1}{ptm}{m}{n}{}
-% \installfont{ptmrc8t}{ptmr8r,latin}{T1c}{T1}{ptm}{m}{sc}{}
-% \installfont{ptmrc7t}{ptmr8r,latin}{OT1c}{OT1}{ptm}{m}{sc}{}
-% \installfont{ptmri8t}{ptmri8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{m}{it}{}
-% \installfont{ptmri7t}{ptmri8r,latin}{OT1i}{OT1}{ptm}{m}{it}{}
-% \installfont{ptmro8t}{ptmro8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{m}{sl}{}
-% \installfont{ptmro7t}{ptmro8r,latin}{OT1}{OT1}{ptm}{m}{sl}{}
-% \installfont{ptmb8t}{ptmb8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{b}{n}{}
-% \installfont{ptmb7t}{ptmb8r,latin}{OT1}{OT1}{ptm}{b}{n}{}
-% \installfont{ptmbc8t}{ptmb8r,latin}{T1c}{T1}{ptm}{b}{sc}{}
-% \installfont{ptmbc7t}{ptmb8r,latin}{OT1c}{OT1}{ptm}{b}{sc}{}
-% \installfont{ptmbi8t}{ptmbi8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{b}{it}{}
-% \installfont{ptmbi7t}{ptmbi8r,latin}{OT1i}{OT1}{ptm}{b}{it}{}
-% \installfont{ptmbo8t}{ptmbo8r,latin}{T1}{T1}{ptm}{b}{sl}{}
-% \installfont{ptmbo7t}{ptmbo8r,latin}{OT1}{OT1}{ptm}{b}{sl}{}
-% \endinstallfonts
-% \end{verbatim}
-
-
-The \texttt{basicex.tex} file in the \texttt{examples} directory of
-the main \fontinst distribution is an annotated command file which
-does roughly the same things as the \verb|\latinfamily| command for
-the \texttt{pad} family of fonts.
-
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/roadmap.eps b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/roadmap.eps
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ca14df79de..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/manual/roadmap.eps
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,265 +0,0 @@
-%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-2.0
-%%Title: roadmap.fig
-%%Creator: fig2dev Version 3.1 Patchlevel 1
-%%CreationDate: Sat Sep 16 18:24:06 1995
-%%For: alanje@rsuna.crn.cogs.susx.ac.uk (Alan Jeffrey, Research Fellow)
-%%Orientation: Portrait
-%%BoundingBox: 0 0 298 312
-%%Pages: 0
-%%BeginSetup
-%%IncludeFeature: *PageSize A4
-%%EndSetup
-%%EndComments
-/$F2psDict 200 dict def
-$F2psDict begin
-$F2psDict /mtrx matrix put
-/col-1 {} def
-/col0 {0.000 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col1 {0.000 0.000 1.000 srgb} bind def
-/col2 {0.000 1.000 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col3 {0.000 1.000 1.000 srgb} bind def
-/col4 {1.000 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col5 {1.000 0.000 1.000 srgb} bind def
-/col6 {1.000 1.000 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col7 {1.000 1.000 1.000 srgb} bind def
-/col8 {0.000 0.000 0.560 srgb} bind def
-/col9 {0.000 0.000 0.690 srgb} bind def
-/col10 {0.000 0.000 0.820 srgb} bind def
-/col11 {0.530 0.810 1.000 srgb} bind def
-/col12 {0.000 0.560 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col13 {0.000 0.690 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col14 {0.000 0.820 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col15 {0.000 0.560 0.560 srgb} bind def
-/col16 {0.000 0.690 0.690 srgb} bind def
-/col17 {0.000 0.820 0.820 srgb} bind def
-/col18 {0.560 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col19 {0.690 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col20 {0.820 0.000 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col21 {0.560 0.000 0.560 srgb} bind def
-/col22 {0.690 0.000 0.690 srgb} bind def
-/col23 {0.820 0.000 0.820 srgb} bind def
-/col24 {0.500 0.190 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col25 {0.630 0.250 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col26 {0.750 0.380 0.000 srgb} bind def
-/col27 {1.000 0.500 0.500 srgb} bind def
-/col28 {1.000 0.630 0.630 srgb} bind def
-/col29 {1.000 0.750 0.750 srgb} bind def
-/col30 {1.000 0.880 0.880 srgb} bind def
-/col31 {1.000 0.840 0.000 srgb} bind def
-
-end
-save
--112.0 334.0 translate
-1 -1 scale
-
-/clp {closepath} bind def
-/ef {eofill} bind def
-/gr {grestore} bind def
-/gs {gsave} bind def
-/l {lineto} bind def
-/m {moveto} bind def
-/n {newpath} bind def
-/s {stroke} bind def
-/slc {setlinecap} bind def
-/slj {setlinejoin} bind def
-/slw {setlinewidth} bind def
-/srgb {setrgbcolor} bind def
-/rot {rotate} bind def
-/sc {scale} bind def
-/tr {translate} bind def
-/tnt {dup dup currentrgbcolor
- 4 -2 roll dup 1 exch sub 3 -1 roll mul add
- 4 -2 roll dup 1 exch sub 3 -1 roll mul add
- 4 -2 roll dup 1 exch sub 3 -1 roll mul add srgb}
- bind def
-/shd {dup dup currentrgbcolor 4 -2 roll mul 4 -2 roll mul
- 4 -2 roll mul srgb} bind def
- /DrawEllipse {
- /endangle exch def
- /startangle exch def
- /yrad exch def
- /xrad exch def
- /y exch def
- /x exch def
- /savematrix mtrx currentmatrix def
- x y tr xrad yrad sc 0 0 1 startangle endangle arc
- closepath
- savematrix setmatrix
- } def
-
-/$F2psBegin {$F2psDict begin /$F2psEnteredState save def} def
-/$F2psEnd {$F2psEnteredState restore end} def
-%%EndProlog
-
-$F2psBegin
-10 setmiterlimit
- 0.06000 0.06000 sc
-7.500 slw
-% Arc
-n 4813.51 1452.05 m 4800.00 1575.00 l 4754.06 1460.15 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 4284.38 1645.31 520.40 -91.03 -7.77 arc
-gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Arc
-n 3045.94 1460.15 m 3000.00 1575.00 l 2986.49 1452.05 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3515.62 1645.31 520.40 -88.97 -172.23 arcn
-gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Arc
-n 2771.84 3251.35 m 2775.00 3375.00 l 2714.02 3267.38 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 2279.17 3512.50 514.55 -84.89 -15.50 arc
-gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Arc
-n 3285.98 3267.38 m 3225.00 3375.00 l 3228.16 3251.35 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3720.83 3512.50 514.55 -95.11 -164.50 arcn
-gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Arc
-n 4247.24 2906.08 m 4125.00 2925.00 l 4223.95 2850.78 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3525.00 1500.00 1546.16 39.09 67.17 arc
-gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Arc
-n 3403.37 4702.50 m 3525.00 4725.00 l 3407.09 4762.39 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3493.27 4214.42 511.56 164.63 86.44 arcn
-gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Arc
-n 4394.64 4681.42 m 4275.00 4650.00 l 4395.35 4621.42 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 4291.72 3239.01 1411.09 -3.62 90.68 arc
-gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Arc
-n 4398.18 4811.29 m 4275.00 4800.00 l 4389.00 4752.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3787.50 1650.00 3187.50 28.07 81.20 arc
-gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Arc
-n 4306.30 4511.76 m 4200.00 4575.00 l 4264.03 4469.17 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 2769.64 3133.93 2030.42 0.45 45.21 arc
-gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 3900 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 3900 562 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 3900 1762 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 3000 1762 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 4800 1762 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 4800 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 5700 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 6600 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 2100 2962 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 3000 4162 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Ellipse
-n 3900 5362 225 187 0 360 DrawEllipse gs col-1 s gr
-
-% Polyline
-n 3525 975 m 4275 975 l 4275 1275 l 3525 1275 l clp gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3525 2175 m 4275 2175 l 4275 2475 l 3525 2475 l clp gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 4425 2175 m 5175 2175 l 5175 2475 l 4425 2475 l clp gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 2625 3375 m 3375 3375 l 3375 3675 l 2625 3675 l clp gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3525 4575 m 4275 4575 l 4275 4875 l 3525 4875 l clp gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3900 750 m 3900 975 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3930.00 855.00 m 3900.00 975.00 l 3870.00 855.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3900 1275 m 3900 1575 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3930.00 1455.00 m 3900.00 1575.00 l 3870.00 1455.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3900 1950 m 3900 2175 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3930.00 2055.00 m 3900.00 2175.00 l 3870.00 2055.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3900 2475 m 3900 2775 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3930.00 2655.00 m 3900.00 2775.00 l 3870.00 2655.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 4800 1950 m 4800 2175 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 4830.00 2055.00 m 4800.00 2175.00 l 4770.00 2055.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 4800 2475 m 4800 2775 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 4830.00 2655.00 m 4800.00 2775.00 l 4770.00 2655.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3000 1950 m 3000 3375 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3030.00 3255.00 m 3000.00 3375.00 l 2970.00 3255.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3000 3675 m 3000 3975 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3030.00 3855.00 m 3000.00 3975.00 l 2970.00 3855.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3900 3150 m 3900 4575 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3930.00 4455.00 m 3900.00 4575.00 l 3870.00 4455.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-% Polyline
-n 3900 4875 m 3900 5175 l gs col-1 s gr
-n 3930.00 5055.00 m 3900.00 5175.00 l 3870.00 5055.00 l gs col-1 s gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3900 3000 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (tfm) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3900 600 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (afm) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3900 1800 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (pl) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-4800 1800 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (vpl) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3000 1800 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (fd) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-4800 3000 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (vf) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-5700 3000 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (pfa) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-6600 3000 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (pfb) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-2100 3000 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (tex) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3000 4200 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (dvi) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Helvetica findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3900 5400 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (ps) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3900 1175 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (fontinst) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3900 2375 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (pltotf) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-4800 2375 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (vptovf) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3000 3575 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (latex) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-/Palatino-Italic findfont 180.00 scalefont setfont
-3900 4775 m
-gs 1 -1 sc (dvips) dup stringwidth pop 2 div neg 0 rmoveto col-1 show gr
-$F2psEnd
-restore
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tables.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tables.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d6c2b593c7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tables.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tutorial.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tutorial.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ae8a1eeb75..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/talks/et99-font-tutorial.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparemetrics.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparemetrics.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 7864da89731..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparemetrics.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,941 +0,0 @@
-% We start by making some default catcode assignments, in case we are
-% using ini\TeX{}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*pkg>
-\catcode`\{=1
-\catcode`\}=2
-\catcode`\#=6
-\catcode`\^=7
-%</pkg>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \package{fontinst} uses some unusual, but convenient, settings of
-% |\catcode|. |@| and |_| are made letters, |~| is made a space, and
-% space and newline are ignored. Before setting those however, we save
-% the current values of the catcodes, so that they can be restored at
-% the end of \texttt{fontinst.sty}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*pkg>
-\edef\spacecatcode{\the\catcode`\ }
-\edef\nlcatcode{\the\catcode`\^^M}
-\edef\atcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
-\edef\underscorecatcode{\the\catcode`\_}
-\edef\tildecatcode{\the\catcode`\~}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\catcode`\ =9
-\catcode`\^^M=9
-\catcode`\@=11
-\catcode`\_=11
-\catcode`\~=10
-%</pkg>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-
-
-\newlinechar=`\^^J
-
-% \begin{macro}{\a_read}
-% \begin{macro}{\b_read}
-% \begin{macro}{\a_filelineno}
-% \begin{macro}{\b_filelineno}
-% These control sequences are used for keeping track of the ``physical''
-% side of the two input files. |\a_read| and |\b_read| are the stream
-% numbers. |\a_filelineno| and |\b_filelineno| are the respective
-% line numbers of the lines most recently read from these files.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newread\a_read
-\newread\b_read
-\newcount\a_filelineno
-\newcount\b_filelineno
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\a_lineno}
-% \begin{macro}{\b_lineno}
-% \begin{macro}{\a_bufbase}
-% \begin{macro}{\b_bufbase}
-% \begin{macro}{\a_bufmid}
-% \begin{macro}{\b_bufmid}
-% \begin{macro}{\a_buftop}
-% \begin{macro}{\b_buftop}
-% These count registers are used for managing the buffert of lines
-% that are read from the input files when a match between lines is
-% being looked for. This buffert consists of lines which are saved in
-% the macros
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\|\meta{letter}|_saved-|\meta{ofs}
-% \end{quote}
-% where \meta{letter} is |a| or |b| and \meta{ofs} is an integer,
-% being the index into the buffert. |\a_bufbase| and |\b_bufbase|
-% contain the \meta{ofs} of the first line currently in the buffert,
-% whereas |\a_buftop| and |\b_buftop| contain the \meta{ofs} of the
-% last such line. |\a_bufmid| and |\b_bufmid| hold the buffert
-% positions of the lines which are currently considered the next by
-% |\get_next_line|. If \(\mathtt{buftop}<\mathtt{bufmid}\) then the
-% buffert is empty. |\a_lineno| and |\b_lineno| are the respective
-% line numbers of the |\a_bufbase| and |\b_bufbase| lines.
-%
-% All these registers should be set globally.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\a_lineno \newcount\b_lineno
-\newcount\a_bufbase \newcount\b_bufbase
-\newcount\a_bufmid \newcount\b_bufmid
-\newcount\a_buftop \newcount\b_buftop
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}
-% \end{macro}\end{macro}
-
-
-% \begin{macro}{\get_next_line}
-% The |\get_next_line| macro is called as
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\get_next_line|\marg{letter}
-% \end{quote}
-% where \meta{letter} is |a| or |b|. This sets the
-% |\|\meta{letter}|_line| macro to the next line of that file and
-% updates the value of |\|\meta{letter}|_lineno|.
-%
-% The ``next line'' is normally read from input stream
-% |\|\meta{letter}|_read|, but if a line mismatch recently occured
-% then it might happen that the next line has already been read from
-% the file, and in that case it is taken from one of the
-% |\|\meta{letter}|_saved-|\meta{ofs} macros.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\get_next_line#1{
- \ifnum \csname#1_buftop\endcsname<\csname#1_bufmid\endcsname
- \ifeof \csname#1_read\endcsname
- \x_cs\let{#1_line}\end_of_file_line
- \else
- \read\csname#1_read\endcsname t\x_cs{o}{#1_line}
- \global\advance \csname#1_filelineno\endcsname \@ne
- \fi
- \else
- \expandafter\let \csname#1_line\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname#1_saved-\the\csname#1_bufmid\endcsname\endcsname
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\end_of_file_line}
-% This macro expands to the text \verb*|(ENDOFFILE) | with the
-% catcodes it would have if read from an input file. It is used as an
-% end-of-file marker.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\(=13
- \catcode`\)=13
- \gdef\end_of_file_line{(ENDOFFILE)~}
-\endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\the_line}
-% The |\the_line| macro is called as
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\the_line|\marg{letter}\marg{ofs}
-% \end{quote}
-% where \meta{letter} is |a| or |b|, and \meta{ofs} is a \TeX\ number.
-% It expands to the control sequence |\|\meta{letter}|_saved-|^^A
-% \meta{ofs}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\the_line#1#2{\csname#1_saved-\number#2\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\initialise_search}
-% The |\initialise_search| macro sets everything up for a search for
-% a match between lines.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\initialise_search{
- \global\a_bufbase=\a_bufmid
- \global\b_bufbase=\b_bufmid
- \add_to_buffert{a}
- \add_to_buffert{b}
- \global\advance \a_bufmid \@ne
- \global\advance \b_bufmid \@ne
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\add_to_buffert}
-% The |\add_to_buffert| macro is called as
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\add_to_buffert|\marg{letter}
-% \end{quote}
-% It adds the line returned by |\get_next_line| to the corresponding
-% buffert (if it wasn't already there) and updates the counters for
-% that buffert. After this, the line following the line being put into
-% the buffert will be the line that |\get_next_line| returns.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\add_to_buffert#1{
- \ifnum \csname#1_buftop\endcsname<\csname#1_bufmid\endcsname
- \expandafter\let
- \csname#1_saved-\the\csname#1_bufmid\endcsname
- \expandafter\endcsname
- \csname#1_line\endcsname
- \global\advance \csname#1_buftop\endcsname \@ne
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-
-
-\newcount\first_integer
-\newcount\second_integer
-
-% \begin{macro}{\match_lines}
-% The |\match_lines| macro tests if two lines can be considered the
-% same (up to metrics changes, which need not be small). It is called as
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\match_lines|\marg{line a}\marg{line b}
-% \end{quote}
-% \meta{line a} and \meta{line b} may be any amount of text which
-% eventually expands to the lines in question. |\match_lines| returns
-% its answer by setting the |_a_| switch to |false| (if the lines
-% match) or |true| (if the lines don't match).
-%
-% |\match_lines| also causes the |\first_dimen| and |\second_dimen|
-% registers, as well as the |_histogram_dimen_| switch to be updated,
-% so it can be immediately followed by a test of the metrics.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\match_lines#1#2{
- \first_integer=\z@
- \second_integer=\z@
- \first_dimen=\z@
- \second_dimen=\z@
- \x_cs\let{string-+}\empty_command
- \x_cs\let{string--}\empty_command
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\sign{+}
- #1\line_stop
- \def\sign{-}
- #2\line_stop
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \_a_false
- \expandafter\ifx \csname cmd-+ \expandafter\endcsname
- \csname cmd--\endcsname
- \else \_a_true \fi
- \ifnum \first_integer=\z@ \else \_a_true \fi
- \ifnum \second_integer=\z@ \else \_a_true \fi
- \expandafter\ifx \csname string-+ \expandafter\endcsname
- \csname string--\endcsname
- \else \_a_true \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\try_matching}
-% \begin{macro}{\a_bufP}
-% \begin{macro}{\b_bufP}
-% The |\try_matching| descends through the buffert until the |_a_|
-% switch gets |false| or it has tried the bottommost lines in the
-% buffert. Since |\body| is already defined by the |\loop| in
-% |\process_lines|, |\try_matching| uses an explicit end recursion to
-% make the loop.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\a_bufP
-\newcount\b_bufP
-\def\try_matching{
- \global\advance \a_bufP \m@ne
- \global\advance \b_bufP \m@ne
-% % Begin debug
-% \wlog{a_bufbase:~\the\a_bufbase\space\space\space
-% b_bufbase:~\the\b_bufbase}
-% \wlog{a_bufmid:~\the\a_bufmid\space\space\space
-% b_bufmid:~\the\b_bufmid}
-% \wlog{a_buftop:~\the\a_buftop\space\space\space
-% b_buftop:~\the\b_buftop}
-% \wlog{a_bufP:~\the\a_bufP\space\space\space
-% b_bufP:~\the\b_bufP}
-% \begingroup
-% \def\do_left_paren{(}\def\do_right_paren{)}
-% \wlog{a_line:~\a_line}
-% \wlog{b_buf_line:~\the_line{b}{\b_bufP}}
-% \wlog{b_line:~\b_line}
-% \wlog{a_buf_line:~\the_line{a}{\a_bufP}^^J}
-% \endgroup
-% % End debug
- \match_lines{\a_line}{\the_line{b}{\b_bufP}}
- \if_a_
- \match_lines{\the_line{a}{\a_bufP}}{\b_line}
- \if_a_ \else
- \global\a_bufmid=\a_bufP
- \fi
- \else
- \global\b_bufmid=\b_bufP
- \fi
- \ifnum \a_bufP>\a_bufbase \if_a_
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\try_matching
- \fi \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\report_mismatch}
-% The |\report_mismatch| macro does precisely what it says. It also increases
-% the \texttt{bufbase} and \texttt{lineno} registers to point at the
-% matching lines.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\report_mismatch{
- \begingroup
- \def\do_left_paren{(}
- \def\do_right_paren{)}
- \wlog{Mismatch~in~first~file~(at~\the\a_lineno):}
- \loop
- \wlog{\the_line{a}{\a_bufbase}}
- \ifnum \a_bufbase<\a_bufmid
- \global\advance \a_bufbase \@ne
- \global\advance \a_lineno \@ne
- \repeat
- \wlog{Match~found~at~line~\the\a_lineno.}
- \wlog{Mismatch~in~second~file~(at~\the\b_lineno):}
- \loop
- \wlog{\the_line{b}{\b_bufbase}}
- \ifnum \b_bufbase<\b_bufmid
- \global\advance \b_bufbase \@ne
- \global\advance \b_lineno \@ne
- \repeat
- \wlog{Match~found~at~line~\the\b_lineno.}
- \endgroup
- \glyphified_location
- \ifnum 4>\compared_status
- \global\chardef\compared_status=4
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-\def\glyphified_location{
- \ifx \encoding_name\empty_command
- \ifnum \m@ne<\last_character
- \wlog{This~is~related~to~slot~\the\last_character.^^J}
- \else
- \wlog{This~is~in~the~header.^^J}
- \fi
- \else
- \if_undefined{name-\encoding_name-\the\last_character}\then
- \ifnum \last_character=\m@ne
- \wlog{This~is~in~the~header.^^J}
- \else
- \wlog{This~is~related~to~slot~\the\last_character\space
- (unencoded).^^J}
- \fi
- \else
- \wlog{This~is~related~to~the~glyph~
- \csname name-\encoding_name-\the\last_character\endcsname
- .^^J}
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-% \begin{macro}{\compared_status}
-% |\compared_status| is a \meta{chardef token} which stores the
-% current status of the comparision, according to the following table
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item[0] The property lists are equal---there may be checksum
-% differences, but nothing else.
-% \item[1] The property lists are almost equal---there are
-% differences in the metrics, but these are within the |\tolerance|
-% level.
-% \item[2] The property lists are essentially equal---there are
-% differences in the metrics, but these are within the |\tolerance|
-% level, with the exception of some \texttt{CHARHT},
-% \texttt{CHARDP}, and \texttt{CHARIC} values.
-% \item[3] The property lists have metric differences---there are
-% metric differences not with category 2.
-% \item[4] The property lists are not completely matched.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\step_linenos}
-% The |\step_linenos| macro increments the |_lineno| line numbers. If
-% the current line was fetched from the buffert, then it also
-% increments the |_bufmid| and |_bufbase| registers, and checks
-% whether the buffert ended (in which case it is normalized to its
-% starting position, to conserve hash table space).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\step_linenos{
- \global\advance \a_lineno \@ne
- \ifnum \a_bufmid=\a_buftop
- \global\a_bufbase=\z@
- \global\a_bufmid=\z@
- \global\a_buftop=\m@ne
- \else\ifnum \a_bufmid<\a_buftop
- \global\advance \a_bufmid \@ne
- \global\advance \a_bufbase \@ne
- \fi\fi
- \global\advance \b_lineno \@ne
- \ifnum \b_bufmid=\b_buftop
- \global\b_bufbase=\z@
- \global\b_bufmid=\z@
- \global\b_buftop=\m@ne
- \else\ifnum \b_bufmid<\b_buftop
- \global\advance \b_bufmid \@ne
- \global\advance \b_bufbase \@ne
- \fi\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-
-\newdimen\first_dimen
-\newdimen\second_dimen
-\newcount\ht_hist_i
-\newcount\ht_hist_ii
-\newcount\ht_hist_iii
-\newcount\ht_hist_iv
-\newcount\dp_hist_i
-\newcount\dp_hist_ii
-\newcount\dp_hist_iii
-\newcount\dp_hist_iv
-\newcount\ic_hist_i
-\newcount\ic_hist_ii
-\newcount\ic_hist_iii
-\newcount\ic_hist_iv
-
-% \begin{macro}{\clear_histograms}
-% This macro clears all the histograms.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\clear_histograms{
- \global\ht_hist_i=\z@
- \global\ht_hist_ii=\z@
- \global\ht_hist_iii=\z@
- \global\ht_hist_iv=\z@
- \global\dp_hist_i=\z@
- \global\dp_hist_ii=\z@
- \global\dp_hist_iii=\z@
- \global\dp_hist_iv=\z@
- \global\ic_hist_i=\z@
- \global\ic_hist_ii=\z@
- \global\ic_hist_iii=\z@
- \global\ic_hist_iv=\z@
-}
-% \enc{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\present_histograms}
-% This macro writes the histogram data to the log file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\present_histograms{
- \wlog{\string\tolerance*~\space CHARHT~\space CHARDP~\space CHARIC}
- \wlog{~\space\space 1--~\space\space 10\hist_to_eight{ht}{i}
- \hist_to_eight{dp}{i}\hist_to_eight{ic}{i}}
- \wlog{~\space 10--~\space 100\hist_to_eight{ht}{ii}
- \hist_to_eight{dp}{ii}\hist_to_eight{ic}{ii}}
- \wlog{~100--~1000\hist_to_eight{ht}{iii}\hist_to_eight{dp}{iii}
- \hist_to_eight{ic}{iii}}
- \wlog{1000--10000\hist_to_eight{ht}{iv}\hist_to_eight{dp}{iv}
- \hist_to_eight{ic}{iv}}
-}
-\def\hist_to_eight#1#2{\x_cs\hist_to_eight_i{#1_hist_#2}}
-\def\hist_to_eight_i#1{
- \ifnum #1<\@M
- \four_spaces
- \ifnum #1<\one_hundred
- \space\space
- \ifnum 10>#1 ~\fi
- \else \ifnum #1<\one_thousand \space\fi \fi
- \else
- \ifnum 1000000>#1
- \space\space
- \ifnum 100000>#1 ~\fi
- \else \ifnum 1000000>#1 ~\fi \fi
- \fi
- \the#1
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-
-% \begin{macro}{\metric_statistics}
-% \begin{macro}{\metric_origin}
-% The |\metric_statistics| macro takes care of comparing the metrics
-% by inspecting the values of |\first_dimen| and |\second_dimen|. It
-% has four classes of differences, which are represented by
-% |\compared_status| values 0--3: no difference, tolerable (almost no)
-% difference, histogrammed (essentially no) difference, and
-% non-tolerable difference. If a non-tolerable difference is found,
-% then the current lines are written to the log file. Histogrammed
-% differences causes the corresponding
-% |\|\meta{type}|_hist_|\meta{group} register to be incremented, and
-% tolerable differences only affect the value of |\compared_status|.
-%
-% The |\metric_origin| macro contains the \meta{type} of the metric
-% data. It is usually empty, but PL properties with metrics that have
-% histograms set it so that the correct histogram is updated.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\metric_statistics{
- \_a_false
- %
- \ifdim \first_dimen<\z@ \first_dimen=-\first_dimen \fi
- \ifdim \first_dimen=\z@
- \else\ifdim \first_dimen<\tolerance
- \ifnum 1>\compared_status
- \global\chardef\compared_status=1
- \fi
- \else\ifx \metric_origin\empty_command
- \_a_true
- \else
- \a_count=\@ne
- \def\a_macro{10}
- \loop\ifdim \a_macro\tolerance<\first_dimen
- \edef\a_macro{\a_macro 0}
- \advance \a_count \@ne
- \repeat
- \if_undefined{\metric_origin _hist_ \romannumeral\a_count}\then
- \_a_true
- \else
- \global\advance \csname \metric_origin _hist_
- \romannumeral\a_count \endcsname \@ne
- \ifnum 2>\compared_status
- \global\chardef\compared_status=2
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi\fi\fi
- %
- \ifdim \second_dimen<\z@ \second_dimen=-\second_dimen \fi
- \ifdim \second_dimen=\z@
- \else\ifdim \second_dimen<\tolerance
- \ifnum 1>\compared_status
- \global\chardef\compared_status=1
- \fi
- \else\ifx \metric_origin\empty_command
- \_a_true
- \else
- \a_count=\@ne
- \def\a_macro{10}
- \loop\ifdim \a_macro\tolerance<\second_dimen
- \edef\a_macro{\a_macro 0}
- \advance \a_count \@ne
- \repeat
- \if_undefined{\metric_origin _hist_ \romannumeral\a_count}\then
- \_a_true
- \else
- \global\advance \csname \metric_origin _hist_
- \romannumeral\a_count \endcsname \@ne
- \ifnum 2>\compared_status
- \global\chardef\compared_status=2
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi\fi\fi
- %
- \if_a_
- \ifnum 3>\compared_status
- \global\chardef\compared_status=3
- \fi
- \begingroup
- \def\do_left_paren{(}
- \def\do_right_paren{)}
- \wlog{Metric~differences~at~lines~\the\a_lineno\space
- and~\the\b_lineno\space respectively:}
- \wlog{\a_line}
- \wlog{\b_line}
- \endgroup
- \glyphified_location
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}\end{macro}
-
-
-
-
-\newif\if_b_
-
-% \begin{macro}{\process_lines}
-% The |\process_lines| macro is the cheif executive in the comparision.
-% Its normal mode of operation is to retrive the next two lines from
-% the input files, match them, and update the metric differences
-% statistics. If the lines do not match, however, it starts building a
-% buffert of lines in which it searches for two matching lines. When
-% these two lines are found the mismatching portions of the files are
-% written to the log file, and the metric difference statistics are
-% updated for the two lines that matched.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\process_lines{
- \get_next_line{a}
- \get_next_line{b}
- \match_lines{\a_line}{\b_line}
- \if_a_
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now the process of trying to find a match begins. At each step of
-% the search for a match, it tries all possible matches with the
-% lines read so far that haven't been tried at an earlier step.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \tracingmacros=\@ne\tracingcommands=\tw@ % DEBUG
- \initialise_search
- \loop
- \get_next_line{a}
- \get_next_line{b}
- \add_to_buffert{a}
- \add_to_buffert{b}
- \match_lines{\a_line}{\b_line}
- \if_a_
- \global\a_bufP=\a_bufmid
- \global\b_bufP=\b_bufmid
- \try_matching
- \fi
- \if_a_
- \global\advance \a_bufmid \@ne
- \global\advance \b_bufmid \@ne
- \ifnum \a_bufmid>\sixt@@n
- \errmessage{Big~buffert.~\the\a_lineno[\the\a_filelineno]:
- \the\b_lineno[\the\b_filelineno]}
- \fi % DEBUG
- \repeat
- \report_mismatch
-% \tracingcommands=\z@\tracingmacros=\z@ % DEBUG
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \fi
- \metric_statistics
- \step_linenos
- \par % DEBUG
- \if \ifx \a_line\end_of_file_line
- \ifx \b_line\end_of_file_line 1\else 0\fi\else 0\fi 0
- % then
- \expandafter\process_lines
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-\def\loadencoding#1{{
- \def\do_slot{\x_cs\xdef{name-#1-\the\slot_number}{\slot_name}}
- \inputetx{#1}
-}}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\comparePLs}
-% The |\comparePLs| command compares two property lists files. It is
-% geared against verifying that two different such files are as good
-% as equal, and it might take a very long time before it gives up on
-% trying to find any resemblance between them. It is furthermore only
-% meant to be used on (V)PL files generated by \package{TFtoPL} or
-% \package{VFtoVP}, because it assumes the property lists follow a
-% stricter syntax than \package{PLtoTF} and \package{VPtoVF} requires
-% them to. Finally it needs to be said that the comparision is rather
-% stupid in many respects, as it is completely line-oriented and
-% takes no notice of what kind of property list it is reading. This
-% may in some cases cause it to find ``matches'' between lines which
-% for syntactical reasons alone cannot match.
-%
-% |\comparePLs| is called as
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\comparePLs|\marg{first PL}\marg{second PL}\marg{encoding}
-% \end{quote}
-% where \meta{first PL} and \meta{second PL} are the complete names
-% (including extensions) of the files to compare. \meta{encoding} is
-% the name of the encoding to use when translating slots to glyph
-% names; leave it empty if you don't want to specify one. (One could
-% use the \texttt{CODINGSCHEME} property to determine the encoding in
-% that case, but this is not currently done). The slot to glyph
-% translation is only done to make it easier to locate the position of
-% some mismatch; it has not effect on the actual comparision.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\last_character
-\def\comparePLs#1#2#3{{
- \def\encoding_name{#3}
- \last_character=\m@ne
- \openin\a_read=#1\x_relax
- \openin\b_read=#2\x_relax
- \immediate\write\sixt@@n{#1~and^^J #2}
- \pl_catcodes
- \let\do_left_paren=\do_property
- \let\do_right_paren=\empty_command
- \global\chardef\compared_status=\z@
- \clear_histograms
- \global\a_filelineno=\@ne
- \global\b_filelineno=\@ne
- \global\a_lineno=\@ne
- \global\b_lineno=\@ne
- \global\a_bufbase=\z@
- \global\b_bufbase=\z@
- \global\a_bufmid=\z@
- \global\b_bufmid=\z@
- \global\a_buftop=\m@ne
- \global\b_buftop=\m@ne
- \process_lines
- \closein\a_read
- \closein\b_read
- \ifcase \compared_status
- \immediate\write\sixt@@n{are~equal.^^J}
- \or
- \immediate\write\sixt@@n{are~almost~equal.^^J}
- \or
- \immediate\write\sixt@@n{are~essentially~equal.}
- \or
- \immediate\write\sixt@@n{have~non-tolerated~metric~differences.}
- \or
- \immediate\write\sixt@@n{do~not~completely~match.}
- \else
- \immediate\write\sixt@@n{could~not~be~matched!}
- \fi
- \ifnum 1<\compared_status
- \immediate\write\sixt@@n{See~log~file~for~specification.}
- \present_histograms
- \immediate\write\sixt@@n{}
- \fi
-}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\(=13 \catcode`\)=13
- \gdef\pl_catcodes{
- \catcode`\(=13 \def({\do_left_paren}
- \catcode`\)=13 \def){\do_right_paren}
- }
-\endgroup
-
-\def\do_property#1~{
- \x_cs\edef{cmd-\sign}{#1}
- \let\metric_origin=\empty_command
- \x_cs\ifx{pl-#1}\x_relax
- \expandafter\ignore_parens
- \else
- \csname pl-#1 \expandafter\endcsname
- \fi
-}
-\def\pl_def_s#1(#2){\x_cs\def{pl-#1}#2~}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\!=13\lccode`\!=`\)
-\lowercase{\endgroup
- \def\pl_def_p#1(#2){\x_cs\def{pl-#1}#2!}
-}
-\def\pl_let#1#2{
- \expandafter\let
- \csname pl-#1 \expandafter\endcsname \csname pl-#2 \endcsname
-}
-
-
-
-\newdimen\tolerance \tolerance=110sp
-
-% The following is for gobbling to the next unmatched right parenthesis.
-% The |\catcode| trick used by the PL-to-MTX converter's
-% |\ignore_parens| cannot be used since the characters are already
-% tokenized, but one can do something similar with an |\edef| since one
-% does not have to worry about the PL files containing material which
-% expands in an undesirable way.
-%
-% The |\line_stop| is so that linebreaks in the parenthesis being
-% gobbled will not cause total havok (although the parenthesis won't be
-% gobbled completely). It inserts end-of-group tokens until the |\edef|
-% is terminated, and then the |\afterassignment| token will close the
-% group and restore the normal definition.
-
-\def\ignore_parens{
- \begingroup
- \def\do_left_paren{{\iffalse}\fi}
- \def\do_right_paren{\iffalse{\fi}}
- \def\line_stop{\do_right_paren\line_stop}
- \afterassignment\endgroup
- \edef\a_macro{\iffalse}\fi
-}
-\def\line_stop{\x_relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\(=1
- \catcode`\)=2
- \gdef\pl_string{
- \begingroup
- \def\do_left_paren{(\iffalse)\fi}
- \def\do_right_paren{\iffalse(\fi)}
- \def\line_stop{\iffalse{\fi}\line_stop}
- \afterassignment\pl_string_i
- \edef\a_macro{\iffalse}\fi
- }
-\endgroup
-\def\pl_string_i{
- \expandafter\endgroup \expandafter\def
- \csname string-\sign \expandafter\endcsname
- \expandafter{\a_macro}
-}
-
-\def\pl_real#1{\sign#1\hundred_pt}
-\newdimen\hundred_pt \hundred_pt=100pt
-
-% Convert a PL int to a \TeX{} int, assuming it's prefixed
-% by |C|, |D|, |O|, or |H|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\pl_int#1#2{
- \sign \ifx#1C `#2
- \else\ifx#1D #2
- \else\ifx#1O '#2
- \else\ifx#1H "#2
- \else -1\errmessage{Unknown~PL~number~prefix~`#1'}
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-
-
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\pl_def_p{NEXTLARGER}(#1~#2){\advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2}}
-\pl_let{BOUNDARYCHAR}{NEXTLARGER}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\x_cs\let{pl-VTITLE}=\pl_string
-\pl_let{FONTNAME}{VTITLE}
-\pl_let{FONTAREA}{VTITLE}
-% \pl_let{CHECKSUM}{VTITLE}
-% % Not really a string, but unsigned numbers can become too large for TeX.
-% \pl_let{FONTCHECKSUM}{CHECKSUM}
-% Commented out since checksums vary too much.
-\pl_def_p{FONTAT}(R~#1){\advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1}}
-\pl_let{FONTDSIZE}{FONTAT}
-\pl_let{SELECTFONT}{NEXTLARGER}
-\pl_let{SETCHAR}{NEXTLARGER}
-\pl_def_p{SETRULE}(R~#1~R~#2){
- \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1}
- \advance \second_dimen \pl_real{#2}
-}
-\x_cs\let{pl-POP}\empty_command
-\pl_let{PUSH}{POP}
-\pl_let{MOVERIGHT}{FONTAT}
-\pl_let{MOVELEFT}{FONTAT}
-\pl_let{MOVEUP}{FONTAT}
-\pl_let{MOVEDOWN}{FONTAT}
-\pl_let{SPECIAL}{VTITLE}
-\pl_let{SPECIALHEX}{VTITLE}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-
-\pl_let{CODINGSCHEME}{VTITLE}
-\pl_let{DESIGNSIZE}{FONTAT}
-
-\def\pl_parameter#1#2#3{
- \advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2}
- \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#3}
-}
-
-\pl_def_p{PARAMETER}(#1~#2~R~#3){\pl_parameter{#1}{#2}{#3}}
-
-\pl_def_p{SLANT}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{1}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{SPACE}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{2}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{STRETCH}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{3}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{SHRINK}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{4}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{XHEIGHT}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{5}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{QUAD}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{6}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{EXTRASPACE}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{7}{#1}}
-
-\pl_def_p{NUM1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{8}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{NUM2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{9}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{NUM3}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{10}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{DENOM1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{11}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{DENOM2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{12}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{SUP1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{13}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{SUP2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{14}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{SUP3}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{15}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{SUB1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{16}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{SUB2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{17}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{SUPDROP}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{18}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{SUBDROP}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{19}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{DELIM1}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{20}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{DELIM2}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{21}{#1}}
-\pl_def_p{AXISHEIGHT}(R~#1){\pl_parameter{D}{22}{#1}}
-
-\pl_let{DEFAULTRULETHICKNESS}{NUM1}
-\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING1}{NUM2}
-\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING2}{NUM3}
-\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING3}{DENOM1}
-\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING4}{DENOM2}
-\pl_let{BIGOPSPACING5}{SUP1}
-
-\def\boundarychar_name{BOUNDARYCHAR}
-\pl_def_s{LABEL}(#1){
- \def\a_macro{#1}
- \ifx \a_macro\boundarychar_name
- \x_cs\let{string-\sign}\a_macro
- \else
- \def\a_macro{\csname pl-LABEL(i\endcsname #1~}
- \expandafter\a_macro
- \fi
-}
-\pl_def_p{LABEL(i}(#1~#2){
- \last_character=\first_integer
- \advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2}
-}
-\pl_def_p{LIG}(#1~#2~#3~#4){
- \advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2}
- \advance \second_integer \pl_int{#3}{#4}
-}
-\pl_let{/LIG}{LIG}
-\pl_let{/LIG>}{LIG}
-\pl_let{LIG/}{LIG}
-\pl_let{LIG/>}{LIG}
-\pl_let{/LIG/}{LIG}
-\pl_let{/LIG/>}{LIG}
-\pl_let{/LIG/>>}{LIG}
-
-\pl_let{HEADER}{LIG}
-
-% \def\pl_lig#1~#2~#3~#4~#5~{
-% \x_cs\def{string-\sign}{#1}
-% \def\LIG#1~{
-% \if\ifx #1C 0
-% \else\ifx #1D 0
-% \else\ifx #1H 0
-% \else\ifx #1O 0 \else 1\fi\fi\fi\fi 0
-% % then
-% \expandafter\both_of_two
-% \else
-% \expandafter\first_of_two
-% \fi{\pl_lig LIG}{~}#1~
-% }
-% \def\/{\pl_lig/}
-
-\pl_let{KRN}{PARAMETER}
-\pl_let{SKIP}{NEXTLARGER}
-
-\pl_def_s{CHARACTER}(#1~#2){
- \last_character=\first_integer
- \advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2}
-}
-\pl_let{CHARWD}{FONTAT}
-\pl_def_p{CHARHT}(R~#1){
- \def\metric_origin{ht}
- \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1}
-}
-\pl_def_p{CHARDP}(R~#1){
- \def\metric_origin{dp}
- \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1}
-}
-\pl_def_p{CHARIC}(R~#1){
- \def\metric_origin{ic}
- \advance \first_dimen \pl_real{#1}
-}
-
-\pl_let{TOP}{NEXTLARGER}
-\pl_let{MID}{NEXTLARGER}
-\pl_let{BOT}{NEXTLARGER}
-\pl_let{REP}{NEXTLARGER}
-
-\pl_let{FONTDIMEN}{POP}
-\pl_let{LIGTABLE}{POP}
-\pl_let{VARCHAR}{POP}
-\pl_def_s{MAPFONT}(#1~#2){\advance \first_integer \pl_int{#1}{#2}}
-\pl_let{MAP}{POP}
-
-
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\catcode`\@=\atcatcode
-\catcode`\^^M=\nlcatcode
-\catcode`\ =\spacecatcode
-\catcode`\~=\tildecatcode
-\catcode`\_=\underscorecatcode
-% \end{macrocode}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparepls.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparepls.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index a735a34ed79..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/comparepls.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-\input fontinst.sty
-\input comparemetrics.sty
-
-% % \tracingmacros=1\tracingcommands=2
-% \comparePLs{cmr5.pl}{cmr5.pl}
-%
-% \bye
-
-\tracingstats=1
-
-\def\oldf{::efficiency:saved:v1.912:}
-\def\newf{::efficiency:saved:v1.913:}
-
-\loadencoding{t1}
-\loadencoding{ot1}
-\loadencoding{ts1}
-\loadencoding{8r}
-
-\comparePLs{\oldf padb7t.vpl}{\newf padb7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padb8c.vpl}{\newf padb8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padb8t.vpl}{\newf padb8t.vpl}{t1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbc7t.vpl}{\newf padbc7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbc8t.vpl}{\newf padbc8t.vpl}{t1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbi7t.vpl}{\newf padbi7t.vpl}{ot1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbi8c.vpl}{\newf padbi8c.vpl}{ts1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbi8t.vpl}{\newf padbi8t.vpl}{t1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbo7t.vpl}{\newf padbo7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbo8c.vpl}{\newf padbo8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbo8t.vpl}{\newf padbo8t.vpl}{t1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padr7t.vpl}{\newf padr7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padr8c.vpl}{\newf padr8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padr8t.vpl}{\newf padr8t.vpl}{t1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padrc7t.vpl}{\newf padrc7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padrc8t.vpl}{\newf padrc8t.vpl}{t1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padri7t.vpl}{\newf padri7t.vpl}{ot1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padri8c.vpl}{\newf padri8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padri8t.vpl}{\newf padri8t.vpl}{t1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padro7t.vpl}{\newf padro7t.vpl}{ot1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padro8c.vpl}{\newf padro8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padro8t.vpl}{\newf padro8t.vpl}{t1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf pads7t.vpl}{\newf pads7t.vpl}{ot1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf pads8c.vpl}{\newf pads8c.vpl}{ts1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf pads8t.vpl}{\newf pads8t.vpl}{t1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padsc7t.vpl}{\newf padsc7t.vpl}{ot1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padsc8t.vpl}{\newf padsc8t.vpl}{t1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padsi7t.vpl}{\newf padsi7t.vpl}{ot1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padsi8c.vpl}{\newf padsi8c.vpl}{ts1} %OK 11sp
-\comparePLs{\oldf padsi8t.vpl}{\newf padsi8t.vpl}{t1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padso7t.vpl}{\newf padso7t.vpl}{ot1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padso8c.vpl}{\newf padso8c.vpl}{ts1}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padso8t.vpl}{\newf padso8t.vpl}{t1}
-
-\comparePLs{\oldf padb8a.pl}{\newf padb8a.pl}{}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padb8r.pl}{\newf padb8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbi8a.pl}{\newf padbi8a.pl}{}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbi8r.pl}{\newf padbi8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padbo8r.pl}{\newf padbo8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padr8a.pl}{\newf padr8a.pl}{}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padr8r.pl}{\newf padr8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padrc8a.pl}{\newf padrc8a.pl}{}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padrc8r.pl}{\newf padrc8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padri8a.pl}{\newf padri8a.pl}{}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padri8r.pl}{\newf padri8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padro8r.pl}{\newf padro8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf pads8a.pl}{\newf pads8a.pl}{}
-\comparePLs{\oldf pads8r.pl}{\newf pads8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padsc8a.pl}{\newf padsc8a.pl}{}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padsc8r.pl}{\newf padsc8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padsi8a.pl}{\newf padsi8a.pl}{}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padsi8r.pl}{\newf padsi8r.pl}{8r}
-\comparePLs{\oldf padso8r.pl}{\newf padso8r.pl}{8r}
-
-\bye \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/scaledtest.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/scaledtest.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index f5e9dd03a2d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/scaledtest.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-%&Plain
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-\installfonts
- \installfont{foo}{scaledtest scaled 300}{ot1}{OT1}{zzz}{m}{n}{}
-\endinstallfonts
-
-\bye \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/speedtest1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/speedtest1.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index a92823e7210..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/speedtest1.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-\edef\spacecatcode{\the\catcode`\ }
-\edef\nlcatcode{\the\catcode`\^^M}
-\edef\atcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
-\edef\underscorecatcode{\the\catcode`\_}
-\edef\tildecatcode{\the\catcode`\~}
-\catcode`\ =9
-\catcode`\^^M=9
-\catcode`\@=11
-\catcode`\_=11
-\catcode`\~=10
-
-\def\Mtxtopl#1#2{{
- \open_out{#2.pl}
- \top_of_pl_hook
- \out_line{(COMMENT~raw~font~#2~created~by~fontinst~
- v\fontinstversion)}
- \out_line{}
- \out_line{(COMMENT~Filename:~#2.pl)}
- \out_line{(COMMENT~Created~by:~tex~\jobname)}
- \out_line{(COMMENT~Created~using:~\string\mtxtopl{#1}{#2})}
- \out_line{}
- \out_line{(COMMENT~This~file~can~be~turned~into~a~ligless~TeX~font~
- with)}
- \out_line{(COMMENT~pltotfm~#2.pl~#2.tfm)}
- \out_line{}
- \out_line{(COMMENT~THIS~FILE~CAN~THEN~BE~DELETED.)}
- \out_line{}
- \out_line{(DESIGNSIZE~R~10.0)}
- \out_line{}
- \let\setglyph=\iffalse
- \let\endsetglyph=\fi
- \let\setkern=\gobble_three
- \let\setrawglyph=\Pl_raw_glyph
- \inputmtx{#1}
- \out_line{}
- \out_line{(COMMENT~END~OF~FILE~#2.pl)}
- \close_out{Raw~font}
-}}
-\def\Pl_raw_glyph#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{
- \a_count=#4
- \out_line{(CHARACTER~\vpl_int\a_count\space(COMMENT~#1)}
- \out_lline{(CHARWD~R~\make_factor{#5})}
- \out_lline{(CHARHT~R~\make_factor{#6})}
- \out_lline{(CHARDP~R~\make_factor{#7})}
- \out_lline{(CHARIC~R~\make_factor{#8})}
- \out_lline{)}
-}
-
-
-\catcode`\@=\atcatcode
-\catcode`\^^M=\nlcatcode
-\catcode`\ =\spacecatcode
-\catcode`\~=\tildecatcode
-\catcode`\_=\underscorecatcode
-
-\batchmode
-\for(n){1}{500}{1}\Mtxtopl{cmr5}{cmr5.new}\endfor(n)
-
-\bye
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testfont.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testfont.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 544642aae45..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testfont.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,208 +0,0 @@
-% A testbed for font evaluation (see The METAFONTbook, Appendix H)
-
-\tracinglostchars=0
-\tolerance=1000
-\raggedbottom
-\nopagenumbers
-\parindent=0pt
-\newlinechar=`@
-\hyphenpenalty=200
-\doublehyphendemerits=30000
-\hyphenation{prom-i-nent}
-
-\newcount\m \newcount\n \newcount\p \newdimen\dim
-\chardef\other=12
-
-\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
- July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
- \space\number\day, \number\year}
-\def\hours{\n=\time \divide\n 60
- \m=-\n \multiply\m 60 \advance\m \time
- \twodigits\n\twodigits\m}
-\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum #1<10 0\fi \number#1}
-
-\def\init{\message{@Name of the font to test = }
- \read-1 to\fontname \startfont
- \message{Now type a test command (\string\help\space for help):}}
-\def\startfont{\font\testfont=\fontname \spaceskip=0pt
- \leftline{\sevenrm Test of \fontname\unskip\ on \today\ at \hours}
- \medskip
- \testfont \setbaselineskip
- \ifdim\fontdimen6\testfont<10pt \rightskip=0pt plus 20pt
- \else\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \fi
- \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\testfont % space between words (\raggedright)
- \xspaceskip=\fontdimen2\testfont \advance\xspaceskip by\fontdimen7\testfont}
-
-{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=\other
-|gdef|help{|message{%
-\init switches to another font;@%
-\end or \bye finishes the run;@%
-\table prints the font layout in tabular format;@%
-\text prints a sample text, assuming TeX text font conventions;@%
-\sample combines \table and \text;@%
-\mixture mixes a background character with a series of others;@%
-\alternation interleaves a background character with a series;@%
-\alphabet prints all lowercase letters within a given background;@%
-\ALPHABET prints all uppercase letters within a given background;@%
-\series prints a series of letters within a given background;@%
-\lowers prints a comprehensive test of lowercase;@%
-\uppers prints a comprehensive test of uppercase;@%
-\digits prints a comprehensive test of numerals;@%
-\math prints a comprehensive test of TeX math italic;@%
-\names prints a text that mixes upper and lower case;@%
-\punct prints a punctuation test;@%
-\bigtest combines many of the above routines;@%
-\help repeats this message;@%
-and you can use ordinary TeX commands (e.g., to \input a file).}}}
-
-\def\setbaselineskip{\setbox0=\hbox{\n=0
-\loop\char\n \ifnum \n<255 \advance\n 1 \repeat}
-\baselineskip=6pt \advance\baselineskip\ht0 \advance\baselineskip\dp0 }
-
-\def\setchar#1{{\escapechar-1\message{\string#1 character = }%
- \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials
- \read-1 to\next
- \expandafter\finsetchar\next\next#1}}
-\def\finsetchar#1#2\next#3{\global\chardef#3=`#1
- \ifnum #3=`\# \global\chardef#3=#2 \fi}
-\def\promptthree{\setchar\background
- \setchar\starting \setchar\ending}
-
-\def\mixture{\promptthree \domix\mixpattern}
-\def\alternation{\promptthree \domix\altpattern}
-\def\mixpattern{\0\1\0\0\1\1\0\0\0\1\1\1\0\1}
-\def\altpattern{\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0\1\0}
-\def\domix#1{\par\chardef\0=\background \n=\starting
- \loop \chardef\1=\n #1\endgraf
- \ifnum \n<\ending \advance\n 1 \repeat}
-
-\def\!{\discretionary{\background}{\background}{\background}}
-\def\series{\promptthree \!\doseries\starting\ending\par}
-\def\doseries#1#2{\n=#1\loop\char\n\!\ifnum\n<#2\advance\n 1 \repeat}
-\def\complower{\!\doseries{`a}{`z}\doseries{'31}{'34}\par}
-\def\compupper{\!\doseries{`A}{`Z}\doseries{'35}{'37}\par}
-\def\compdigs{\!\doseries{`0}{`9}\par}
-\def\alphabet{\setchar\background\complower}
-\def\ALPHABET{\setchar\background\compupper}
-
-\def\lowers{\docomprehensive\complower{`a}{`z}{'31}{'34}}
-\def\uppers{\docomprehensive\compupper{`A}{`Z}{'35}{'37}}
-\def\digits{\docomprehensive\compdigs{`0}{`4}{`5}{`9}}
-\def\docomprehensive#1#2#3#4#5{\par\chardef\background=#2
- \loop{#1} \ifnum\background<#3\m=\background\advance\m 1
- \chardef\background=\m \repeat \chardef\background=#4
- \loop{#1} \ifnum\background<#5\m=\background\advance\m 1
- \chardef\background=\m \repeat}
-
-\def\names{ {\AA}ngel\aa\ Beatrice Claire
- Diana \'Erica Fran\c{c}oise Ginette H\'el\`ene Iris
- Jackie K\=aren {\L}au\.ra Mar{\'\i}a N\H{a}ta{\l}{\u\i}e {\O}ctave
- Pauline Qu\^eneau Roxanne Sabine T\~a{\'\j}a Ur\v{s}ula
- Vivian Wendy Xanthippe Yv{\o}nne Z\"azilie\par}
-\def\punct{\par\dopunct{min}\dopunct{pig}\dopunct{hid}
- \dopunct{HIE}\dopunct{TIP}\dopunct{fluff}
- \$1,234.56 + 7/8 = 9\% @ \#0\par}
-\def\dopunct#1{#1,\ #1:\ #1;\ `#1'\ ?`#1?\ !`#1!\ (#1)\ [#1]\ #1*\ #1.\par}
-
-\def\bigtest{\sample
- hamburgefonstiv HAMBURGEFONSTIV\par
- \names \punct \lowers \uppers \digits}
-
-\def\math{\textfont1=\testfont \skewchar\testfont=\skewtrial
- \mathchardef\Gamma="100 \mathchardef\Delta="101
- \mathchardef\Theta="102 \mathchardef\Lambda="103 \mathchardef\Xi="104
- \mathchardef\Pi="105 \mathchardef\Sigma="106 \mathchardef\Upsilon="107
- \mathchardef\Phi="108 \mathchardef\Psi="109 \mathchardef\Omega="10A
- \def\ii{i} \def\jj{j}
- \def\\##1{|##1|+}\mathtrial
- \def\\##1{##1_2+}\mathtrial
- \def\\##1{##1^2+}\mathtrial
- \def\\##1{##1/2+}\mathtrial
- \def\\##1{2/##1+}\mathtrial
- \def\\##1{##1,{}+}\mathtrial
- \def\\##1{d##1+}\mathtrial
- \let\ii=\imath \let\jj=\jmath \def\\##1{\hat##1+}\mathtrial}
-\newcount\skewtrial \skewtrial='177
-\def\mathtrial{$\\A \\B \\C \\D \\E \\F \\G \\H \\I \\J \\K \\L \\M \\N \\O
- \\P \\Q \\R \\S \\T \\U \\V \\W \\X \\Y \\Z \\a \\b \\c \\d \\e \\f \\g
- \\h \\\ii \\\jj \\k \\l \\m \\n \\o \\p \\q \\r \\s \\t \\u \\v \\w \\x \\y
- \\z \\\alpha \\\beta \\\gamma \\\delta \\\epsilon \\\zeta \\\eta \\\theta
- \\\iota \\\kappa \\\lambda \\\mu \\\nu \\\xi \\\pi \\\rho \\\sigma \\\tau
- \\\upsilon \\\phi \\\chi \\\psi \\\omega \\\vartheta \\\varpi \\\varphi
- \\\Gamma \\\Delta \\\Theta \\\Lambda \\\Xi \\\Pi \\\Sigma \\\Upsilon
- \\\Phi \\\Psi \\\Omega \\\partial \\\ell \\\wp$\par}
-\def\mathsy{\begingroup\skewtrial='060 % for math symbol font tests
- \def\mathtrial{$\\A \\B \\C \\D \\E \\F \\G \\H \\I \\J \\K \\L
- \\M \\N \\O \\P \\Q \\R \\S \\T \\U \\V \\W \\X \\Y \\Z$\par}
- \math\endgroup}
-
-\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}} % octal constant
-\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}} % hexadecimal constant
-\def\setdigs#1"#2{\gdef\h{#2}% \h=hex prefix; \0\1=corresponding octal
- \m=\n \divide\m by 64 \xdef\0{\the\m}%
- \multiply\m by-64 \advance\m by\n \divide\m by 8 \xdef\1{\the\m}}
-\def\testrow{\setbox0=\hbox{\penalty 1\def\\{\char"\h}%
- \\0\\1\\2\\3\\4\\5\\6\\7\\8\\9\\A\\B\\C\\D\\E\\F%
- \global\p=\lastpenalty}} % \p=1 if none of the characters exist
-\def\oddline{\cr
- \noalign{\nointerlineskip}
- \multispan{19}\hrulefill&
- \setbox0=\hbox{\lower 2.3pt\hbox{\hex{\h x}}}\smash{\box0}\cr
- \noalign{\nointerlineskip}}
-\newif\ifskipping
-\def\evenline{\loop\skippingfalse
- \ifnum\n<256 \m=\n \divide\m 16 \chardef\next=\m
- \expandafter\setdigs\meaning\next \testrow
- \ifnum\p=1 \skippingtrue \fi\fi
- \ifskipping \global\advance\n 16 \repeat
- \ifnum\n=256 \let\next=\endchart\else\let\next=\morechart\fi
- \next}
-\def\morechart{\cr\noalign{\hrule\penalty5000}
- \chartline \oddline \m=\1 \advance\m 1 \xdef\1{\the\m}
- \chartline \evenline}
-\def\chartline{&\oct{\0\1x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&}
-\def\chartstrut{\lower4.5pt\vbox to14pt{}}
-\def\table{$$\global\n=0
- \halign to\hsize\bgroup
- \chartstrut##\tabskip0pt plus10pt&
- &\hfil##\hfil&\vrule##\cr
- \lower6.5pt\null
- &&&\oct0&&\oct1&&\oct2&&\oct3&&\oct4&&\oct5&&\oct6&&\oct7&\evenline}
-\def\endchart{\cr\noalign{\hrule}
- \raise11.5pt\null&&&\hex 8&&\hex 9&&\hex A&&\hex B&
- &\hex C&&\hex D&&\hex E&&\hex F&\cr\egroup$$\par}
-\def\:{\setbox0=\hbox{\char\n}%
- \ifdim\ht0>7.5pt\reposition
- \else\ifdim\dp0>2.5pt\reposition\fi\fi
- \box0\global\advance\n 1 }
-\def\reposition{\setbox0=\vbox{\kern2pt\box0}\dim=\dp0
- \advance\dim 2pt \dp0=\dim}
-\def\centerlargechars{
- \def\reposition{\setbox0=\hbox{$\vcenter{\kern2pt\box0\kern2pt}$}}}
-
-\def\text{{\advance\baselineskip-4pt
-\setbox0=\hbox{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz}
-\ifdim\hsize>2\wd0 \ifdim 15pc>2\wd0 \hsize=15pc \else \hsize=2\wd0 \fi\fi
-On November 14, 1885, Senator \& Mrs.~Leland Stanford called
-together at their San Francisco mansion the 24~prominent men who had
-been chosen as the first trustees of The Leland Stanford Junior University.
-They handed to the board the Founding Grant of the University, which they
-had executed three days before. This document---with various amendments,
-legislative acts, and court decrees---remains as the University's charter.
-In bold, sweeping language it stipulates that the objectives of the University
-are ``to qualify students for personal success and direct usefulness in life;
-and to promote the publick welfare by exercising an influence in behalf of
-humanity and civilization, teaching the blessings of liberty regulated by
-law, and inculcating love and reverence for the great principles of
-government as derived from the inalienable rights of man to life, liberty,
-and the pursuit of happiness.'' \moretext
-(!`THE DAZED BROWN FOX QUICKLY GAVE 12345--67890 JUMPS!)\par}}
-\def\moretext{?`But aren't Kafka's Schlo{\ss} and {\AE}sop's {\OE}uvres
-often na{\"\i}ve vis-\`a-vis the d{\ae}monic ph{\oe}nix's official r\^ole
-in fluffy souffl\'es? }
-\def\omitaccents{\let\moretext=\relax}
-
-\def\sample{\table\text}
-
-\ifx\noinit!\else\init\fi
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testsc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testsc.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index c54452d45e1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/testsc.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-\transformfont{padr8r} {\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}}
-\transformfont{padrc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padrc8a}}}
-\transformfont{pads8r} {\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{pads8a}}}
-\transformfont{padsc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsc8a}}}
-\fromafm{padr8x}
-\fromafm{pads8x}
-
-\installfonts
-
-\installfamily{T1}{pad} {}
-\installfamily{T1}{padx}{}
-\installfamily{T1}{padj}{}
-
-\installfont{padrc8t}{padrc8r,latin}
- {T1}{T1}{pad}{m}{sc}{}
-\installfont{padrc9e}
- {kernoff,padr8r,padr8x,kernon,glyphoff,padrc8r,glyphon,
- resetsc,latinsc}
- {T1c}{T1}{padx}{m}{sc}{}
-\installfont{padrc9d}
- {kernoff,padr8r,padr8x,kernon,glyphoff,padrc8r,glyphon,
- resetosf,resetsc,latinsc}
- {T1cj}{T1}{padj}{m}{sc}{}
-
-\installfont{padsc8t}{padsc8r,latin}
- {T1}{T1}{pad}{m}{sc}{}
-\installfont{padsc9e}
- {kernoff,pads8r,pads8x,kernon,glyphoff,padsc8r,glyphon,
- resetsc,latinsc}
- {T1c}{T1}{padx}{sb}{sc}{}
-\installfont{padsc9d}
- {kernoff,pads8r,pads8x,kernon,glyphoff,padrc8r,glyphon,
- resetosf,resetsc,latinsc}
- {T1cj}{T1}{padj}{sb}{sc}{}
-
-\endinstallfonts
-\bye
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.mtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.mtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 624a39bf81d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.mtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-\relax
-
-% This is a test MTX file for the new implementation of
-% the \transformfont stuff.
-
-\metrics
-
-\setint{italicslant}{0}
-\setint{italicslant}{100}
-\setint{xheight}{400}
-
-\setrawglyph{a}{v1901test}{10.95pt}{10} {500}{400}{0}{40}
-\setrawglyph{g}{v1901test}{10.95pt}{10} {500}{400}{-300}{40}
-
-\setkern{a}{g}{100}
-
-\setglyph{ag}
- \glyphpcc{a}{0}{500}
- \glyphpcc{g}{500}{0}
-\endsetglyph
-
-\endmetrics \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 81a6218f679..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1901test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,214 +0,0 @@
-% Test of fontinst v1.901.
-% Started 1999/03/13.
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-% Part one---test of pooled file allocation.
-\catcode`\_=11
-\catcode`\@=11
-
-\def\show_out_filenames{%
- \immediate\write16{\string\count17=\the\count17}%
- \for(i){-1}{16}{1}%
- \immediate\write16{Stream \strint{i}:
- \x_cs\meaning{out_filename-\strint{i}}%
- }%
- \endfor(i)%
-}
-
-% %1 Standard usage
-% \show_out_filenames
-% \open_pout\tF{\jobname.out}
-% \show_out_filenames
-% \pout_line\tF{Hello world!}
-% \close_pout\tF{Test output}
-% \show_out_filenames
-% % Seems to work fine.
-
-% %2 Allocating LOTS of files.
-% \newcount\j_count
-% \newcount\k_count
-% \j_count=0
-% \k_count=1
-% \for(o){1}{48}{1}
-% \x_cs\open_pout{F-\strint{o}}{\jobname.\strint{o}}%
-% \ifodd \int{o} \else
-% \x_cs\pout_line{F-\the\k_count}{%
-% open=\strint{o} close=\the\j_count\space write=\the\k_count
-% }%
-% \multiply \k_count \thr@@
-% \advance \k_count \@ne
-% \d_count=\k_count
-% \divide \d_count \int{o}%
-% \multiply \d_count \int{o}%
-% \advance \k_count -\d_count
-% \advance \k_count \@ne
-% \advance \j_count \@ne
-% \x_cs\close_pout{F-\the\j_count}{Test data}%
-% \fi
-% \d_count=\int{o}%
-% \divide \d_count 8%
-% \multiply \d_count 8%
-% \advance \d_count -\int{o}%
-% \ifnum 0=\d_count \show_out_filenames \fi
-% \endfor(o)
-% % Seems to work fine as well.
-
-
-%% Part two---test of reimplemented \transformfont stuff
-%% Part two B---test of \recordtransforms stuff
-
-\recordtransforms{mapfrags.tex}
-\transformfont{v1901test1}{
- \xscalefont{2000}{\reencodefont{t1c}{\frommtx{v1901test}}}
-}
-\transformfont{v1901test2}{
- \yscalefont{500}{\xscalefont{2000}{\frommtx{v1901test}}}
-}
-\transformfont{v1901test3}{
- \reencodefont{t1}{\slantfont{100}{\frommtx{v1901test}}}
-}
-\endrecordtransforms
-
-
-\bye
-
-%% Part three---test of reglyphing
-
-\reglyphfonts
- \resetcommand\iftokeep#1\then{\ifnum 0<#1}
- % This means that an AFM command will survive the conversion only if
- % it refers to at least one renamed glyph and not refer to any killed
- % glyph.
-
-% \offmtxcommand\setrawglyph
-% \offmtxcommand\setglyph
-% % This reglyphing file is inteded for extracting information from the
-% % AFM file of a Caps, Small caps, and Oldstyle figures fonts--with the
-% % intention to build a corresponding virtual font with glyphs that are
-% % present in the Regular and Expert Regular variants instead. Hence
-% % there is no need for \setrawglyph or \setglyph commands (the
-% % dimensions of the characters are known from the Reg. and Exp.Reg.
-% % AFM's), but the \setkern commands are most interesting (since 8x
-% % fonts don't contain any upper case letters, and hence has no kerning
-% % pairs between these and the small caps either).
-
-
- \renameglyph{dollaroldstyle}{dollar}
- \renameglyph{ampersandsmall}{ampersand}
-
- \renameglyph{zerooldstyle}{zero}
- \renameglyph{oneoldstyle}{one}
- \renameglyph{twooldstyle}{two}
- \renameglyph{threeoldstyle}{three}
- \renameglyph{fouroldstyle}{four}
- \renameglyph{fiveoldstyle}{five}
- \renameglyph{sixoldstyle}{six}
- \renameglyph{sevenoldstyle}{seven}
- \renameglyph{eigtholdstyle}{eight}
- \renameglyph{nineoldstyle}{nine}
-
- \renameglyph{Asmall}{a}
- \renameglyph{Bsmall}{b}
- \renameglyph{Csmall}{c}
- \renameglyph{Dsmall}{d}
- \renameglyph{Esmall}{e}
- \renameglyph{Fsmall}{f}
- \renameglyph{Gsmall}{g}
- \renameglyph{Hsmall}{h}
- \renameglyph{Ismall}{i}
- \renameglyph{Jsmall}{j}
- \renameglyph{Ksmall}{k}
- \renameglyph{Lsmall}{l}
- \renameglyph{Msmall}{m}
- \renameglyph{Nsmall}{n}
- \renameglyph{Osmall}{o}
- \renameglyph{Psmall}{p}
- \renameglyph{Qsmall}{q}
- \renameglyph{Rsmall}{r}
- \renameglyph{Ssmall}{s}
- \renameglyph{Tsmall}{t}
- \renameglyph{Usmall}{u}
- \renameglyph{Vsmall}{v}
- \renameglyph{Wsmall}{w}
- \renameglyph{Xsmall}{x}
- \renameglyph{Ysmall}{y}
- \renameglyph{Zsmall}{z}
-
- \renameglyph{centoldstyle}{cent}
-
- % \renameglyph{FIsmall}{fi}
- % \renameglyph{FLsmall}{fl}
- % These two aren't really necessary, since the ligature `fi' looks
- % exactly as the letters `f'`i' next to each others.
- \killglyph{fi}
- \killglyph{fl}
-
- \renameglyph{Gravesmall}{grave}
- \renameglyph{Acutesmall}{acute}
- \renameglyph{Circumflexsmall}{circumflex}
- \renameglyph{Tildesmall}{tilde}
- \renameglyph{Macronsmall}{macron}
- \renameglyph{Brevesmall}{breve}
- \renameglyph{Dotaccentsmall}{dotaccent}
- \renameglyph{Dieresissmall}{dieresis}
- \renameglyph{Ringsmall}{ring}
- \renameglyph{Cedillasmall}{cedilla}
- \renameglyph{Ogoneksmall}{ogonek}
- \renameglyph{Caronsmall}{caron}
-
- \renameglyph{AEsmall}{ae}
- \renameglyph{dotlessIsmall}{dotlessi}
- \renameglyph{Lslashsmall}{lslash}
- \renameglyph{Oslashsmall}{oslash}
- \renameglyph{OEsmall}{oe}
- % \renameglyph{SSsmall}{germandbls}
- % This isn't really needed in the AGaramond font family, since `SSsmall'
- % looks exactly like `Ssmall'`Ssmall'
- \killglyph{germandbls}
-
- \renameglyph{Oacutesmall}{oacute}
- \renameglyph{Odieresissmall}{odieresis}
- \renameglyph{Ucircumflexsmall}{ucircumflex}
-
- \renameglyph{Uacutesmall}{uacute}
- \renameglyph{Eacutesmall}{eacute}
- \renameglyph{Iacutesmall}{iacute}
- \renameglyph{Icircumflexsmall}{icircumflex}
-
- \renameglyph{Thornsmall}{thorn}
- \renameglyph{Yacutesmall}{yacute}
-
- \renameglyph{Ocircumflexsmall}{ocircumflex}
- \renameglyph{Otildesmall}{otilde}
- \renameglyph{Ntildesmall}{ntilde}
- \renameglyph{Ydieresissmall}{ydieresis}
- \renameglyph{Ethsmall}{eth}
- \renameglyph{Acircumflexsmall}{acircumflex}
- \renameglyph{Aringsmall}{aring}
- \renameglyph{Ccedillasmall}{ccedilla}
-
- \renameglyph{Ugravesmall}{ugrave}
- \renameglyph{Zcaronsmall}{zcaron}
- \renameglyph{Idieresissmall}{idieresis}
- \renameglyph{Agravesmall}{agrave}
-
- \renameglyph{Ogravesmall}{ograve}
-
- \renameglyph{Udieresissmall}{udieresis}
- \renameglyph{Edieresissmall}{edieresis}
- \renameglyph{Aacutesmall}{aacute}
- \renameglyph{Igravesmall}{igrave}
- \renameglyph{Idieresissmall}{idieresis}
- \renameglyph{Adieresissmall}{adieresis}
-
- \renameglyph{Scaronsmall}{scaron}
- \renameglyph{Egravesmall}{egrave}
- \renameglyph{Atildesmall}{atilde}
- \renameglyph{Ecircumflexsmall}{ecircumflex}
-
- \reglyphfont{K-padrc}{gdsc}
- \reglyphfont{K-padsc}{padsc8a}
-\endreglyphfonts
-
-
-\bye \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1902test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1902test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 7274fb76597..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1902test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-\generalpltomtx{cmr5}{cmr5;1}{pl}{OT1}
-\generalpltomtx{padr9d}{padr9d;1}{vpl}{}
-\generalpltomtx{padr9d}{padr9d;2}{vpl}{OT1}
-
-\transformfont{cmr5;2}{\fromplgivenetx{cmr5}{OT1}}
-\transformfont{padr9d;3}{\fromvpl{padr9d}}
-\transformfont{padr9d;4}{\fromvplgivenetx{padr9d}{OT1}}
-
-\bye \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1905test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1905test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 47117acc5fb..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1905test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-\input fontinst.sty
-\catcode`\_=11\catcode`\ =9\catcode`\^^M=9
-\catcode`\~=10\catcode`\@=11
-
-\fontinst_error{Hungarian}{
- I~will~not~buy~this~record,\message_break
- it~is~scratched
-}\error_help_a
-
-\fontinst_warning{Hungarian}{Your~hovercraft~is~full~of~eels}
-
-\fontinst_info{Hungarian}{That~will~be~six~pence,~please}
-
-\fontinst_warning_no_line{Hungarian}{
- Do~you~want~to~come~home~to~my~place\message_break
- and~pantsy~pantsy?
-}
-
-
-
-
-\bye \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.mtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.mtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 94306a07b32..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.mtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-\relax
-% v1906test.mtx
-%
-% A test of the nokerning commands and the \glyphbboxright IE.
-
-
-\metrics
-
-\for(i){0}{20}{1}
- \setglyph{c\strint{i}}
- \glyphrule{20}{\mul{\add{\int{i}}{1}}{20}}
- \movert{\mul{20}{\int{i}}}
- \endsetglyph
-\endfor(i)
-
-
-\setglyph{d}
- \for(i){5}{10}{1}
- \glyphpcc{c\strint{i}}{\int{i}}{\int{i}}
- \endfor(i)
- \resetint{j}{\glyphbboxright}
- \immediate\write16{\string\glyphbboxright=\strint{j}}
- \glyph{c20}{1000}
- \resetint{j}{\glyphbboxright}
- \immediate\write16{\string\glyphbboxright=\strint{j}}
-\endsetglyph
-
-
-\for(i){0}{20}{1}
- \for(j){0}{20}{1}
- \setkern{c\strint{i}}{c\strint{j}}{\mul{\int{i}}{\int{j}}}
- \endfor(j)
-\endfor(i)
-
-\noleftkerning{c1,c3,c5,c7,c9,c11,c13,c15,c17,c19}
-\immediate\write16{\expandafter\meaning\csname a_macro\endcsname}
-\norightkerning{c1,c3,c5,c7,c9}
-
-% \resetint{i}{0}
-% \loop
-% \setkern{c\strint{i}}{c\strint{i}}{-50}
-% \resetint{j}{\sub{20}{\int{i}}}
-% \resetkern{c\strint{i}}{c\strint{j}}{-100}
-% \ifnum 20>\int{i}
-% \resetint{i}{\add{\int{i}}{1}}
-% \repeat
-
-
-% \resetint{i}{0}
-% \loop
-% \ifiskern{c3}{c\strint{i}}\then
-% \resetint{T}{\kerning{c3}{c\strint{i}}}
-% \message{c3:c\strint{i} has kern \strint{T} units^^J}
-% \else
-% \message{c3:c\strint{i} no kern^^J}
-% \fi
-% \ifnum 20>\int{i}
-% \resetint{i}{\add{\int{i}}{1}}
-% \repeat
-
-
-
-\endmetrics
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 92ed6281198..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1906test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-%&Plain
-% Test of fontinst v1.906.
-% Begun 1999/08/01.
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-\installfonts
- \installfamily{U}{ztest1}{}
- \installfont{v1906test}{v1906test}{v1906test}{U}{ztest1}{m}{n}{}
-\endinstallfonts
-
-\bye
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1913test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1913test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index b9382cdf898..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1913test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-\recordtransforms{v1913test.recs}
-
-\transformfont{padr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}}
-\transformfont{padr8r-ys}{\yscalefont{\div{397000}{663}}{\frommtx{padr8r}}}
-\reglyphfonts
- \renameglyph{oneoldstyle}{one}
- \reglyphfont{padr8r-ys2}{padr8r-ys}
-\endreglyphfonts
-
-\installfonts
- \installfamily{T1}{pad}{}
- \installfamily{8r}{pad}{}
- \installfont{padr9d}{padr8r,padr8r-ys2,padr8x,latin}{t1j}{T1}{pad}{m}{n}{}
- \installrawfont{padr8r2}{padr8r-ys}{8r}{8r}{pad}{m}{n}{}
-\endinstallfonts
-
-\endrecordtransforms
-
-\bye \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 73b271b986c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-%1
-\recordtransforms{v1914test.recs}
-
-\transformfont{padr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}}
-\for(x){0}{2}{1}
- \for(y){0}{2}{1}
- \transformfont{p-ad-rr--8r--\strint{x}=\strint{y}}{
- \xscalefont{\add{\mul{\int{x}}{300}}{700}}{
- \yscalefont{\add{\mul{\int{y}}{300}}{700}}{
- \frommtx{padr8r}}}}
- \endfor(y)
-\endfor(x)
-
-\installfonts
- \installfamily{T1}{padxy}{}
- \installfamily{8r}{padxy}{}
- \for(x){0}{2}{1}
- \for(y){0}{2}{1}
- \installfont{p-ad-rr--8t--\strint{x}=\strint{y}}
- {p-ad-rr--8r--\strint{x}=\strint{y},latin}
- {t1}{T1}{padxy}{m\strint{x}\strint{y}}{n}{}
- \installrawfont{p-ad-rr--8r--\strint{x}=\strint{y}}
- {p-ad-rr--8r--\strint{x}=\strint{y},8r}
- {8r}{8r}{padxy}{m\strint{x}\strint{y}}{n}{}
- \endfor(y)
- \endfor(x)
-\endinstallfonts
-
-\endrecordtransforms
-
-% % \tracingmacros=1\tracingcommands=2
-% %2
-% \installfonts
-% \installrawfont{cmr5}{cmr5,\metrics
-% \resetint{xheight}{\mul{\int{xheight}}{2}},kernoff}{ot1}{OT1}
-% {cmr}{m}{n}{5}
-% \installfont{padr18t}{padr8r scaled 856,%
-% \metrics \message{%
-% \ifisint{rawscale}\then\strint{rawscale}\else None\fi
-% }%
-% \expandafter\show \csname g-A\endcsname
-% ,latin,%
-% \metrics \message{%
-% \ifisint{rawscale}\then\strint{rawscale}\else None\fi
-% }}{t1}{T1}{pad}{m}{ns}{}
-% \endinstallfonts
-
-\bye \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testmap.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testmap.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b1921bbc8d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testmap.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,17 +0,0 @@
-\input finstmsc.sty
-
-\resetstr{PSfontsuffix}{.pfb}
-\adddriver{dvipdfm}{v1914test.dvipdfm}
-\adddriver{pltotf}{v1914test.sh} % v1.915 feature, actually
-\input v1914test.recs
-\donedrivers
-
-\AssumeLWFN
-\adddriver{dvips}{v1914test.map}
-\adddriver{debug}{v1914test.debug}
-\debugvalue{PS_font_file}
-\input v1914test.recs
-\donedrivers
-
-
-\bye
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testshow.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testshow.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index bd7a957b0a8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1914testshow.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass{article}
-
-
-\newcommand\fontxy[2]{%
- \usefont{T1}{padxy}{m#1#2}{n}%
- Flygande b\"ackasiner s\"oka hwila p\r{a} mjuka tuvor%
-}
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-$$
- \hss
- \begin{tabular}{lll}
- \fontxy00& \fontxy10& \fontxy20\\
- \fontxy01& \fontxy11& \fontxy21\\
- \fontxy02& \fontxy12& \fontxy22
- \end{tabular}
- \hss
-$$
-\end{document}
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index b60946a402b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-% %1: Catcodes
-% \def\do#1{Catcode of `\string#1 = \the\catcode`#1 ^^J}
-% \def\showcatcodes{\message{\do{\ }\do{\^^M}\do{\@}\do{\_}\do{\~}}}
-%
-% \showcatcodes
-% \show\fontinstcc
-% \fontinstcc
-% \showcatcodes
-% \show\normalcc
-% \normalcc
-% \showcatcodes
-
-%2: Aliased glyphs
-\input Knuth:fontinst:New.fontinst:cyrfinst:etc:fnstcorr.tex
-\transformfont{padsc8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsc8a}}}
-\def\renameglyph#1#2{\galias{#1}{#2}}
-\input csc2x.tex
-\transformfont{padscx8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padsc8a}}}
-% När glyfnamnen har tagits bort från de omkodade PL-filerna så är
-% de i allt väsentligt lika. Sålunda tycks det fungera!
-
-
-\bye \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915testmap.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915testmap.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e83526cd40..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1915testmap.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-\input finstmsc.sty
-\adddriver{pltotf}{v1915test.sh}
-\input v1914test.recs
-\donedrivers
-\setstr{TFMfileprefix}{:a:b:c:}
-\adddriver{pltotf}{v1915test.sh2}
-\input v1913test.recs
-\donedrivers
-\bye
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.mtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.mtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 1829c79d02d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.mtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-\relax
-
-\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
-\usepackage{fontdoc}
-
-\errorcontextlines=999
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\metrics
-
-\foreach(glyph){a,b,c,d,tilde,\strint{a},db\str{a}ef,AB\str{glyph}CD}
- \resetglyph{\str{glyph}}
- \glyph{\str{glyph}}{1000}
- \resetitalic{0}
- \endresetglyph
-\endfor(glyph)
-
-
-\endmetrics
-
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 56f26a51b0f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-% v1916test.tex
-
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-% \half and \otherhalf
-\fontinstcc
-\for(i){-5}{5}{1}
- \eval_expr_to\b_count{\half{\int{i}}}
- \eval_expr{\otherhalf{\int{i}}}
- \immediate\write16{\strint{i}:~\the\b_count \space+~ \the\result}
-\endfor(i)
-\normalcc
-
-\bye
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test2.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 8cc954f2615..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1916test2.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-%&Plain
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-% %1 \ifareglyphs
-%
-% \setrawglyph{f}{xfont}{10pt}{102}{375}{750}{375}{50}
-% \setrawglyph{g}{xfont}{10pt}{102}{375}{750}{375}{50}
-% \setrawglyph{h}{xfont}{10pt}{102}{375}{750}{375}{50}
-%
-% \ifareglyphs{}\then True \else False \fi
-% \ifareglyphs{a}\then True \else False \fi
-% \ifareglyphs{f}\then True \else False \fi
-% \ifareglyphs{f,a}\then True \else False \fi
-% \ifareglyphs{a,f}\then True \else False \fi
-% \ifareglyphs{f,g}\then True \else False \fi
-% \ifareglyphs{f,g,a}\then True \else False \fi
-
-%2 \setfontdimen
-\generalpltomtx{ecrm1000}{ecrm1000}{pl}{t1draft}
-\generalpltomtx{ecss1000}{ecss1000}{pl}{t1draft}
-\transformfont{ecdh-shrunk}{%
- \yscalefont{500}{\fromplgivenetx{ecdh1000}{t1draft}}%
-}
-
-\bye
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1923test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1923test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index ede00d90444..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1923test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-%&Plain
-
-\input fontinst.sty
-
-% %1
-% \transformfont{padr8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padr8a}}}
-% \transformfont{padri8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{padri8a}}}
-%
-% \installfonts
-% \installfamily{T1}{pad2}{}
-% \installfont{zpad2i8t}{padri8r scaled 1009,%
-% padr8r scaled 999 suffix -upright scaled 1009,\metrics
-% % \expandafter\show \csname r-T-upright\endcsname
-% \unsetglyph{parenleft}
-% \setglyph{parenleft}
-% \glyph{parenleft-upright}{1000}
-% \endsetglyph
-% \resetglyph{parenright}
-% \glyph{parenright-upright}{1000}
-% \endresetglyph,latin}{t1}{T1}{pad2}{m}{it}{}
-% \endinstallfonts
-
-% %2
-%
-% \installfonts
-% \installfamily{U}{fad}{}
-% \installfont{fadrr}{fadrr}{textfdim,fadrr mtxasetx}{U}{fad}{m}{n}{}
-% \endinstallfonts
-
-% %3
-% \transformfont{pagk8r}{\reencodefont{8r}{\fromafm{pagk8a}}}
-% \installfonts
-% \installfont{pagk8t}{pagk8r,newlatin}{t1}{T1}{pag}{m}{n}{}
-% \endinstallfonts
-
-%4
-\installfonts
- \installfont{test}{rsfs10 encoding rsfs,cmsy10}{oms}{OMS}{xxx}{m}{n}{}
-\endinstallfonts
-% %4b
-% \installfonts
-% \installfont{test}{cmsy10,rsfs10 encoding rsfs}{oms}{OMS}{xxx}{m}{n}{}
-% \endinstallfonts
-
-
-\bye
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1927test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1927test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index b21f16bf60e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1927test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-%&Plain
-
-\input finstmsc.sty
-
-% %1
-% \etxtoenc{ot1}{temp}
-
-%2
-\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XX}}{}
-\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XX}}{}
-\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XY}}{}
-\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XX}}{}
-\storemapdata{a}{\fromafm{a}{XX}}{\reencodefont{8r}}
-
-
-
-\bye
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 8242cc3438c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-%&Plain
-
-\input finstmsc.sty
-
-%1
-\etxtocmap{t1draft}{temp}
-\etxtocmap{ot1draft}{ot1}
-\etxtocmap{omsdraft}{oms}
-
-
-
-\bye
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test2.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index c9b099e643c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/fontinst/base/test/v1928test2.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass{article}
-
-
-
-
-\def\FontWithCMap#1#2#3{%
- \font#1=#2\relax
- \immediate\pdfobj stream file {#3}%
- \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
-}
-\def\AddCMapToFont#1#2{%
- \immediate\pdfobj stream file {#2}%
- \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
-}
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-
-\FontWithCMap\test{cmr12}{ot1.cmap}
-\test abcdef ghijkl mnopqr stuvwx yz fi fl ffi ffl
-
-
-\begin{math}
- a
- \AddCMapToFont{\textfont2}{oms.cmap}
- \mathcal{A} - \mathcal{B} + \mathcal{C} * \mathcal{D} \cdot
- \mathcal{E} \bullet \mathcal{F} \spadesuit
-\end{math}
-
-
-\end{document}